2019 Nissan Sentra | Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information

2019 SENTRA

OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

This manual was prepared to help you un- warnings, cautions and instructions con- Before driving your vehicle, please read this derstand the operation and maintenance cerning proper use of such accessories Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac- familiarity with controls and maintenance miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. cessory. It is recommended that you visit a requirements assisting you in the safe op- Please read through this manual before NISSAN dealer for details concerning the eration of your vehicle. operating your vehicle. particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. WARNING A separate Warranty Information Book- IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION let explains details about the warranties REMINDERS! covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual Follow these important driving rules to explains details about maintaining and help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers! servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law ∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al- Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re- cohol or drugs. solve any concerns you may have with ∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits your vehicle, and clarify your rights un- and never drive too fast for conditions. der your state’s lemon law. ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to When you require any service or have any driving and avoid using vehicle fea- questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to tures or taking other actions that assist you with the extensive resources could distract you. available to them. ∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropri- In addition to factory-installed options, ate child restraint systems. Preteen chil- your vehicle may also be equipped with dren should be seated in the rear seat. additional accessories installed prior to de- ∙ ALWAYS provide information about livery. It is recommended that you visit a the proper use of vehicle safety fea- NISSAN dealer for details concerning the tures to all occupants of the vehicle. particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you ∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual familiarize yourself with all disclosures, for important safety information. WHEN READING THE MANUAL

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE This manual includes information for all sumer Affairs. For contact information, re- features and equipment available on this fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PRO- This vehicle should not be modified. model. Features and equipment in your ve- GRAM page in this Owner’s Manual. Modification could affect its hicle may vary depending on model, trim IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT performance, safety, emissions or du- level, options selected, order, date of pro- rability and may even violate govern- duction, region or availability. Therefore, THIS MANUAL mental regulations. In addition, dam- you may find information about features or You will see various symbols in this manual. age or performance problems equipment that are not included or in- They are used in the following ways: resulting from modifications may not stalled on your vehicle. be covered under NISSAN warranties. All information, specifications and illustra- WARNING tions in this manual are those in effect at This is used to indicate the presence of WARNING the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the a hazard that could cause death or seri- Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di- right to change specifications, perfor- ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses mance, design or component suppliers the risk, the procedures must be fol- the port during normal driving, for ex- without notice and without obligation. lowed precisely. ample remote insurance company From time to time, NISSAN may update or monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, revise this manual to provide Owners with CAUTION telematics or engine reprogramming, the most accurate information currently This is used to indicate the presence of may cause interference or damage to available. Please carefully read and retain a hazard that could cause minor or vehicle systems. We do not recommend with this manual all revision updates sent moderate personal injury or damage to or endorse the use of any aftermarket to you by NISSAN to ensure you have ac- your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically cess to accurate and up-to-date informa- the procedures must be followed approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war- tion regarding your vehicle. Current ver- carefully. ranty may not cover damage caused by sions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any any aftermarket plug-in device. updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con- CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: “Per- chlorate Material – special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG,

APD1005 Inc. and licensed If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do to Panasonic. this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle. © Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s Arrows in an illustration that are similar to Manual may be reproduced or stored in a these indicate movement or action. retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or oth- Arrows in an illustration that are similar to erwise, without the prior written permis- these call attention to an item in the illus- sion of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V. tration. NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

NISSAN CARES . . . Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs. However, if there is something that your The Consumer Affairs Department will ask You can write to NISSAN with the informa- NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or for the following information: tion at: you would like to provide NISSAN directly – Your name, address, and telephone For U.S. customers with comments or questions, please con- number Nissan North America, Inc. tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart- Consumer Affairs Department ment using our toll-free number: – Vehicle identification number (attached P.O. Box 685003 to the top of the instrument panel on the For U.S. customers Franklin, TN 37068-5003 driver’s side) 1-800-NISSAN-1 or via e-mail at: (1-800-647-7261) – Date of purchase [email protected] For Canadian customers For Canadian customers – Current odometer reading Nissan Canada Inc. 1-800-387-0122 – Your NISSAN dealer’s name 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 – Your comments or questions or via e-mail at: OR [email protected] If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle. Table of Illustrated table of contents 0 Contents Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1 Instruments and controls 2

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4

Starting and driving 5

In case of emergency 6

Appearance and care 7

Do-it-yourself 8

Maintenance and schedules 9

Technical and consumer information 10

Index 11

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ...... 0-2 Instrument panel...... 0-6 Exterior front ...... 0-3 Engine compartment check locations...... 0-8 Exterior rear ...... 0-4 Warning and indicator lights ...... 0-10 Passenger compartment...... 0-5 AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS

1. Top tether anchors (P. 1-23) 2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-12) 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and supplemental rollover air bag (P. 1-43) 4. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-7) 5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-12, 1-43) 6. Supplemental front-impact air bags (P. 1-43) 7. Front seats (P. 1-2) 8. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) (P. 1-43) 9. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) 10. Rear seats (P. 1-2) 11. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system (P. 1-23) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2403 0-2 Illustrated table of contents EXTERIOR FRONT

1. Engine hood (P. 3-25) 2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-38) 3. Windshield (P. 8-19) 4. Power windows (P. 2-55) 5. Door locks (P. 3-5) Key fob (if so equipped) (P. 3-8) NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) (P. 3-11) Keys (P. 3-2) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-31) 7. Tire pressure (P. 8-34) Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-34) 8. Headlight and turn signal switch (P. 2-40) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (if so equipped) (P. 2-40) 9. Fog light switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-40) Daytime Running Lights (DRL) (if so equipped) (P. 2-40) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2427 Illustrated table of contents 0-3 EXTERIOR REAR

1. Trunk lid (P. 3-26) Trunk lid release (P. 3-26) 2. High-mounted stop light (if so equipped) (P. 8-29) 3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29) 4. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-40) 5. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5) 6. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-27) Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-27) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) 7. Rearview camera (P. 4-8) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2382 0-4 Illustrated table of contents PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

1. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-58) 2. Interior lights (P. 2-59) 3. Sun visors (P. 3-30) 4. Rearview mirror (P. 3-31) 5. Glove box (P. 2-49) 6. Cup holders (P. 2-49) 7. Parking brake (P. 5-25) 8. Console box (P. 2-49) 9. Rear armrest (if so equipped) (P. 1-2) Cup holders (if so equipped) (P. 2-49) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LII2472 Illustrated table of contents 0-5 INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-40) 2. Steering wheel switch for trip computer (if so equipped)/vehicle information display (if so equipped) (P. 2-9, P.2-24) Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-31) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-54) 3. Driver’s supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) Horn (P. 2-46) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3) Warning and indicators lights (P. 2-13) 5. Cruise control switches (P. 5-45) Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-47) Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-54) 6. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-38) 7. Vents (P. 4-15) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Front passenger air bag status light (P. 1-43) LIC4037 10. Audio system (P. 4-2, 4-31) 0-6 Illustrated table of contents 11. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) 12. Glove box (P. 2-49) 13. Shift lever (P. 5-17) 14. Climate controls (P. 4-20, 4-28) 15. Ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-9) Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-11) 16. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-30) 17. Hood release (P. 3-25) Fuel filler door release (P. 3-27) 18. ECO mode switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-26) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-47) SPORT mode switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-26) 19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-40) Power mirror switch (P. 3-31) Trunk release (P. 3-26) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7 ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

MRA8DE engine 1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 3. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 4. Battery (P. 8-14) 5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22) 6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 9. Drive belt location (P.8-16) 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI2931 0-8 Illustrated table of contents MR16DDT engine 1. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7) 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid reservoir (P. 8-12) 3. Air cleaner (P. 8-18) 4. Battery (P. 8-14) 5. Fuse and relay box (P. 8-22) 6. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5) 7. Radiator cap (P. 8-5) 8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7) 9. Drive belt location (P. 8-16) 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir (P. 8-13) 11. Relay box (DTRL) (if so equipped) (P. 8-22) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.

LDI3011 Illustrated table of contents 0-9 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Warning Name Page Warning Name Page Warning Name Page light light light

Anti-lock Braking 2-14 Engine oil pres- 2-15 Power steering 2-18 System (ABS) sure warning light warning light or warning light (if so equipped) or Low fuel warning 2-16 light (if so equipped) Automatic Emer- 2-14 Seat belt warning 2-19 gency Braking Low tire pressure 2-16 light and chime (AEB) system warning light (if so warning light (if so equipped) Shift P (Park) 2-19 equipped) warning light (if so Low windshield- 2-18 equipped) Brake warning 2-14 washer fluid light warning light (if so Supplemental air 2-19 or equipped) bag warning light

Master warning 2-18 Indicator Name Page light (if so light Charge warning 2-15 equipped) light Continuously 2-20 NISSAN Intelligent 2-18 Variable Trans- Door open warn- 2-15 Key® warning light mission (CVT) po- ing light (if so (if so equipped) sition indicator equipped) light (CVT models) (if so equipped)

0-10 Illustrated table of contents Indicator Name Page Indicator Name Page light light

Cruise indicator 2-20 Overdrive OFF 2-22 light (if so indicator light (if equipped) so equipped)

ECO mode indica- 2-20 Security indicator 2-22 tor light (if so light equipped) Side light and 2-22 Engine start op- 2-20 headlight indica- eration indicator tor light (green) light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light 2-22

Front fog light in- 2-21 dicator light (if so SPORT mode indi- 2-22 equipped) cator light (if so Front passenger 2-21 equipped) air bag status Turn signal/ 2-22 light hazard indicator High beam indi- 2-21 lights cator light (blue) Vehicle Dynamic 2-22 Control (VDC) OFF Malfunction Indi- 2-21 indicator light cator Light (MIL)

Illustrated table of contents 0-11 MEMO

0-12 Illustrated table of contents 1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Seats...... 1-2 Seat belt extenders...... 1-19 Front manual seat adjustment Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-20 (for passenger’s seat and if so Child safety...... 1-20 equipped for driver’s seat) ...... 1-3 Infants ...... 1-21 Front power seat adjustment Small children ...... 1-21 (if so equipped for driver’s seat)...... 1-5 Larger children ...... 1-21 Folding rear seat ...... 1-6 Child restraints ...... 1-23 Center armrest (if so equipped)...... 1-7 Precautions on child restraints ...... 1-23 Head restraints/headrests ...... 1-7 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Adjustable head restraint/headrest CHildren) system ...... 1-25 components ...... 1-8 Rear-facing child restraint installation Non-adjustable head restraint/ using LATCH...... 1-28 headrest components...... 1-9 Rear-facing child restraint installation Remove...... 1-9 using the seat belts ...... 1-29 Install...... 1-10 Forward-facing child restraint Adjust ...... 1-10 installation using LATCH ...... 1-32 Seatbelts...... 1-12 Forward-facing child restraint Precautions on seat belt usage...... 1-12 installation using the seat belts...... 1-35 Seat belt warning light...... 1-15 Booster seats ...... 1-40 Pregnant women...... 1-15 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...... 1-43 Injured persons...... 1-15 Precautions on SRS...... 1-43 Three-point type seat belt with Supplemental air bag warning labels ...... 1-61 retractor...... 1-15 Supplemental air bag warning light...... 1-62 SEATS

∙ Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknow- ingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed ve- ARS1152 hicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a signifi- WARNING ∙ For the most effective protection cant risk of injury or death to people when the vehicle is in motion, the seat and pets. ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when should be upright. Always sit well the seatback is reclined. This can be ∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while back and upright in the seat with both dangerous. The shoulder belt will not driving so full attention may be given feet on the floor and adjust the seat be against your body. In an accident, to vehicle operation. The seat may properly. For additional information, you could be thrown into it and remove suddenly and could cause loss refer to “Precautions on seat belt us- ceive neck or other serious injuries. of control of the vehicle. age” in this section. You could also slide under the lap belt ∙ The seatback should not be reclined and receive serious internal injuries. ∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the any more than needed for comfort. seat to make sure it is securely locked. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CAUTION When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage. FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT (for passenger’s seat and if so equipped for driver’s seat) Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section. LRS2642 LRS2643 Forward and backward Reclining Pull the center of the bar up and hold it To recline the seatback, pull the lever up while you slide the seat forward or back- and lean back. To bring the seatback forward to the desired position. Release the ward, pull the lever up and lean your body bar to lock the seat in position. forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position. The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3 lever (CVT) is in P (Park) or the manual shift lever is in N (Neutral) with the parking brake applied.

LRS2644 Seat lifter (driver’s seat) Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking brake fully applied.

LRS2662 FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT Forward and backward (if so equipped for driver’s seat) Moving the switch as shown will slide the Operating tips seat forward or backward to the desired position. ∙ The power seat motor has an auto- reset overload protection circuit. If the Reclining motor stops during operation, wait 30 seconds then reactivate the switch. Move the recline switch as shown until the desired angle is obtained. ∙ Do not operate the power seat switch for a long period of time when the en- The reclining feature allows adjustment of gine is off. This will discharge the bat- the seatback for occupants of different tery. sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seatback can Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5 LRS2784 LRS2745 LRS2194 Seat lifter Lumbar support FOLDING REAR SEAT Move the switch as shown to adjust the The lumbar support feature provides ad- Pull the knob ᭺A to fold each seatback height of the seat cushion. justable lower back support to the driver. down. Push the switch as shown to adjust the seatback lumbar area. WARNING ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or WARNING straps to help prevent it from sliding Head restraints/headrests supplement or shifting. Do not place cargo higher the other vehicle safety systems. They than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop may provide additional protection or collision, unsecured cargo could against injury in certain rear end colli- cause personal injury. sions. Adjustable head ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the restraints/headrests must be adjusted upright position, be certain they are properly, as specified in this section. completely secured in the latched po- Check the adjustment after someone sition. If they are not completely se- else uses the seat. Do not attach any- cured, passengers may be injured in thing to the head restraint/headrest an accident or sudden stop. stalks or remove the head restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat ∙ Closely supervise children when they if the head restraint/headrest has been are around cars to prevent them from LRS2217 removed. If the head restraint/headrest playing and becoming locked in the CENTER ARMREST (if so equipped) was removed, reinstall and properly ad- trunk where they could be seriously just the head restraint/headrest before injured. Keep the car locked, with the Pull the armrest down as shown. an occupant uses the seating position. rear seatback and trunk lid securely Failure to follow these instructions can latched when not in use, and prevent reduce the effectiveness of the head children’s access to car keys. restraints/headrests. This may increase the risk of serious injury or death in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7 ∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position. ∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame. ∙ Proper Adjustment: – For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head LRS3024 restraint/headrest. LRS2300 The illustration shows the seating posi- ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ – If your ear position is still higher than tions equipped with head the recommended alignment, place HEADREST COMPONENTS restraints/headrests. the head restraint/headrest at the 1. Removable head restraint/headrest ᭡ Indicates the seating position is highest position. 2. Multiple notches equipped with a head restraint. ∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been Ⅲ Indicates the seating position is equipped removed, ensure that it is reinstalled 3. Lock knob with a headrest. and locked in place before riding in that 4. Stalks designated seating position. + Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable). ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable. 1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

LRS2299 LRS2302 NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD REMOVE RESTRAINT/HEADREST Use the following procedure to remove the COMPONENTS head restraint/headrest: 1. Removable head restraint/headrest 1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to 2. Single notch the highest position. 3. Lock knob 2. Push and hold the lock knob. 4. Stalks 3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat. 4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9 LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351 INSTALL ADJUST For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest 1. Align the head restraint/headrest For adjustable head restraint/headrest Make sure the head restraint/headrest is stalks with the holes in the seat. Make positioned so the lock knob is engaged in Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the sure that the head restraint/headrest is the notch before riding in that designated center is level with the center of your ears. If facing the correct direction. The stalk seating position. your ear position is still higher than the with the notch (notches) ᭺1 must be recommended alignment, place the head installed in the hole with the lock knob restraint/headrest at the highest position. ᭺2 . 2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down. 3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2305 LRS2306 Raise Lower To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it To lower, push and hold the lock knob and up. push the head restraint/headrest down. Make sure the head restraint/headrest is Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated the notch before riding in that designated seating position. seating position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11 SEAT BELTS

SSS0136 PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces USAGE or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being If you are wearing your seat belt properly driven. adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0134 SSS0016 WARNING WARNING ∙ Every person who drives or rides in ∙ The seat belt should be properly ad- this vehicle should use a seat belt at justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so all times. Children should be in the may reduce the effectiveness of the rear seats and in an appropriate entire restraint system and increase restraint. the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13 ∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se- ∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have curely fastened to the proper buckle. activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the ∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or retractor. It is recommended that you twisted. Doing so may reduce its visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. effectiveness. ∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re- ∙ Do not allow more than one person to tractors and attaching hardware, use the same seat belt. should be inspected after any colli- ∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle sion. It is recommended that you visit than there are seat belts. a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If the seat belt warning light glows NISSAN recommends that all seat belt continuously while the ignition is assemblies in use during a collision be turned ON with all doors closed and all replaced unless the collision was mi- SSS0014 seat belts fastened, it may indicate a nor and the belts show no damage malfunction in the system. Have the and continue to operate properly. WARNING system checked. It is recommended Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected ∙ Always route the shoulder belt over that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this and replaced if either damage or im- your shoulder and across your chest. service. proper operation is noted. Never put the belt behind your back, ∙ No changes should be made to the under your arm or across your neck. seat belt system. For example, do not ∙ All child restraints and attaching The belt should be away from your modify the seat belt, add material, or hardware should be inspected after face and neck, but not falling off your install devices that may change the any collision. Always follow the re- shoulder. seat belt routing or tension. Doing so straint manufacturer’s inspection instructions and replacement recom- ∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug may affect the operation of the seat mendations. The child restraints as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT belt system. Modifying or tampering should be replaced if they are THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high with the seat belt system may result damaged. could increase the risk of internal inju- in serious personal injury. ries in an accident.

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system PREGNANT WOMEN ∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when NISSAN recommends that pregnant the seatback is reclined. This can be women use seat belts. The seat belt should dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be worn snug and always position the lap be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and re- belt as low as possible around the hips, not ceive neck or other serious injuries. the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your You could also slide under the lap belt shoulder and across your chest. Never run and receive serious internal injuries. the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific rec- ∙ For the most effective protection when ommendations. the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and up- INJURED PERSONS right in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly. NISSAN recommends that injured persons LRS0786 use seat belts. Check with your doctor for ∙ Do not allow children to play with the SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT specific recommendations. seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Re- Both the driver’s and passenger’s front THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seats are equipped with a seat belt warn- WITH RETRACTOR seat belt becomes wrapped around a ing light. The warning light, located on the child’s neck with the ALR mode acti- instrument panel, will show the status of WARNING vated, the child can be seriously in- the driver and passenger seat belt. jured or killed if the seat belt retracts ∙ Every person who drives or rides in and becomes tight. This can occur NOTE: this vehicle should use a seat belt at even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle The front passenger seat belt warning all times. the seat belt to release the child. If the light will not light up if the seat is not seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is occupied. already unbuckled, release the child For additional information, refer to “Warn- by cutting the seat belt with a suitable ing lights, indicator lights and audible re- tool (such as a knife or scissors) to minders” in the “Instruments and controls” release the seat belt. section of this manual. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15 LRS2642 LRS2662 Manual front seat shown (if so equipped) Power front seat shown (if so equipped) Fastening the seat belts 1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to “Seats” in this section.

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts. The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation. When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt LRS2674 LRS2675 fully retracts. For additional information, re- 2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re- 3. Position the lap belt portion low and fer to “Child restraints” in this section. tractor and insert the tongue into the snug on the hips ᭺B as shown. buckle ᭺A until you hear and feel the The ALR mode should be used only for 4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward latch engage. child restraint installation. During nor- the retractor to take up extra slack ᭺C . mal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR ∙ The retractor is designed to lock Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over mode should not be activated. If it is ac- during a sudden stop or on impact. your shoulder and across your chest. A slow pulling motion permits the tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat The front passenger seat and the rear seat belt to move and allows you belt tension. It can also change the op- seating positions’ three-point seat belts some freedom of movement in the eration of the front passenger air bag. have two modes of operation: seat. For additional information, refer to ∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) “Front passenger air bag and status ∙ If the seat belt cannot be pulled light” in this section. from its fully retracted position, ∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17 WARNING Checking seat belt operation When fastening the seat belts, be cer- Seat belt retractors are designed to lock tain that the seatbacks are completely seat belt movement by two separate secured in the latched position. If they methods: are not completely secured, passengers ∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from may be injured in an accident or sudden the retractor stop. ∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows: ∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock WRS0139 and restrict further belt movement. Unfastening the seat belts If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recom- To unfasten the seat belt, press the button mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for on the buckle ᭺1 . The seat belt automati- this service, or to learn more about seat cally retracts. belt operation.

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING WARNING ∙ After adjustment, release the adjust- ∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, ment button and try to move the made by the same company which shoulder belt anchor up and down to made the original equipment seat make sure it is securely fixed in belts, should be used with NISSAN position. seat belts. ∙ The shoulder belt anchor height ∙ Adults and children who can use the should be adjusted to the position standard seat belt should not use an best for you. Failure to do so may re- extender. Such unnecessary use duce the effectiveness of the entire could result in serious personal injury restraint system and increase the in the event of an accident. chance or severity of injury in an ∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in- accident. LRS0242 stall child restraints. If the child re- SEAT BELT EXTENDERS straint is not secured properly, the Shoulder belt height adjustment child could be seriously injured or (front seats) If, because of body size or driving position, it killed in a collision or a sudden stop. is not possible to properly fit the The shoulder belt anchor height should be lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender adjusted to the position best for you. For that is compatible with the installed seat additional information, refer to “Precau- belts is available for purchase. The ex- tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) adjust, pull out the adjustment button ᭺1 of length and may be used for either the and move the shoulder belt anchor to the driver or front passenger seating position. desired position ᭺2 , so the belt passes over It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN the center of the shoulder. The belt should dealer for assistance with purchasing an be away from your face and neck, but not extender if an extender is required. falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19 CHILD SAFETY

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE WARNING There are three basic types of child restraint systems: ∙ To clean the seat belt webbing, apply Do not allow children to play with the a mild soap solution or any solution rec- seat belts. Most seating positions are ∙ Rear-facing child restraints ommended for cleaning upholstery or equipped with Automatic Locking Re- ∙ Forward-facing child restraints carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not belt becomes wrapped around a child’s ∙ Booster seats allow the seat belts to retract until they neck with the ALR mode activated, the The proper restraint depends on the child’s are completely dry. child can be seriously injured or killed if size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year ∙ If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt the seat belt retracts and becomes and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed guide of the seat belt anchors, the tight. This can occur even if the vehicle in rear-facing child restraints. Forward- seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re- facing child restraints are available for chil- shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be dren who outgrow rear-facing child re- cloth. unbuckled or is already unbuckled, restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster lease the child by cutting the seat belt seats are used to help position a vehicle ∙ Periodically check to see that the seat with a suitable tool (such as a knife or lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no belt and the metal components, such scissors) to release the seat belt. longer use a forward-facing child restraint. as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible Children need adults to help protect wires and anchors, work properly. If WARNING loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other them. They need to be properly re- damage on the webbing is found, the strained. Infants and children need special pro- entire seat belt assembly should be re- In addition to the general information in tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not placed. this manual, child safety information is fit them properly.The shoulder belt may available from many other sources, includ- come too close to the face or neck. The ing doctors, teachers, government traffic lap belt may not fit over their small hip safety offices, and community organiza- bones. In an accident, an improperly fit- tions. Every child is different, so be sure to ting seat belt could cause serious or fa- learn the best way to transport your child. tal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. LARGER CHILDREN territories require the use of approved child You should choose a child restraint that fits restraints for infants and small children. For your vehicle and always follow the manu- Children should remain in a forward-facing additional information, refer to “Child re- facturer’s instructions for installation and child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit straints” in this section. use. allowed by the child restraint manufac- A child restraint may be secured in the ve- SMALL CHILDREN turer. hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An- Children that are over 1 year old and weigh Once a child outgrows the height or weight chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a limit of the harness-equipped forward- with the vehicle seat belt. For additional rear-facing child restraint as long as pos- facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sible up to the height or weight limit of the that the child be placed in a commercially section. child restraint. Children who outgrow the available booster seat to obtain proper NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens height or weight limit of the rear-facing seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the and children be restrained in the rear child restraint and are at least 1 year old booster seat should raise the child so that seat. Studies show that children are should be secured in a forward-facing child the shoulder belt is properly positioned safer when properly restrained in the restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu- across the chest and the top, middle por- rear seat than in the front seat. facturer’s instructions for minimum and tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt maximum weight and height recommen- should not cross the neck or face and This is especially important because dations. NISSAN recommends that small should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt your vehicle has a supplemental re- children be placed in child restraints that should lie snugly across the lower hips or straint system (air bag system) for the comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster front passenger. For additional informa- Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle seat can only be used in seating positions tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint Safety Standards. You should choose a that have a three-point type seat belt. The System (SRS)” in this section. child restraint that fits your vehicle and al- booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- have a label certifying that it complies with INFANTS tions for installation and use. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Infants up to at least 1 year old should be Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21 A booster seat should be used until the NOTE: child can pass the seat belt fit test below: Laws in some communities may follow ∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the different guidelines. Check local and vehicle seatback? state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before ∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch- traveling. ing? ∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over WARNING the front edge of the seat with feet flat Never let a child stand or kneel on any on the floor? seat and do not allow a child in the ∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt cargo area. The child could be seriously (lap belt low and snug across the hips injured or killed in a sudden stop or and shoulder belt across mid-chest collision. and shoulder)? LRS2690 ∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad- If you answered no to any of these ques- justed head restraint/headrest? tions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt. ∙ Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system CHILD RESTRAINTS

– NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forward- facing child restraint in the front seat, refer to “Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts” in this section. – Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rear- facing child restraint in the front ARS1098 WRS0256 seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rear- PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD – The child restraint must be used facing child restraint must only be RESTRAINTS and installed properly. Always fol- used in the rear seat. low all of the child restraint manu- – Be sure to purchase a child re- facturer’s instructions for installa- WARNING straint that will fit the child and ve- tion and use. ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- hicle. Some child restraints may structions for proper use and installa- – Infants and children should never not fit properly in your vehicle. tion of child restraints could result in be held on anyone’s lap. Even the serious injury or death of a child or strongest adult cannot resist the other passengers in a sudden stop or forces of a collision. collision: – Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23 Several manufacturers offer child re- – Child restraint anchorages are de- ∙ When the child restraint is not in use, signed to withstand only those keep it secured with the LATCH system straints for infants and children of various loads imposed by correctly fitted or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col- sizes. When selecting any child restraint, child restraints. Under no circum- lision, loose objects can injure occu- keep the following points in mind: stances are they to be used to at- pants or damage the vehicle. ∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer- tach adult seat belts, or other items tifying that it complies with Federal Mo- or equipment to the vehicle. Doing CAUTION tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana- so could damage the child re- dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213. straint anchorages. The child re- A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating straint will not be properly in- ∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle surface and buckles before placing a stalled using the damaged to be sure it is compatible with the vehi- child in the child restraint. anchorage, and a child could be se- cle’s seat and seat belt system. riously injured or killed in a This vehicle is equipped with a universal collision. child restraint anchor system, referred to ∙ If the child restraint is compatible with as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers your vehicle, place your child in the child – Never use the anchor points for restraint and check the various adjust- adult seat belts, or other items. for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments to be sure the child restraint is – A child restraint with a top tether ments that can be connected to these an- compatible with your child. Choose a strap should not be used in the chors. For additional information, refer to child restraint that is designed for your front passenger seat. “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for child’s height and weight. Always follow – Keep seatbacks as upright as pos- CHildren) system” in this section. all recommended procedures. sible after fitting the child If you do not have a LATCH compatible ∙ If the combined weight of the child and restraint. child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be child restraint is less than 65 lbs. – Infants and children should always used. (29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH be placed in an appropriate child anchors or the seat belt to install the restraint while in the vehicle. child restraint (not both at the same time).

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ If the combined weight of the child and install the child restraint. Be sure to follow child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc- (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not tions for installation. the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard ∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint seating positions only. Do not attempt to manufacturer’s instructions for installa- install a child restraint in the center position tion. using the LATCH anchors. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small LATCH lower anchor children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the ve- WARNING hicle is being operated. Canadian law re- Failure to follow the warnings and in- quires the top tether strap on forward- WRS0756 structions for proper use and installa- facing child restraints be secured to the LATCH system lower anchor locations tion of child restraints could result in designated anchor point on the vehicle. LATCH (Lower Anchors and serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM collision: Your vehicle is equipped with special an- – Attach LATCH system compatible chor points that are used with LATCH sys- child restraints only at the loca- tem compatible child restraints. This sys- tions shown in the illustration. tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys- – Do not secure a child restraint in tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat the center rear seating position us- belt to secure the child restraint unless the ing the LATCH lower anchors. The combined weight of the child and child re- child restraint will not be secured straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- properly. bined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25 – Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed. Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat LRS3036 LRS0661 belts, or other items or equipment to LATCH lower anchor location LATCH webbing-mounted attachment the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child re- LATCH lower anchor location Installing child restraint LATCH straint will not be properly installed us- The LATCH lower anchors are located as lower anchor attachments ing the damaged anchorage, and a shown. A label is attached to the seatback LATCH compatible child restraints include child could be seriously injured or killed to help you locate the LATCH lower an- in a collision. two rigid or webbing-mounted attach- chors. ments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer. 1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Top tether anchor point locations

WARNING Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed LRS0662 LRS0723 in a collision. LATCH rigid-mounted attachment When installing a child restraint, carefully The child restraint top tether strap must be read and follow the instructions in this used when installing the child restraint with manual and those supplied with the child the LATCH lower anchor attachments or restraint. seat belts. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap child restraint, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Anchor points ᭺1 are located on the rear parcel shelf.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27 REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child restraints” sections of this manual before installing a child restraint. Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s LRS2997 LRS2996 instructions for installation. Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2 Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- Follow these steps to install a rear-facing tachments to the LATCH lower an- child restraint using the LATCH system: chors. Check to make sure the LATCH 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. attachment is properly attached to the Always follow the child restraint manu- lower anchors. facturer’s instructions.

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4. REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING LRS0673 LRS0674 The three-point seat belt with Auto- Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be 3. For child restraints that are equipped 4. After attaching the child restraint, test used when installing a child restraint. with webbing-mounted attachments, it before you place the child in it. Push it Failure to use the ALR mode will result in remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child the child restraint not being properly anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment secured. The restraint could tip over or and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not be loose and cause injury to a child in a child restraint with your hand to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from sudden stop or collision. press the vehicle seat cushion and side to side. Try to tug it forward and For additional information, refer to all Warn- seatback while tightening the webbing check to see if the LATCH attachment ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the re- “Child restraints” sections of this manual straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH before installing a child restraint. attachment as necessary, or put the Do not use the lower anchors if the com- restraint in another seat and test it bined weight of the child and the child re- again. You may need to try a different straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- child restraint or try installing by using bined weight of the child and the child Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29 restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation. Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:

WRS0256 WRS0761 Rear-facing – step 1 Rear-facing – step 2 1. Child restraints for infants must be 2. Route the seat belt tongue through the used in the rear-facing direction and child restraint and insert it into the therefore must not be used in the buckle until you hear and feel the latch front seat. Position the child restraint engage. Be sure to follow the child re- on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for straint manufacturer’s instructions. belt routing.

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system LRS2395 LRS2396 WRS0762 Rear-facing – step 3 Rear-facing – step 4 Rear-facing – step 5 3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on 5. Remove any additional slack from the fully extended. At this time, the seat belt the shoulder belt to remove any slack seat belt; press downward and rear- retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- in the belt. ward firmly in the center of the child straint mode). It reverts to the ELR restraint to compress the vehicle seat mode when the seat belt is fully re- cushion and seatback while pulling up tracted. on the seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31 7. Check to make sure that the child re- Follow these steps to install a forward- straint is properly secured prior to each facing child restraint using the LATCH sys- use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat tem: steps 3 through 6. 1. Position the child restraint on the seat. After the child restraint is removed and the Always follow the child restraint manu- seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode facturer’s instructions. (child restraint mode) is canceled. FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH For additional information, refer to all Warn- ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and LRS2397 “Child restraints” sections of this manual Rear-facing – step 6 before installing a child restraint. 6. After attaching the child restraint, test Do not use the lower anchors if the com- it before you place the child in it. Push it bined weight of the child and the child re- from side to side while holding the child straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint near the seat belt path. The bined weight of the child and the child child restraint should not move more restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- Try to tug it forward and check to see if chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure the belt holds the restraint in place. If to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s the restraint is not secure, tighten the instructions for installation. seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.

LRS2995 LRS2994 Forward-facing webbing-mounted – Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2 step 2 seating positions that do not have a 2. Secure the child restraint anchor at- top tether anchor. tachments to the LATCH lower an- 3. The back of the child restraint should chors. Check to make sure the LATCH be secured against the vehicle seat- attachment is properly attached to the back. lower anchors. If necessary, adjust or remove the head If the child restraint is equipped with a restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- top tether strap, route the top tether rect child restraint fit. If the head strap and secure the tether strap to restraint/headrest is removed, store it the tether anchor point. For additional in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall information, refer to “Installing top the head restraint/headrest when tether strap” in this section. the child restraint is removed. For ad- Do not install child restraints that re- ditional information, refer to “Head quire the use of a top tether strap in restraints/headrests” in this section. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33 7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.

LRS0671 WRS0697 Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 6 4. For child restraints that are equipped 6. After attaching the child restraint, test with webbing-mounted attachments, it before you place the child in it. Push it remove any additional slack from the from side to side while holding the child anchor attachments. Press downward restraint near the LATCH attachment and rearward firmly in the center of the path. The child restraint should not child restraint with your knee to com- move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from press the vehicle seat cushion and side to side. Try to tug it forward and seatback while tightening the webbing check to see if the LATCH attachment of the anchor attachments. holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH 5. Tighten the tether strap according to attachment as necessary, or put the the manufacturer’s instructions to re- restraint in another seat and test it move any slack. again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear bench seat FORWARD-FACING CHILD OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS 1. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 over the seatback. WARNING 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point ᭺2 as shown. The three-point seat belt with Auto- matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be 3. Tighten the tether strap according to used when installing a child restraint. the manufacturer’s instructions to re- Failure to use the ALR mode will result in move any slack. the child restraint not being properly If you have any questions when install- secured. The restraint could tip over or ing a top tether strap, it is recommended be loose and cause injury to a child in a that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this sudden stop or collision. Also, it can LRS3177 service. change the operation of the front pas- Rear seats senger air bag. For additional information, refer to “Front passenger air bag ᭺1 Top tether strap WARNING and status light” in this section. ᭺2 Anchor point Child restraint anchorages are de- Installing top tether strap signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- The child restraint top tether strap must be straints. Under no circumstances are used when installing the child restraint with they to be used to attach adult seat the LATCH lower anchor attachments. belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the First, secure the child restraint with the child restraint anchorages. The child re- LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi- straint will not be properly installed us- tions only). ing the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35 Follow these steps to install a forward- If the seating position does not have facing child restraint using the vehicle seat an adjustable head restraint/headrest belt in the rear seats or in the front passen- and it is interfering with the proper ger seat: child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint. 1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat. 2. Position the child restraint on the seat. WRS0699 Always follow the child restraint manu- Forward-facing (front passenger seat) – facturer’s instructions. step 1 For additional information, refer to all Warn- The back of the child restraint should ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and be secured against the vehicle seat- “Child restraints” sections of this manual back. before installing a child restraint. If necessary, adjust or remove the head Do not use the lower anchors if the com- restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- bined weight of the child and the child re- rect child restraint fit. If the head straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com- restraint/headrest is removed, store it bined weight of the child and the child in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the head restraint/headrest when the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an- the child restraint is removed. For ad- chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure ditional information, refer to “Head to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s restraints/headrests” in this section. instructions for installation. 1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WRS0680 LRS0667 LRS0668 Forward-facing – step 3 Forward-facing – step 4 Forward-facing – step 5 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the 4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on child restraint and insert it into the buckle fully extended. At this time, the seat belt the shoulder belt to remove any slack until you hear and feel the latch engage. retractor is in the ALR mode (child re- in the belt. Be sure to follow the child restraint manu- straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode facturer’s instructions for belt routing. when the seat belt is fully retracted. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to “Installing top tether strap” in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37 9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.

WRS0681 WRS0698 Forward-facing – step 6 Forward-facing – step 8 6. Remove any additional slack from the 8. After attaching the child restraint, test seat belt; press downward and rear- it before you place the child in it. Push it ward firmly in the center of the child from side to side while holding the child restraint with your knee to compress restraint near the seat belt path. The the vehicle seat cushion and seatback child restraint should not move more while pulling up on the seat belt. than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. 7. Tighten the tether strap according to Try to tug it forward and check to see if the manufacturer’s instructions to re- the belt holds the restraint in place. If move any slack. the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles. 1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Rear bench seat OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS 1. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 over the seatback. 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point ᭺2 as shown. 3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions to remove any slack. CENTER SEATING POSITION 1. Position the top tether strap ᭺1 over the WRS0475 LRS3176 seatback. Forward-facing — step 10 Rear seats 10. If the child restraint is installed in the ᭺1 Top tether strap 2. Secure the tether strap to the tether front passenger seat, place the ignition anchor point ᭺2 as shown. 2 switch in the ON position. The front ᭺ Anchor point 3. Tighten the tether strap according to passenger air bag status light Installing top tether strap the manufacturer’s instructions to re- should illuminate. If this light is not illu- move any slack. minated, refer to “Front passenger air The child restraint top tether strap must be bag and status light” in this section. used when installing the child restraint with If you have any questions when install- Move the child restraint to another seat belts. ing a top tether strap, it is recommended seating position. Have the system First, secure the child restraint with the seat that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this checked. It is recommended that you belt. service. visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39 WARNING Precautions on booster seats Child restraint anchorages are de- WARNING signed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child re- If a booster seat and seat belt are not straints. Under no circumstances are used properly, the risk of a child being they to be used to attach adult seat injured or killed in a sudden stop or col- belts, or other items or equipment to lision greatly increases: the vehicle. Doing so could damage the – Make sure the shoulder portion of child restraint anchorages. The child re- the belt is away from the child’s straint will not be properly installed us- face and neck and the lap portion ing the damaged anchorage, and a of the belt does not cross the child could be seriously injured or killed stomach. in a collision. – Make sure the shoulder belt is not BOOSTER SEATS behind the child or under the LRS2479 child’s arm. A. Low back booster seat For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in- – A booster seat must only be in- B. High back booster seat structions outlined in this section. stalled in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures. All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats LRS0453 LRS0464 or the front passenger seat. Booster seats of various sizes are offered ∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop- Booster seat installation by several manufacturers. When selecting erly supported by the booster seat or any booster seat, keep the following points vehicle seat. The seatback must be at WARNING in mind: or above the center of the child’s ears. For example, if a low back booster seat To avoid injury to child, do not use the ∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic certifying that it complies with Federal Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us- at or above the center of the child’s ears. Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or ing a booster seat with the seat belts. If the seatback is lower than the center Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- of the child’s ears, a high back booster For additional information, refer to all Warn- dard 213. seat should be used. ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”, ∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle “Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec- to be sure it is compatible with the vehi- tions of this manual before installing a child cle’s seat and seat belt system. restraint.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41 If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat. 4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder WRS0699 LRS0454 belt is positioned across the top, Follow these steps to install a booster seat Front passenger position middle portion of the child’s shoulder. in the rear seat or in the front passenger 3. The booster seat should be positioned Be sure to follow the booster seat seat: on the vehicle seat so that it is stable. manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing. 1. If you must install a booster seat in If necessary, adjust or remove the head the front seat, move the seat to the restraint/headrest to obtain the cor- 6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in- rearmost position. rect booster seat fit. If the head structions for properly fastening a seat restraint/headrest is removed, store it belt shown in “Three-point type seat 2. Position the booster seat on the seat. in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall belt with retractor” in this section. Only place it in a front-facing direction. the head restraint/headrest when Always follow the booster seat manu- the booster seat is removed. For ad- facturer’s instructions. ditional information, refer to “Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and This SRS section contains important infor- rollover supplemental air bag system mation concerning the following systems: This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in front and ∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen- rear outboard seating positions in certain tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad- side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags vanced Air Bag System) are designed to inflate on the side where ∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the supplemental air bag curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time. ∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and ∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front front passenger seat belts and is not a WRS0475 seats) substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant 7. If the booster seat is installed in the Supplemental front-impact air bag sys- seated a suitable distance away from the front passenger seat, place the ignition tem switch in the ON position. The front pas- steering wheel, instrument panel and door The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can finishers. For additional information, refer senger air bag status light may or to “Seat belts” in this section. may not illuminate, depending on the help cushion the impact force to the head size of the child and the type of booster and chest of the driver and front passenger The supplemental air bags operate only seat being used. For additional infor- in certain frontal collisions. when the ignition switch is placed in the mation, refer to “Front passenger air Front seat-mounted side-impact ON position. bag and status light” in this section. supplemental air bag system After placing the ignition switch in the This system can help cushion the impact ON position, the supplemental air bag force to the chest area of the driver and warning light illuminates. The supple- front passenger in certain side-impact col- mental air bag warning light will turn off lisions. The side air bags are designed to after about 7 seconds if the system is inflate on the side where the vehicle is im- operational. pacted. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43 Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts. ∙ The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. WRS0031 ∙ The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sen- WARNING ∙ The seat belts and the front air bags sor (weight sensor) that turns the are most effective when you are sit- ∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not front passenger air bag OFF under ting well back and upright in the seat. inflate in the event of a side impact, some conditions. This sensor is only The front air bags inflate with great rear impact, rollover, or lower severity used in this seat. Failure to be properly force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced frontal collision. Always wear your seated and wearing the seat belt can Air Bag System, if you are unre- seat belts to help reduce the risk or increase the risk or severity of injury in strained, leaning forward, sitting side- severity of injury in various kinds of an accident. For additional informa- ways or out of position in any way, you accidents tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag are at greater risk of injury or death in and status light” in this section. ∙ The front passenger air bag will not a crash. You may also receive serious inflate if the passenger air bag status or fatal injuries from the front air bag ∙ Keep hands on the outside of the light is lit. For additional information, if you are up against it when it inflates. steering wheel. Placing them inside refer to “Front passenger air bag and the steering wheel rim could increase status light” in this section. the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1133 ARS1041 WARNING ∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45 ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044 WARNING ∙ Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431 WARNING WARNING ∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Front seat-mounted side-impact Bag System, never install a rear- supplemental air bags and roof- facing child restraint in the front seat. mounted curtain side-impact and roll- An inflating front air bag could seri- over supplemental air bags: ously injure or kill your child. For addi- ∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags tional information, refer to “Child re- ordinarily will not inflate in the event straints” in this section. of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47 WARNING ∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their LRS3119 hand out of the window or lean WRS0032 against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown WARNING in the previous illustrations. ∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations. ∙ Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system SSS0162 SSS0159

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49 NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats) 1. Top tether anchor 2. Rear seat belts 3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag 4. Head restraints/headrests 5. Front seat belts 6. Supplemental front-impact air bags 7. Front crash zone sensor 8. Pressure sensors in door (front passenger side shown; driver’s side similar) 9. Front seats 10. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) 11. Satellite crash zone sensor 12. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats) 13. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag 14. Rear seats 15. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system LRS2774 16. Satellite crash zone sensor 1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING ∙ If a forward-facing child restraint is ∙ Do not position the front passenger installed in the front passenger seat, seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the To ensure proper operation of the pas- do not position the front passenger front seat does contact the rear seat, senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air bag Sys- seat so the child restraint contacts the the air bag system may determine a tem, please observe the following instrument panel. If the child restraint sensor malfunction has occurred and items. does contact the instrument panel, the front passenger air bag status ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear the system may determine the seat is light may illuminate and the supple- seat to push or pull on the seatback occupied and the passenger air bag mental air bag warning light may pocket. may deploy in a collision. Also the flash. ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional in- This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and restraint/headrest or in the seatback formation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section. front passenger seats. This system is de- pocket. signed to meet certification requirements ∙ Make sure that there is nothing press- ∙ Confirm the operating condition with under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in the front passenger air bag status ing against the rear of the seatback, Canada. All of the information, cautions light. such as a child restraint installed in and warnings in this manual must be fol- the rear seat or an object stored on ∙ If you notice that the front passenger lowed. the floor. air bag status light is not operating as The driver supplemental front-impact air ∙ Make sure that there is no object described in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. bag is located in the center of the steering placed under the front passenger wheel. The front passenger supplemental seat. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. front-impact air bag is mounted in the ∙ Make sure that there is no object dashboard above the glove box. The front ∙ Until you have confirmed with a placed between the seat cushion and air bags are designed to inflate in higher dealer that your passenger seat occu- center console or between the seat severity frontal collisions, although they cushion and the door. pant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in may inflate if the forces in another type of the rear seating positions. collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51 damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi- ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con- too close to, or is against, the front air bag cation of proper front air bag system op- tact information is contained in the front of module during inflation. eration. this Owner’s Manual. The front air bags deflate quickly after a The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud collision. monitors information from the crash zone noise may be heard, followed by the re- The front air bags operate only when the sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU). Infla- lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful ignition switch is placed in the ON posi- tor operation is based on the severity of a and does not indicate a fire. Care should be tion. collision and seat belt usage for the driver. taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita- For the front passenger, the occupant clas- tion and choking. Those with a history of a After placing the ignition switch in the sification sensor is also monitored. Based breathing condition should get fresh air ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supple- on information from the sensor, only one promptly. front air bag may inflate in a crash, depend- mental air bag warning light will turn off ing on the crash severity and whether the Front air bags, along with the use of seat after about 7 seconds if the system is front occupants are belted or unbelted. Ad- belts, help to cushion the impact force on operational. ditionally, the front passenger air bag may the face and chest of the front occupants. be automatically turned off under some They can help save lives and reduce seri- conditions, depending on the weight de- ous injuries. However, an inflating front air tected on the front passenger seat and bag may cause facial abrasions or other how the seat belt is used. If the front pas- injuries. Front air bags do not provide re- senger air bag is OFF, the passenger air straint to the lower body. bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Front passen- Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat ger air bag and status light” in this section. belts should be correctly worn and the One front air bag inflating does not indicate driver and front passenger seated upright improper performance of the system. as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air If you have any questions about your air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect bag system, it is recommended that you the front occupants. Because of this, the visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information force of the front air bag inflating can in- about the system. If you are considering crease the risk of injury if the occupant is modification of your vehicle due to a dis- 1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system Front passenger air bag and status light sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag on or off depending on the weight ap- WARNING plied to the front passenger seat. The sta- The front passenger air bag is designed tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or to automatically turn OFF under some OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air conditions. Read this section carefully bag status light which is located on to learn how it operates. Proper use of the instrument panel. the seat, seat belt and child restraints is After the ignition switch is placed in the necessary for most effective protec- "ON" position, the front passenger air bag tion. Failure to follow all instructions in status light on the instrument panel illumi- this manual concerning the use of nates for about 7 seconds and then turns seats, seat belts and child restraints can off or remains illuminated depending on increase the risk or severity of injury in the front passenger seat occupied status. an accident. WRS0475 The light operates as follows: Status light The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS LIGHT ( ) FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Nobody/Somebody ON (illuminated) INHIBITED Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects For additional information, refer to “Normal placed on the front passenger seat may operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this also cause the light to operate as de- section. scribed above depending on their weight.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53 Front passenger air bag Front passenger seat adult occupants who additional information, refer to “Child re- are properly seated and using the seat belt straints” in this section. The front passenger air bag is designed to as outlined in this manual should not automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is If the front passenger seat is not occupied, cause the front passenger air bag to be operated under some conditions as de- the front passenger air bag is designed not automatically turned OFF. For small adults scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu- to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects it may be turned OFF, however if the occu- lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, placed on the seat could result in air bag pant takes his/her weight off the seat it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag inflation, because of the object’s weight de- cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, and other air bags in your vehicle are not tected by the occupant classification sen- by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by part of this system. sor. Other conditions could also result in air otherwise being out of position), this could bag inflation, such as if a child is standing The purpose of the regulation is to help cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. on the seat, or if two children are on the reduce the risk of injury or death from an Always be sure to be seated and wearing seat, contrary to the instructions in this inflating air bag to certain front passenger the seat belt properly for the most effective manual. Always be sure that you and all seat occupants, such as children, by requir- protection by the seat belt and supple- vehicle occupants are seated and re- ing the air bag to be automatically turned mental air bag. strained properly. OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and requirements. Using the front passenger air bag status children be properly restrained in a rear light, you can monitor when the front pas- The occupant classification sensor in this seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap- senger air bag is automatically turned OFF. vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to propriate child restraints and booster If an adult occupant is in the seat but the seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If detect an occupant and objects on the front passenger air bag status light is illu- this is not possible, the occupant classifica- seat by weight. For example, if a child is in minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), tion sensor is designed to operate as de- the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad- it could be that the person is a small adult, scribed above to turn the front passenger vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn or is not sitting on the seat properly or not air bag OFF for specified child restraints as the front passenger air bag OFF in accor- using the seat belt properly. dance with the regulations. Also, if a child required by the regulations. Failing to prop- restraint of the type specified in the regula- erly secure child restraints and to use the If a child restraint must be used in the front tions is on the seat, its weight and the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or seat, the front passenger air bag status move in a collision or sudden stop. This can light may or may not be illuminated, de- child’s weight can be detected and cause also result in the passenger air bag inflat- pending on the size of the child and the the air bag to turn OFF. ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For type of child restraint being used. If the air 1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system bag status light is not illuminated (indicat- bag warning light , located in the me- ∙ Make sure that there is no object placed ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash), ter and gauges area of the instrument under the front passenger seat. it could be that the child restraint or seat panel, will be illuminated (blinking or Steps belt is not being used properly. Make sure steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is that the child restraint is installed properly, recommended that you visit a NISSAN 1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats” the seat belt is used properly and the occu- dealer for this service. section of this manual. Sit upright, lean- pant is positioned properly. If the air bag ing against the seatback, and centered status light is still not illuminated, reposi- Normal operation on the seat cushion with your feet com- tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear In order for the occupant classification fortably extended to the floor. seat. sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the pre- 2. Make sure there are no objects on your If the front passenger air bag status light cautions and steps outlined below: lap. will not illuminate even though you believe 3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the that the child restraint, the seat belts and Precautions “Seat belts” section of this manual. the occupant are properly positioned, it is ∙ Make sure that there are no objects Front passenger seat belt buckle sta- recommended that you take your vehicle weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on tus is monitored by the occupant clas- to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can the seat or placed in the seatback sification system, and is used as an in- check system status by using a special pocket. put to determine occupancy status. So, tool. However, until you have confirmed it is highly recommended that the front with a dealer that your air bag is working ∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other properly, reposition the occupant or child object is not pressing against the rear passenger fasten their seat belt. restraint in a rear seat. of the seatback. 4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and ∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not allowing the system to classify the front passenger air bag status light will pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger before the vehicle is take a few seconds to register a change in front passenger seat. put into motion. the front passenger seat status. This is nor- ∙ Make sure that the front passenger 5. Ensure proper classification by check- mal system operation and does not indi- ing the front passenger air bag status cate a malfunction. seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor light. If a malfunction occurs in the front passen- behind it. ger air bag system, the supplemental air Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55 NOTE: However, if the occupant is not a small NOTE: adult, then this may be due to the following This vehicle’s occupant classification A system check will be performed during conditions that may be interfering with the sensor system generally keeps the clas- which the front passenger air bag status weight sensors: sification locked during driving, so it is light will remain lit for about 7 seconds important that you confirm that the ∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning initially. front passenger is properly classified against the seatback, and centered on If the light is still ON after this, the person prior to driving. However, the occupant the seat cushion with his/her feet com- should be advised not to ride in the front classification sensor may recalculate the fortably extended to the floor. weight of the occupant under some con- passenger seat and the vehicle should be ditions (both while driving and when ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing checked as soon as possible. It is recom- stopped), so front passenger seat occu- against the rear of the seatback. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for pants should continue to remain seated this service. as outlined above. ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat. 2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, Troubleshooting child or child restraint occupying the ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback front passenger seat. If you think the front passenger air bag against an object on the seat or floor status light is incorrect: behind it. This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the 1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying ∙ An object placed under the front pas- weight sensors: the front passenger seat: senger seat. ∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright, ∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag ∙ An object placed between the seat light is functioning as intended. The leaning against the seatback, and cen- cushion and center console or between front passenger air bag is suppressed. tered on the seat cushion with his/her the seat cushion and the door. feet comfortably extended to the floor. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a ∙ The child restraint is not properly in- stop when it is safe to do so. Check and stalled, as outlined in the “Child re- correct any of the above conditions. Re- straints” section of this manual. start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. ∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket. 1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system ∙ A child restraint or other object pressing 3. If the light is OFF with no front passen- ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes against the rear of the seatback. ger and no objects on the front pas- to your vehicle’s electrical system, senger seat, the vehicle should be ∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on suspension system or front end struc- checked. It is recommended that you the back of the front passenger seat. ture. This could affect proper opera- visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos- tion of the front air bag system. ∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback sible. against an object on the seat or floor ∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys- Other supplemental front-impact air behind it. tem may result in serious personal in- bag precautions jury. Tampering includes changes to ∙ An object placed under the front pas- the steering wheel and the instru- senger seat. WARNING ment panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and ∙ Do not place any objects on the steer- ∙ An object placed between the seat above the instrument panel or by in- ing wheel pad or on the instrument cushion and center console. stalling additional trim material panel. Also, do not place any objects around the air bag system. If the vehicle is moving, please come to a between any occupant and the steer- stop when it is safe to do so. Check and ing wheel or instrument panel. Such ∙ Removing or modifying the front pas- correct any of the above conditions. Re- objects may become dangerous pro- senger seat may affect the function of start the vehicle and wait 1 minute. jectiles and cause injury if the front air the air bag system and result in seri- bags inflate. ous personal injury. NOTE: ∙ Immediately after inflation, several A system check will be performed during front air bag system components will which the front passenger air bag status be hot. Do not touch them; you may light will remain lit for about 7 seconds severely burn yourself. initially. ∙ No unauthorized changes should be If the light is still OFF after this, the small made to any components or wiring of adult, child or child restraint should be re- the supplemental air bag system. This positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle is to prevent accidental inflation of should be checked as soon as possible. It is the supplemental air bag or damage recommended that you visit a NISSAN to the supplemental air bag system. dealer for this service. Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57 ∙ Modifying or tampering with the front ∙ It is recommended that you visit a passenger seat may result in serious NISSAN dealer for work on and around personal injury. For example, do not the front air bag. It is also recom- change the front seats by placing ma- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer terial on the seat cushion or by install- for installation of electrical equip- ing additional trim material, such as ment. The Supplemental Restraint seat covers, on the seat that are not System (SRS) wiring harnesses* specifically designed to assure proper should not be modified or discon- air bag operation. Additionally, do not nected. Unauthorized electrical test stow any objects under the front pas- equipment and probing devices senger seat or the seat cushion and should not be used on the air bag seatback. Such objects may interfere system. with the proper operation of the occu- ∙ A cracked windshield should be re- pant classification sensor (weight placed immediately by a qualified re- sensor). LRS0259 pair facility. A cracked windshield ∙ No unauthorized changes should be could affect the function of the Front seat-mounted side-impact made to any components or wiring of supplemental air bag system. supplemental air bag and the seat belt system. This may affect roof-mounted curtain side- the front air bag system. Tampering *The SRS wiring harness connectors are with the seat belt system may result yellow and orange for easy identifica- impact and rollover supplemental in serious personal injury. tion. air bag systems When selling your vehicle, we request that The side air bags are located in the outside you inform the buyer about the front air of the seatback of the front seats. The cur- bag system and guide the buyer to the tain air bags are located in the side roof appropriate sections in this Owner’s rails. All of the information, cautions and Manual. warnings in this manual must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision 1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system are similar to those of a higher severity air bag and curtain air bag may cause mental air bag warning light will turn off impact. They are designed to inflate on the abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags after about 7 seconds if the system is side where the vehicle is impacted. They and curtain air bags do not provide re- operational. may not inflate in certain side collisions. straint to the lower body. WARNING Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate The seat belts should be correctly worn in certain types of rollover collisions or near and the driver and passenger seated up- ∙ Do not place any objects near the rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move- right as far as practical away from the side seatback of the front seats. Also, do ments (for example, during severe off- air bag. Rear seat passengers should be not place any objects (an umbrella, roading) may cause the curtain air bags to seated as far away as practical from the bag, etc.) between the front door fin- inflate. door finishers and side roof rails. The side isher and the front seat. Such objects air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly may become dangerous projectiles Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always and cause injury if a side air bag in order to help protect the front and rear an indication of proper side air bag and inflates. curtain air bag operation. outboard occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bag and curtain air bag ∙ Right after inflation, several side air When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the bag and curtain air bag system com- inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, occupant is too close to, or is against, these ponents will be hot. Do not touch followed by release of smoke. This smoke is air bag modules during inflation. The side them; you may severely burn yourself. not harmful and does not indicate a fire. air bag and will deflate quickly after the Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it ∙ No unauthorized changes should be collision is over. may cause irritation and choking. Those made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag with a history of a breathing condition The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a systems. This is to prevent damage to should get fresh air promptly. short time. or accidental inflation of the side air Side air bags, along with the use of seat The side air bags and curtain air bags bag and curtain air bag or damage to belts, help to cushion the impact force on operate only when the ignition switch is the side air bag and curtain air bag the chest and pelvic area of the front occu- placed in the ON position. systems. pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in After placing the ignition switch in the the front and rear outboard seating posi- ON position, the supplemental air bag tions. They can help save lives and reduce warning light illuminates. The supple- serious injuries. However, an inflating side Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59 ∙ Do not make unauthorized changes When selling your vehicle, we request that ∙ It is recommended that you visit a to your vehicle’s electrical system, you inform the buyer about the side air bag NISSAN dealer for work on and around suspension system or side panel. This and curtain air bag systems and guide the the pretensioner system. It is also rec- could affect proper operation of the buyer to the appropriate sections in this ommended that you visit a NISSAN side air bag and curtain air bag Owner’s Manual. dealer for installation of electrical systems. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices ∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys- (front seats) should not be used on the preten- tem may result in serious personal in- sioner system. jury. For example, do not change the WARNING front seats by placing material near ∙ If you need to dispose of the preten- the seatbacks or by installing addi- ∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec- tional trim material, such as seat cov- after activation. They must be re- ommended that you visit a NISSAN ers, around the side air bag. placed together with the retractor dealer for this service. Incorrect dis- and buckle as a unit. posal procedures could cause per- ∙ It is recommended that you visit a sonal injury. NISSAN dealer for work on and around ∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a the side air bag and curtain air bag collision but pretensioner(s) are not The pretensioner system may activate systems. It is also recommended that activated, be sure to have the preten- with the supplemental air bag system in you visit a NISSAN dealer for installa- sioner system checked and, if neces- certain types of collisions. Working with the sary, replaced. It is recommended that tion of electrical equipment. The SRS seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help you visit a NISSAN dealer for this wiring harnesses* should not be tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be- modified or disconnected. Unauthor- service. comes involved in certain types of colli- ized electrical test equipment and ∙ No unauthorized changes should be sions, helping to restrain front seat occu- probing devices should not be used made to any components or wiring of pants. on the side air bag or curtain air bag the pretensioner system. This is to systems. prevent damage to or accidental acti- The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an- *The SRS wiring harness connectors are vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper- chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle. yellow and orange for easy identifica- ing with the pretensioner system may These seat belts are used the same way as tion. result in serious personal injury. conventional seat belts.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re- WARNING leased and a loud noise may be heard. This smoke is not harmful and does not indi- Do not use a rear-facing child restraint cate a fire. Care should be taken not to on a seat protected by an air bag in inhale it, as it may cause irritation and front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may choking. Those with a history of a breath- cause serious injury or death. ing condition should get fresh air promptly. After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest. The supplemental air bag warning light is used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner system. For additional WRS0897 information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section. If the opera- 1. SRS Air bag warning labels tion of the supplemental air bag warning The warning labels are located on the light indicates there is a malfunction, have surface of the sun visor. the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING vice. LABELS When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the preten- Warning labels about the supplemental sioner system and guide the buyer to the front-impact air bag system are placed in appropriate sections in this Owner’s the vehicle as shown in the illustration. Manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61 If any of the following conditions occur, the NOTE: front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag In the event of a crash involving an air and pretensioner systems need servicing: bag deployment (side, front or both), the ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light vehicle’s hazard lamps (turn indicators) remains on after approximately 7 sec- will turn ON automatically. onds. Repair and replacement ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light procedure flashes intermittently. The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to does not come on at all. inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re- Under these conditions, the front air bag, minder, unless it is damaged, the supple- side air bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner mental air bag warning light remains illu- LRS0100 systems may not operate properly. They minated after inflation has occurred. These SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING must be checked and repaired. It is recom- systems should be repaired and/or re- LIGHT mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for placed as soon as possible. It is recom- this service. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for The supplemental air bag warning light, this service. displaying in the instrument panel, WARNING monitors the circuits for the air bag sys- When maintenance work is required on the tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring. If the supplemental air bag warning vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, When the ignition switch is placed in the ON light is on, it could mean that the front curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and reposition, the supplemental air bag warning air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag lated parts should be pointed out to the light illuminates for about 7 seconds and and/or pretensioner systems will not person performing the maintenance. The then turns off. This means the system is operate in an accident. To help avoid ignition switch should always be placed in operational. injury to yourself or others, have your the LOCK position when working under the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is hood or inside the vehicle. recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system WARNING ∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant ∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or Classification Sensor (OCS) should be curtain air bag has inflated, the air checked to verify it is still functioning bag module will not function again correctly. It is recommended that you and must be replaced. Additionally, visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. the activated pretensioner(s) must The OCS should be checked even if no also be replaced. The air bag module air bags deploy as a result of the im- and pretensioner(s) should be re- pact. Failure to verify proper OCS placed. It is recommended that you function may result in an improper air visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. bag deployment resulting in injury or However, the air bag module and pre- death. tensioner(s) cannot be repaired. ∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ If you need to dispose of the supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63 2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...... 2-2 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-38 Meters and gauges...... 2-3 Switch operation ...... 2-38 Speedometer and odometer ...... 2-4 Rear window and outside mirror Tachometer ...... 2-7 (if so equipped) defroster switch...... 2-40 Engine coolant temperature gauge ...... 2-7 Headlight and turn signal switch ...... 2-40 Fuel gauge ...... 2-8 Headlight control switch...... 2-40 Trip computer (if so equipped) ...... 2-9 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system Outside temperature display ...... 2-12 (Type A) (if so equipped) ...... 2-43 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system reminders ...... 2-13 (Type B) (if so equipped) ...... 2-43 Checking lights ...... 2-14 LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL) Warning lights ...... 2-14 system (Type C — NISMO) (if so Indicator lights ...... 2-20 equipped) ...... 2-44 Audible reminders ...... 2-23 Instrument brightness control...... 2-44 Vehicle information display (if so equipped) .....2-24 Turn signal switch ...... 2-44 How to use the vehicle information Fog light switch (if so equipped) ...... 2-45 display ...... 2-24 Horn ...... 2-46 Startup display ...... 2-24 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ...... 2-46 Settings ...... 2-25 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch...... 2-47 Vehicle information display warnings E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)...... 2-48 and indicators...... 2-31 Power outlet...... 2-48 Security systems ...... 2-35 Storage...... 2-49 Vehicle security system (if so equipped) .....2-35 Front-door pockets...... 2-49 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 2-37 Console side pockets (if so equipped)...... 2-49 Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ...... 2-50 Map lights ...... 2-60 Storage pouch (if so equipped) ...... 2-50 Dome light ...... 2-61 Storagetrays...... 2-51 Trunk light...... 2-62 Glovebox...... 2-52 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver Console box ...... 2-52 (if so equipped) ...... 2-62 Slide front armrest (if so equipped) ...... 2-52 Programming HomeLink® ...... 2-63 Overhead sunglasses storage ...... 2-53 Programming HomeLink® for Canadian customers and gate openers...... 2-64 Cup holders ...... 2-53 Operating the HomeLink® Universal Windows ...... 2-55 Transceiver ...... 2-65 Power windows ...... 2-55 Programming trouble-diagnosis ...... 2-65 Moonroof (if so equipped) ...... 2-58 Clearing the programmed information ...... 2-65 Power moonroof ...... 2-58 Reprogramming a single HomeLink® Interior lights ...... 2-59 button...... 2-66 Console light (if so equipped) ...... 2-60 If your vehicle is stolen...... 2-66 INSTRUMENT PANEL

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag (P. 1-43) 12. Glove box (P. 2-49) 13. Shift lever (P. 5-17) 14. Climate controls (P. 4-20, 4-28) 15. Ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-9) Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-11) 16. Tilt/Telescopic steering (P. 3-30) 17. Hood release (P. 3-25) Fuel filler door release (P. 3-27) 18. ECO mode switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-26) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-47) SPORT mode switch (if so equipped) (P. 5-26) 19. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-40) Power mirror switch (P. 3-31) Trunk release (P. 3-26) LIC3415 Refer to the page number indicated in Type A (if so equipped) parentheses for operating details. 1. Tachometer 6. Odometer 2. Coolant temperature gauge Twin trip odometer 3. Warning and indicator lights Trip computer 4. Fuel gauge Fuel Economy 5. Speedometer ECO mode indicator (if so equipped) Outside temperature display Instruments and controls 2-3 SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display (TypeA—ifso equipped) or the trip computer (Type B — if so equipped) to the left of the speedometer.

LIC3416 Type B (if so equipped) 1. Tachometer 3. Speedometer Warning and indicator lights Warning and indicator lights 2. Vehicle information display 4. Fuel gauge Odometer 5. Engine coolant temperature gauge Twin trip odometer Outside temperature display 2-4 Instruments and controls LIC2255 LIC3050 LIC4056 Speedometer Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Odometer/Twin trip odometer The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed. The odometer ᭺2 and the twin trip odometer ᭺1 are displayed when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.

Instruments and controls 2-5 Changing the display Press the button on the steering wheel to change the display as follows: Accel guide/Average fuel economy → In- stant fuel economy/Average fuel economy → Average fuel economy → Average speed → Distance to empty → Trip A → Trip B Resetting the trip odometer Press the button on the steering wheel for more than 1 second to reset the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.

LPD2124 LIC2678 LOOSE FUEL CAP warning Check tire pressure warning message message (if so equipped) For vehicles without a vehicle informa- The CHECK TIRE PRES (pressure) warning ᭺A tion display: Push the reset button for message is displayed when the low tire more than 1 second to reset the LOOSE pressure warning light is illuminated and FUEL CAP warning message in the trip low tire pressure is detected. Check and ᭺B computer after the fuel cap has been adjust the tire pressure to the recom- tightened. For additional information, refer mended COLD tire pressure shown on the to “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks Tire and Loading Information label. The and adjustments” section of this manual. CHECK TIRE PRES warning message turns For vehicles with a vehicle information off when the low tire pressure warning light display: For additional information, refer to turns off. “Vehicle information display warnings and indicators” in the section.

2-6 Instruments and controls The low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated until the tires are inflated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The CHECK TIRE PRES warning message is displayed each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. For additional information, refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in the “In- struments and controls” section, “Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section, and “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. LIC2219 LIC2414 TACHOMETER Type A (if so equipped) ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). GAUGE Do not rev the engine into the red zone ᭺1 . NOTE: CAUTION The ignition switch must be placed in the ON position for the gauge to give a read- When engine speed approaches the red ing. zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in The gauge indicates the engine coolant the red zone may cause serious engine temperature. The engine coolant tempera- damage. ture is within the normal range when the reading is within the zone ᭺A shown in the illustration.

Instruments and controls 2-7 CAUTION If the gauge indicates a coolant temperature near the hot (H) end of the normal range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease the temperature. If the gauge is over the normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. If the engine is overheated, continued operation of the vehicle may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emergency” section for immediate action required. LIC3427 LIC2445 Type B (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) The engine coolant temperature varies FUEL GAUGE with the outside air temperature and driving conditions. NOTE: The ignition switch must be placed in the ON position for the gauge to give a reading. The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

2-8 Instruments and controls CAUTION ∙ Instant fuel economy ∙ Average fuel economy ∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may ∙ Average speed come on. Refuel as soon as possible. ∙ Distance to empty After a few driving trips. the light should turn off. If the light remains on ∙ Trip computer reset after a few driving trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ For additional information, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in this section. LIC2222 Type B (if so equipped) TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped) The low fuel warning light comes on when When the ignition switch is placed in the ON the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. position, the modes of the trip computer Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg- can be selected by pressing the but- isters 0 (Empty). ton on the steering wheel. The following modes can be selected: The arrow on the fuel pump symbol indicates the fuel-filler location. ∙ Trip A ∙ Trip B ∙ ECO Pedal Indicator (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-9 NOTE: The ECO Pedal Indicator’s bar is not displayed when the cruise control is in operation.

LIC3146 LIC2659 Trip symbol: A or B ECO Pedal Indicator Display (if so Trip A equipped) Measures the distance of one specific trip Use the ECO Pedal Indicator ᭺1 for improv- ᭺1 . ing fuel economy. Trip B When the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is in the Measures the distance of a second specific green range, it displays the recommended trip. accelerator pedal position to optimize fuel economy. If the ECO Pedal Indicator bar is out of the green range, the vehicle will not provide optimized fuel economy.

2-10 Instruments and controls Average fuel economy The average fuel economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the button on the steering wheel for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mile (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----). Average speed The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Reset- ting is done by pressing the button LIC3147 on the steering wheel for more than ap- LIC3148 AVE & INST fuel economy proximately 1 second. The display is up- Distance to empty dated every 30 seconds. The first 30 sec- The distance to empty (dte) mode provides When Average & Instant fuel economy in- onds after a reset, the display shows (----). formation is displayed, there will be differ- you with an estimation of the distance that ent sections to read: can be driven before refueling. The dte is constantly being calculated, based on the ᭺A Instant fuel economy (BAR graph) amount of fuel in the fuel tank and the ᭺B Average fuel economy (BAR & DIGIT) actual fuel economy which will depend on driving conditions. Dashes (—) indicate that The bar graph is not displayed when ve- fuel remaining volume cannot be read by hicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h). the fuel pump and should be refilled as Instant fuel economy soon as possible. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The instant fuel economy mode shows the instant fuel economy. The display updates instantly when driving. Instruments and controls 2-11 NOTE: When driving uphill or rounding curves, the fuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarily change the display. Trip computer reset To reset Trip A, Trip B, AVG/mpg, or AVG/mph, go to the desired mode on the trip computer and hold the button on the steering wheel for more than 3 seconds.

LIC3149 OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY The outside temperature function provides a display of the outside temperature when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The display of positive temperatures is un- signed (blank), negative temperatures are prefixed with a minus sign. The outside temperature will always be visible on the left side of the display.

2-12 Instruments and controls WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

or Anti-lock Braking System NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so Front passenger air bag status light (ABS) warning light equipped)

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys- or Power steering warning light High beam indicator light (blue) tem warning light (if so equipped)

or Brake warning light Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Charge warning light Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped) Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped)

Door open warning light (if so equipped) Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Engine oil pressure warning light (if so Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Side light and headlight indicator light equipped) position indicator light (CVT models) (if so (green) equipped)

Low fuel warning light (if so equipped) Cruise indicator light (if so equipped) Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light (if so ECO mode indicator light (if so equipped) SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped) equipped)

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light Engine start operation indicator light (if so Turn signal/hazard indicator lights (if so equipped) equipped)

Master warning light (if so equipped) Front fog light indicator light (if so Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi- equipped) cator light

Instruments and controls 2-13 CHECKING LIGHTS WARNING LIGHTS Automatic Emergency With all doors closed, apply the parking For additional information on warnings Braking (AEB) system brake, fasten the seat belts and place the and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information ignition switch in the ON position without warning light (if so starting the engine. The following lights (if display” in this section. equipped) so equipped) will come on: or Anti-lock Braking This light comes on when the ignition System (ABS) switch is placed in the ON position. It turns , or , , or off after the engine is started. warning light The following lights (if so equipped) will This light illuminates when the AEB system come on briefly and then go off: When the ignition switch is placed in the ON is set to OFF on the vehicle information position, the ABS warning light illuminates display. and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is or , , , , , operational. If the light illuminates when the AEB sys- SPORT , tem is on, it may indicate that the system is If any light does not come on or operate in If the ABS warning light illuminates while unavailable. For additional information, re- a way other than described, it may indicate the engine is running or while driving, it fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal- may indicate the ABS is not functioning in the “Starting and driving” section of this function. Have the system checked. It is properly. Have the system checked. It is manual. recommended that you visit a NISSAN recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. dealer for this service. or Brake warning Some indicators and warnings are also dis- If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock light played on the vehicle information display function is turned off. The brake system This light functions for both the parking between the speedometer and tachom- then operates normally but without anti- brake and the foot brake systems. eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve- lock assistance. For additional information, hicle information display” in this section. refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and Parking brake indicator driving” section of this manual. When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light comes on when the parking brake is applied.

2-14 Instruments and controls Low brake fluid warning light ∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en- Charge warning light When the ignition switch is placed in the ON gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping dis- If this light comes on while the engine is level. If the light comes on while the engine tance and braking will require greater running, it may indicate the charging sys- is running with the parking brake not ap- pedal effort as well as pedal travel. tem is not functioning properly. Turn the plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol- ∙ If the brake fluid level is below the engine off and check the generator belt. If lowing: MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the fluid reservoir, do not drive until the light remains on, have your vehicle serviced 1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake brake system has been checked. It is immediately. It is recommended that you fluid as necessary. For additional infor- recommended that you visit a NISSAN visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do- dealer for this service. it-yourself” section of this manual. CAUTION Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning 2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have indicator Do not continue driving if the generator the warning system checked. It is rec- belt is loose, broken or missing. ommended that you visit a NISSAN When the parking brake is released and the dealer for this service. brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the Door open warning light (if brake warning light and the ABS warning so equipped) WARNING light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake This light comes on when any of the doors ∙ Your brake system may not be work- system checked and, if necessary, repaired. are not closed securely while the ignition ing properly if the warning light is on. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN switch is in the ON position. Driving could be dangerous. If you dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed judge it to be safe, drive carefully to driving and abrupt braking. For additional Engine oil pressure warning the nearest service station for repairs. information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys- light (if so equipped) Otherwise, have your vehicle towed tem (ABS) warning light” in this section. because driving it could be This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If dangerous. the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop. Instruments and controls 2-15 The engine oil pressure warning light is The low tire pressure warning light warns warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge not designed to indicate a low oil level. of low tire pressure or indicates that the to check the tire pressure. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For TPMS is not functioning properly. For vehicles without a vehicle information additional information, refer to “Engine oil” After the ignition switch is placed in the ON display, the low tire pressure warning light in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. position, this light illuminates for about remains illuminated until the tires are in- 1 second and turns off. flated to the recommended COLD tire pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” warning CAUTION Low tire pressure warning message is displayed each time the igni- Running the engine with the engine oil If the vehicle is being driven with low tire tion switch is placed in the ON position as pressure warning light on could cause pressure, the warning light will illumi- long as the low tire pressure warning light serious damage to the engine almost nate. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (vehicles remains illuminated. immediately. Such damage is not cov- without a vehicle information display) ered by warranty. Turn off the engine as For vehicles with a vehicle information dis- also appears in the trip computer or the soon as it is safe to do so. play, the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn- “Tire Pressure Low – Add Air” (vehicles ing appears each time the ignition switch is with a vehicle information display) ap- Low fuel warning light (if so placed in the ON position as long as the low pears in the vehicle information display. equipped) tire pressure warning light remains illumi- This light comes on when the fuel level in When the low tire pressure warning light nated. illuminates, you should stop and adjust the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon For additional information, refer to “Vehicle as it is convenient, preferably before the the tire pressure of all four tires to the information display” in this section, “Tire fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be recommended COLD tire pressure shown Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the a small reserve of fuel in the tank when on the Tire and Loading Information la- “Starting and driving” and “In case of emer- the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). bel located in the driver’s door opening. gency” sections of this manual. Low tire pressure warning The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire TPMS malfunction light (if so equipped) pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in- If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres- flated to the recommended pressure, low tire pressure warning light will flash for sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni- the vehicle must be driven at speeds approximately 1 minute when the ignition tors the tire pressure of all tires except the above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the switch is placed in the ON position. The spare. TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the 2-16 Instruments and controls system checked. It is recommended that ∙ If the light illuminates while driving, ∙ When replacing a wheel without the you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. avoid sudden steering maneuvers or TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS The "CHECK TIRE PRES" warning message abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, will not function and the low tire pres- ”/”Tire Pressure Low— Add Air” warning pull off the road to a safe location and sure warning light will flash for ap- does not appear if the low tire pressure stop the vehicle as soon as possible. proximately 1 minute. The light will re- warning light illuminates to indicate a Driving with under-inflated tires may main on after 1 minute. Have your TPMS malfunction. permanently damage the tires and in- tires replaced and/or TPMS system For additional information, refer to “Tire crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se- reset as soon as possible. It is recom- rious vehicle damage could occur and mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the may lead to an accident and could re- for these services. “Starting and driving” section and “Tire sult in serious personal injury or ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of death. Check the tire pressure for all nally specified by NISSAN could affect this manual. four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the proper operation of the TPMS. the recommended COLD tire pressure WARNING show on the Tire and Loading Infor- CAUTION ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect mation label located in the driver’s electric medical equipment. Those door opening to turn the low tire pres- ∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the who use a pacemaker should contact sure warning light off. If the light still regular tire pressure check. Be sure to the electric medical equipment illuminates while driving after adjust- check the tire pressure regularly. ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat manufacturer for the possible influ- ∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds ences before use. or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the ∙ If the light does not illuminate with spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire TPMS may not operate correctly. the ignition switch placed in the ON is flat and all tires are properly in- ∙ Be sure to install the specified size of position, have the vehicle checked as flated, have the vehicle checked. It is tires to the four wheels correctly. soon as possible. It is recommended recommended that you visit a NISSAN that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this dealer for this service. service.

Instruments and controls 2-17 Low windshield-washer ∙ Headlight system warning ∙ The light illuminates in yellow when it warns of a malfunction with the electri- fluid warning light (if so ∙ ITS warning cal steering lock system or the Intelli- equipped) ∙ Shipping mode warning gent Key system. This light comes on when the windshield- ∙ Low oil pressure warning washer fluid is at a low level. Add If the warning light illuminates in yellow windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For For additional information, refer to “Vehicle while the engine is stopped, it may be im- additional information, refer to “Windshield- information display” in this section. possible to free the steering lock or to start washer fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself” section the engine. If the light comes on while the of this manual. NISSAN Intelligent Key® engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. Master warning light (if so warning light (if so However in these cases, have the vehicle equipped) checked and repaired as soon as possible. equipped) It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN When the ignition switch is in the ON posi- After the ignition switch is placed in the ON dealer for this service. position, this light comes on for about tion, the master warning light illuminates if For additional information, refer to “NISSAN any of the following are displayed on the 2 seconds and then turns off. This light illu- Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks vehicle information display: minates or blinks as follows: and adjustments” section of this manual. ∙ No key warning ∙ The light blinks in yellow when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left out- or Power steering ∙ Low washer fluid warning side the vehicle and the ignition switch warning light ∙ Parking brake release warning in the ACC or ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the ve- ∙ Door open warning hicle. WARNING ∙ Loose fuel cap warning ∙ The light blinks in green when the Intel- ∙ If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power as- ∙ Check tire pressure warning ligent Key battery is running out of sist for the steering will not work. power. Replace the battery with a new ∙ Emergency brake warning Steering will be harder to operate. one. For additional information, refer to ∙ Lock warning “Battery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section ∙ I-Key system warning of this manual. 2-18 Instruments and controls ∙ When the power steering warning For additional information, refer to “Power Shift P (Park) warning light light illuminates with the engine run- steering” in the “Starting and driving” sec- (if so equipped) ning, there will be no power assist for tion of this manual. This light blinks red and the key reminder the steering. You will still have control Seat belt warning light and chime sounds if the shift lever is in any of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power chime position other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Return the steering system checked. It is recom- The light and chime remind you to fasten shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer your seat belts. The light illuminates when- switch in the OFF position and the light will for this service. ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON turn off. Place the ignition switch in the or START position and remains illuminated When the ignition switch is placed in the ON LOCK position and the chime will turn off. until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the position, the power steering warning light For additional information, refer to “NISSAN same time, the chime sounds for about illuminates. After starting the engine, the Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is power steering warning light turns off. This and adjustments” section of this manual. indicates the power steering system is op- securely fastened. erational. The seat belt warning light may also illumi- Supplemental air bag If the power steering warning light illuminate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not warning light nates while the engine is running, it may fastened when the front passenger’s seat When the ignition switch is placed in the ON indicate the power steering system is not is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition or START position, the supplemental air functioning properly and may need servic- switch is placed in the ON position, the sys- bag warning light illuminates for about ing. Have the power steering system tem does not activate the warning light for 7 seconds and then turns off. This means checked. It is recommended that you visit a the front passenger. the system is operational. NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to “Seat If any of the following conditions occur, the When the power steering warning light illu- belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, minates with the engine running, there will supplemental restraint system” section of and pretensioner seat belt systems need be no power assist for the steering but you this manual. servicing. will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light operate the steering wheel, especially in remains on after approximately 7 sec- sharp turns and at low speeds. onds. Instruments and controls 2-19 ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light INDICATOR LIGHTS ECO mode indicator light (if flashes intermittently. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle so equipped) ∙ The supplemental air bag warning light information display” in this section. This light comes on when the ECO mode does not come on at all. Continuously Variable has been selected. For additional informa- It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN tion, refer to “ECO mode switch” in the dealer for these services. Unless checked Transmission (CVT) “Starting and driving” section of this and repaired, the supplemental restraint position indicator light manual. system (air bag system) and/or the preten- sioners may not function properly. For ad- (CVT models) (if so Engine start operation ditional information, refer to “Supplemental equipped) indicator light (if so restraint system (SRS)” in the “Safety— Seats, seat belts and supplemental re- When the ignition switch is placed in the ON equipped) straint system” section of this manual. position, this indicator light shows the shift For vehicles equipped with push-button ig- lever position. For additional information, nition this indicator illuminates when the WARNING refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the “Starting ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or and driving” section of this manual. If the supplemental air bag warning ON position with the shift lever in the P light is on, it could mean that the front Cruise indicator light (if so (Park) position. air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys- equipped) Continuously Variable Transmission tems and/or pretensioner systems will The light comes on when the cruise control (CVT) models: This indicator means that not operate in an accident. To help the engine will start by pushing the push- avoid injury to yourself or others, have ON/OFF switch is pushed. The light goes button ignition switch with the brake pedal your vehicle checked as soon as pos- out when the ON/OFF switch is pushed depressed. sible. It is recommended that you visit a again. When the cruise indicator light NISSAN dealer for this service. comes on, the cruise control system is op- Manual transmission models: This indi- erational. For additional information, refer cator means that the engine will start by to “Cruise control” in the “Starting and driv- pushing the ignition switch with the clutch ing” section of this manual. and the brake pedal depressed

2-20 Instruments and controls Front fog light indicator Malfunction Indicator Light Operation light (if so equipped) (MIL) The MIL will come on in one of two ways: The front fog light indicator light illumi- If this indicator light comes on steady or ∙ MIL on steady — An emission control nates when the front fog lights are on. For blinks while the engine is running, it may system malfunction has been de- additional information, refer to “Fog light indicate a potential emission control mal- tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the function. switch” in this section. Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the Front passenger air bag The MIL may also come on steady if the vehicle information display. If the fuel- fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or status light vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure install the cap and continue to drive the The front passenger air bag status light will the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed vehicle. The light should turn off tightly, and that the vehicle has at least be lit and the passenger front air bag will be after a few driving trips. If the light 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank. off depending on how the front passenger does not turn off after a few driving trips, seat is being used. After a few driving trips, the light have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for For additional information, refer to “Front should turn off if no other potential emission control system malfunction exists. this service. You do not need to have your passenger air bag and status light” in the vehicle towed to the dealer. “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen- If this indicator light comes on steady for tal restraint system” section of this manual. 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds ∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been when the engine is not running, it indicates detected which may damage the emis- High beam indicator light that the vehicle is not ready for an emission sion control system. To reduce or avoid (blue) control system inspection/maintenance emission control system damage: test. For additional information, refer to This blue light comes on when the head- “Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance – do not drive at speeds above light high beams are on and goes out when (I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer 45 mph (72 km/h). the low beams are selected. information” section of this manual. – avoid hard acceleration or decelera- The high beam indicator light also comes tion. on when the passing signal is activated. – avoid steep uphill grades. – if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed. Instruments and controls 2-21 The MIL may stop blinking and come on For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light SPORT mode indicator steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec- blinks when the ignition switch is placed in light (if so equipped) ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer the LOCK position with the key removed for this service. You do not need to have from the ignition switch. This light illuminates and then turns off your vehicle towed to the dealer. when the ignition switch is placed in the ON The blinking security indicator light indi- position, and when the SPORT mode is se- cates that the security systems equipped CAUTION lected. on the vehicle are operational. Continued vehicle operation without For additional information, refer to “SPORT having the emission control system For additional information, refer to “Security mode switch” in the “Starting and driving” checked and repaired as necessary systems” in this section. section of this manual. could lead to poor driveability, reduced Side light and headlight fuel economy, and possible damage to Turn signal/hazard the emission control system. indicator light (green) indicator lights Overdrive OFF indicator The side light and headlight indicator light The appropriate light flashes when the turn illuminates when the side light or headlight signal switch is activated. light (if so equipped) position is selected. For additional informa- Both lights flash when the hazard switch is The overdrive OFF indicator light illumi- tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal turned on. nates when the overdrive OFF mode is se- switch” in this section. Vehicle Dynamic Control lected. Slip indicator light For additional information, refer to “Driving (VDC) OFF indicator light the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec- This indicator will blink when the Vehicle This indicator light comes on when the tion of this manual. Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operat- VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC system has been turned off. Security indicator light ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction limits. The road surface may be Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart slippery. the engine and the system will operate For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This normally. For additional information, refer light blinks whenever the ignition switch is to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system” placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. 2-22 Instruments and controls The VDC OFF indicator light also comes on Light reminder chime Parking brake reminder chime when you place the ignition switch in the ON position. The light will turn off after With the ignition switch placed in the OFF A chime sounds if the parking brake is set about 2 seconds if the system is opera- position, a chime sounds when the driver’s and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the tional. If the light stays on or comes on door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on. vehicle speed returns to zero. along with the indicator light while you are driving, have the VDC system Turn the headlight control switch off before checked. It is recommended that you visit a leaving the vehicle. NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN Intelligent Key® door While the VDC system is operating, you buzzer (if so equipped) might feel a slight vibration or hear the system working when starting the vehicle or The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if accelerating, but this is normal. any one of the following improper operations is found. AUDIBLE REMINDERS ∙ The ignition switch is not returned to Brake pad wear warning the LOCK position when locking the doors. The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires ∙ The Intelligent Key is left inside the ve- replacement, it makes a high pitched hicle when locking the doors. scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo- ∙ The Intelligent Key is taken outside the tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de- vehicle when operating the vehicle. pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. ∙ Any doors are not closed securely when locking the doors. Key reminder chime When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check A chime sounds if the driver’s door is both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For opened while the key is left in the ignition additional information, refer to “NISSAN In- switch. Remove the key and take it with you telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks when leaving the vehicle. and adjustments” section of this manual. Instruments and controls 2-23 VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if so equipped)

᭺3 — select/enter the vehicle information display menu items or to change from one display screen to the next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy) The ENTER and buttons also control audio and control panel functions. For additional information, refer to “Steering wheel switch for audio control” in the “Moni- tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual. STARTUP DISPLAY When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC (if so equipped) position the screens that LIC2630 LIC3465 display in the vehicle information include: The vehicle information display is located HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE ∙ Active system status (if so equipped) to the left of the speedometer. It displays INFORMATION DISPLAY such items as: ∙ Trip computer ∙ Fuel economy ∙ Vehicle settings The vehicle information display can be changed using the , , ENTER ∙ Warnings ∙ Trip computer information and switches located on the steering ∙ Outside air temperature ∙ Drive system warnings and settings wheel. ∙ Odometer/Twin Trip Odometer ∙ Cruise control system information ᭺1 — navigate through the items in Warnings will only display if there are any ∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor- the vehicle information display present. For additional information, refer to mation ENTER — change or select an item in “Vehicle information display warnings and the vehicle information display indicators” in this section. ∙ Indicators and warnings ᭺2 — go back to the previous menu To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to “Meter settings” in this section. 2-24 Instruments and controls SETTINGS ∙ Meter Settings ∙ Language The setting mode allows you to change the ∙ Vehicle Settings ∙ Factory Reset information displayed in the vehicle infor- ∙ Maintenance Driver Assistance (if so equipped) mation display: ∙ Alarm ∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped) The driver assistance menu allows the user ∙ Unit to change the settings for the driving aids. ∙ Clock Menu item Result Driving Aids Displays available Driving Aids. Blind Spot/RCTA (if so equipped) Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW)/Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Emergency Brake (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the emergency brake system on or off. For addition information, refer to “Automatic Emer- gency Braking (AEB)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Clock

Menu item Result Clock Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include automatically setting the time, 12H/24H format, Daylight Savings Time, time zone, and manually setting the time. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual (if so equipped).

Instruments and controls 2-25 Meter Settings The meter settings allow the user to change the settings for the vehicle information display. Menu item Result Main Menu Selection Displays the available options. Home Allows user to turn the home screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Average Speed Allows user to turn the average speed screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Trip A Allows user to turn the trip A on or off in the vehicle information display. Trip B Allows user to turn the trip B on or off in the vehicle information display. Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy on or off in the vehicle information display. Audio Allows user to turn the audio screen on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems” section of this manual. Driving Aids (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driving aids on or off in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Driver assistance” in this section. ECO Mode Settings Displays the available options for ECO mode settings. ECO Indicator Allows the user to turn the ECO indicator on or off in the vehicle information display. DISP Mode Allows user to select how the ECO mode in displayed. Pedal Select to have the ECO mode shown as a pedal display. Inst.FE Select to have the ECO mode shown as instant fuel economy. ECO Drive Report Displays the available options for the ECO drive report. Display Allows user to turn the ECO drive report on or off. View History Allows user to view and reset ECO drive report history. Welcome Effect Displays the available options for the welcome effect. Dial Effect Allows user to turn the dial effect on or off. Display Effect Allows user to turn the display effect on or off.

2-26 Instruments and controls Vehicle Settings The vehicle settings allow the user to change the lighting and locking settings. Menu item Result Lighting Displays the available option for lighting. Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Light sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Locking Displays the available locking options. I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Wipers (if so equipped) Displays the various wipers settings. For additional information, refer to “Wiper and washer switch” in this section. Speed Dependent Allows the user to turn the speed dependent feature on or off.

Instruments and controls 2-27 Maintenance WARNING does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator The maintenance menu allows the user to The tire replacement indicator is not a as a guide only and always perform set reminders for various vehicle mainte- substitute for regular tire checks, in- regular tire checks. Failure to perform nance items. cluding tire pressure checks. For addi- regular tire checks, including tire pres- tional information, refer to “Changing sure checks could result in tire failure. wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” Serious vehicle damage could occur section of this manual. Many factors in- and may lead to a collision, which could cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving result in serious personal injury or habits and road conditions affect tire death. wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance

Menu item Result Maintenance Displays various maintenance reminder options. Oil and Filter Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Tire Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Other Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Alarm The alarm menu allows the user to set specific alarms for various items on the vehicle.

Menu item Result Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off. Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert alarm. Phone Allows user to turn the phone alarm on or off. Mail Allows user to turn the mail alarm on or off.

2-28 Instruments and controls Unit The unit menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result Mileage Displays the available mileage display units. Temperature Displays the available temperature display units. Language The language menu allows the user to change the languages displayed in the vehicle information display. Menu item Result Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display. Factory Reset The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status. Menu item Result Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-29 LIC4071 2-30 Instruments and controls VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY 17. Alarm — Time for a break? (if so 32. Low Outside Temperature (if so WARNINGS AND INDICATORS equipped) equipped) 1. No Key Detected 18. Power will turn off to save the battery 33. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) 2. Key ID Incorrect 19. Power turned off to save the battery 34. ECO mode indicator (if so equipped) 3. Key Battery Low 20. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights 35. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so 21. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s 4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s equipped) Manual Manual (if so equipped) No Key Detected 5. Shift to Park (if so equipped) 22. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so This warning appears when the Intelligent 6. Push brake and start switch to drive (if equipped) Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni- so equipped) tion switch in the ON position. Make sure 23. BSW/RCTA System Malfunction: See the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. 7. Push clutch and start switch to drive (if Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) so equipped) For additional information, refer to “NISSAN 24. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) 8. Engine start operation for Intelligent Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) 25. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) and adjustments” section of this manual. 9. Release Parking Brake 26. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so Key ID Incorrect equipped) 10. Low Fuel This warning appears when the ignition 27. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse switch is placed from the OFF position and 11. Loose Fuel Cap the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the 28. Transmission Shift Position indicator (if system. You cannot start the engine with 12. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual so equipped) an unregistered key. 13. Low Washer Fluid 29. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so For additional information, refer to “NISSAN 14. Tire Pressure Low — Add Air equipped) Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks 15. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual 30. Illumination indicator and adjustments” section of this manual. 16. Door Open 31. Outside Temperature Display Instruments and controls 2-31 Key Battery Low Shift to Park (if so equipped) Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low) This indicator illuminates when the Intelli- This warning illuminates when the ignition gent Key battery is running out of power. switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the This indicator appears when the battery of If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat- shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, the Intelligent Key is low and when the In- tery with a new one. For additional infor- a chime sounds when the ignition switch is telligent Key system and the vehicle are not mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in in the ACC or OFF position. communicating normally. the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If this warning illuminates, move the shift If this appears, touch the ignition switch I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual lever to the P (Park) position and start the with the Intelligent Key while depressing engine. the brake pedal. For additional information, After the ignition switch is pushed to the refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis- ON position, this light comes on for a period Push brake and start switch to drive (if charge” in the “Starting and driving” section of time and then turns off. so equipped) of this manual. The I-Key System Error message warns of This indicator appears when the shift lever a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys- is in the P (Park) position. Release Parking Brake tem. If the light comes on while the engine This indicator means that the engine will This warning illuminates in the message is stopped, it may be impossible to start start by pushing the ignition switch with area of the vehicle information display the engine. the brake pedal depressed. You can start when the parking brake is set and the ve- If the light comes on while the engine is the engine from any position of the ignition hicle is driven. switch. running, you can drive the vehicle. However, Low Fuel in these cases, have the system checked. It Push clutch and start switch to drive (if is recommended that you visit a NISSAN so equipped) This warning illuminates when the fuel level dealer for this service. in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as This indicator appears when the shift lever soon as it is convenient, preferably before is in the N (Neutral) position. the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There This indicator means that the engine will will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank start by pushing the ignition switch with when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 the clutch and brake pedal depressed. You (Empty). can start the engine from any position of the ignition switch. 2-32 Instruments and controls Loose Fuel Cap Tire Pressure Low - Add Air Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped) This warning appears when the fuel-filler This warning appears when the low tire cap is not tightened correctly after the ve- pressure warning light in the meter illumi- This indicator appears when the driver en- hicle has been refueled. For additional in- nates and low tire pressure is detected. The ables the Timer Alert function within the formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the warning appears each time the ignition Alarm settings and the selected set time is “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec- switch is placed in the ON position as long expired. The time is based on ignition on tion of this manual. as the low tire pressure warning light re- time and can be set up to six hours. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual mains illuminated. If this warning appears, Power will turn off to save the battery stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pres- This warning appears in the message area sures of all four tires to the recommended This message appears in the vehicle infor- of the vehicle information display if low oil mation display after a period of time if the COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and pressure is detected. This gauge is not de- ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON po- Loading Information label. For additional signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil sition and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For pressure warning is not designed to indi- information, refer to “Low tire pressure additional information, refer to “Push- cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to warning light” in this section and “Tire Pres- button ignition switch positions” in the check the oil level. For additional informa- sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it- “Starting and driving” section of this manual. yourself” section of this manual. manual. Power turned off to save the battery Low Washer Fluid TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual This message appears after the ignition This warning illuminates when the This warning appears when there is an er- switch is automatically turned off. For addi- windshield-washer fluid is at a low level. ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes tional information, refer to “Push-button ig- Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. on, have the system checked. It is recom- nition switch positions” in the “Starting and For additional information, refer to mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for driving” section of this manual. “Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it- this service. yourself” section of this manual. Door Open This warning illuminates when a door has been opened.

Instruments and controls 2-33 Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights BSW/RCTA System Malfunction: See celed, the speed will be displayed to show the Owner’s Manual (if so equipped) speed the vehicle will return to if the resume This warning appears when the headlights button is activated. are left in the ON position when exiting the This warning appears when the Blind Spot vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the Warning/Rear Cross Traffic Alert systems Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor- are not functioning properly. For additional (if so equipped) mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise switch” in this section. (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” Control (ICC) system status. The status is in the “Starting and driving” section of this shown by the color. For additional informa- Headlight System Error: See Owner’s manual. Manual (if so equipped) tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped) in the “Starting and driving” section of this This warning appears when the LED head- manual. lights are not functioning properly. This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse If this warning appears, have your system Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable This warning may appear if the extended checked. It is recommended that you visit a because a radar blockage is detected. For storage switch is not pushed in. When this NISSAN dealer for this service. additional information, refer to “Blind Spot warning appears, push in the extended Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear storage switch to turn off the warning. For (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so additional information, refer to “Fuses” in of this manual. equipped) the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) This indicator shows when the BSW and Transmission Shift Position indicator (if so equipped) RCTA systems are engaged. This indicator shows the cruise control system status. This indicator shows the transmission shift For additional information, refer to “Blind position. Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic When cruise control is activated, a green circle Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle section of this manual. information display will also display the speed the cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past the set speed, the speed will blink until you either cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed. If cruise control is on and can- 2-34 Instruments and controls SECURITY SYSTEMS

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if equipped) so equipped) This warning illuminates when there is a This warning appears when the Intelligent problem with the CVT system. If this warn- Cruise Control (ICC) system or the Auto- ing comes on, have the system checked. It matic Emergency Braking (AEB) system is recommended that you visit a NISSAN becomes unavailable because the front ra- dealer for this service. dar is obstructed. For additional information, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)” Illumination indicator or “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in This indicator appears when the vehicle the “Starting and driving” section of this information display screen brightness is manual. being adjusted. ECO mode indicator (if so equipped) Outside Temperature Display This indicator shows when the ECO mode The outside temperature display appears is engaged. LIC0301 in the center region of the vehicle informa- Your vehicle may have two types of security For additional information, refer to “ECO tion display. systems: mode” in the “Starting and driving” section Low Outside Temperature (if so of this manual. ∙ Vehicle security system (if so equipped) equipped) Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so ∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System This warning appears if the outside tem- equipped) perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera- VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM (if so This indicator shows when the Automatic ture can be changed to display in Celsius or Emergency Braking (AEB) system is en- equipped) Fahrenheit. For additional information, re- gaged and has detected a vehicle. fer to “Settings” in this section. The vehicle security system provides visual For additional information, refer to “Auto- and audible alarm signals if someone matic Emergency Braking (AEB)” in the opens the doors when the system is “Starting and driving” section of this armed. It is not, however, a motion detec- manual. tion type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

Instruments and controls 2-35 The system helps detect vehicle theft but 3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The 4. Confirm that the indicator light cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the doors can be locked with: comes on. The light stays on for theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo- ∙ the power door lock switch (if the about 30 seconds. The vehicle security nents in all situations. Always secure your system is now pre-armed. After about vehicle even if parking for a brief period. door is opened, locked and then closed). 30 seconds the vehicle security system Never leave your keys in the ignition, and automatically shifts into the armed always lock the vehicle when unattended. ∙ the key — master or mechanical (In- phase. The light begins to flash Be aware of your surroundings, and park in telligent Key models). once every 3 seconds. If, during the 30- secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. second pre-arm time period, the driver’s ∙ any request switch (Intelligent Key Many devices offering additional protec- door is unlocked by the key, a request models). tion, such as component locks, identifica- switch, the key fob or Intelligent Key, or if tion markers, and tracking systems, are ∙ the key fob or Intelligent Key. the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or available at auto supply stores and spe- ON position, the system will not arm. cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer Key fob and Intelligent Key operation: ∙ If the key is turned slowly when locking such equipment. Check with your insur- ∙ Press the button. All doors the driver’s door, the system may not ance company to see if you may be eligible lock. The hazard lights flash twice arm. Furthermore, if the key is turned for discounts for various theft protection and the horn beeps once to indicate beyond the vertical position toward features. all doors are locked. the unlock position to remove the key, How to arm the vehicle security the system may be disarmed when the system ∙ When the button is pressed key is removed. If the indicator light with all doors locked, the hazard fails to glow for a period of time, unlock 1. Close all windows. (The system can be lights flash twice and the horn beeps the door once and lock it again. armed even if the windows are open.) once as a reminder that the doors ∙ Even when the driver and/or passen- are already locked. 2. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK gers are in the vehicle, the system will position and remove the key. The horn may or may not beep. For arm with all doors closed and locked additional information, refer to “Silenc- with the ignition switch placed in the ing the horn beep feature” in the “Pre- OFF position. driving checks and adjustments” section in this manual.

2-36 Instruments and controls Vehicle security system activation NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER FCC Notice: The vehicle security system will give the SYSTEM For USA: following alarm: The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System This device complies with Part 15 of the ∙ The headlights blink and the horn will not allow the engine to start without FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- sounds intermittently. the use of a registered key. lowing two conditions: (1) This device If the engine fails to start using a registered may not cause harmful interference, and ∙ The alarm automatically turns off after (2) this device must accept any interfer- a period of time. However, the alarm key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- ence received, including interference reactivates if the vehicle is tampered that may cause undesired operation. with again. The alarm can be shut off by mated toll road device or automatic pay- ment device on the key ring), restart the unlocking the driver’s door with the key, NOTE: engine using the following procedures: a request switch, by pressing the Changes or modifications not expressly button on the key fob or Intelligent Key 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- approved by the party responsible for or placing the ignition switch in the ON sition for approximately 5 seconds. compliance could void the user’s author- or ACC position. 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or ity to operate the equipment. The alarm is activated by: LOCK position and wait approximately For Canada: ∙ opening a door without using the key, a 10 seconds. request switch, key fob or Intelligent Key This device complies with Industry 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). (even if the door is unlocked by using Operation is subject to the following two the inside lock knob or the power door 4. Restart the engine while holding the conditions: (1) this device may not cause lock switch). device (which may have caused the in- interference, and (2) this device must ac- How to stop an activated alarm terference) separate from the regis- cept any interference received, including tered key. interference that may cause undesired The alarm stops only by unlocking the driv- If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN operation of the device. er’s door by pressing the button on recommends placing the registered key on the key fob or Intelligent Key, or by unlock- a separate key ring to avoid interference ing all doors with any request switch (Intel- from other devices. ligent Key models) or placing the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position. Never leave these keys in the vehicle. Instruments and controls 2-37 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System service as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have when visiting a NISSAN dealer for service.

LIC0474 LIC2789 Security indicator light SWITCH OPERATION

For vehicles without Intelligent Key: This WARNING light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position. In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield For vehicles with Intelligent Key: This light and obscure your vision which may lead blinks when the ignition switch is placed in to an accident. Warm the windshield the LOCK position with the key removed with the defroster before you wash the from the ignition switch. windshield. This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is operational.

2-38 Instruments and controls ᭺4 CAUTION NOTE: Push the lever up to have one sweep operation (MIST) of the wiper. ∙ Do not operate the washer continu- If the windshield wiper operation is in- 5 ously for more than 30 seconds. terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may Pull the lever toward you ᭺ to operate the stop moving to protect its motor. If this washer. The wiper will also operate several ∙ Do not operate the washer if the occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF times. windshield-washer fluid reservoir is position and remove the snow or ice that empty. After a short delay the drip wipe function is on and around the wiper arms. In ap- will operate the wiper once more to clear ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on remaining windshield-washer fluid from reservoir with windshield-washer again to operate the wiper. the windshield. fluid concentrates at full strength. The windshield wiper and washer operates Some methyl alcohol based NOTE: windshield-washer fluid concen- when the ignition switch is placed in the ON trates may permanently stain the position. The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, re- grille if spilled while filling the Push the lever down to operate the wiper windshield-washer fluid reservoir. fer to “Vehicle information display” in at the following speed: this section. ∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con- ᭺1 Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op- centrates with water to the manufac- eration can be adjusted by turning the turer’s recommended levels before A B pouring the fluid into the windshield- knob toward ᭺ (faster) or ᭺ (slower). washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the Also, the intermittent operation speed windshield-washer fluid reservoir to varies in accordance with the vehicle mix the windshield-washer fluid con- speed (if so equipped). (For example, centrate and water. when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent speed will be faster.) ᭺2 Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation ᭺3 High (HI) — continuous high speed operation

Instruments and controls 2-39 REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL MIRROR (if so equipped) SWITCH DEFROSTER SWITCH

LIC2324 LIC2650 LIC3240 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) To defrost the rear window glass and out- HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH side mirror (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch Lighting on. The rear window defroster indicator ᭺1 light on the switch comes on. Push the Rotate the switch to the position, switch again to turn the defroster off. and the front parking, tail, license plate, and instrument panel lights will come The rear window defroster automatically on. turns off after approximately 15 minutes. ᭺2 Rotate the switch to the position, CAUTION and the headlights will come on and all the other lights remain on. When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.

2-40 Instruments and controls LIC3241 LIC2127 WIC1437 Type B (if so equipped) Type C (if so equipped) Autolight system (if so equipped) CAUTION The autolight system allows the headlights Use the headlights with the engine run- to be set so they turn on and off automati- ning to avoid discharging the vehicle cally. The autolight system can: battery. ∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark. ∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light. ∙ Keep all the lights on a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.

Instruments and controls 2-41 NOTE: Autolight activation sensitivity can be adjustable for vehicles with a vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle settings” in this section. To turn on the autolight system: 1. Place the headlight switch in the AUTO position ᭺1 . 2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. 3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off. LIC3578 LIC3250 Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the Be sure you do not put anything on top Headlight beam select OFF position and a door is opened and left of the autolight sensor located in the top ᭺1 To select the high beam function, en- open, the headlights remain on for a period side ᭺1 of the instrument panel. The au- sure the low beams are engaged, and of time. If another door is opened while the tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it push the lever forward. The high beam headlights are on, then the timer is reset. is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will lights come on and the blue indi- To turn the autolight system off, place the illuminate. If this occurs while parked cator light illuminates. switch in the OFF, ,or position. with the engine off and the ignition ᭺2 Pull the lever back to return to the low switch placed in the ON position, your beam. vehicle’s battery could become discharged. ᭺3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the headlight high and low beams on and off. The low beams need not be engaged for this function.

2-42 Instruments and controls Battery saver system DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) The battery saver system automatically SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so equipped) turns off the ignition after a period of time The headlights automatically illuminate at The headlights automatically illuminate at when the ignition switch is left in the ACC or 100% intensity (low beam is used for the ON position. 100% intensity (low beam is used for the DRL system) when the engine is started DRL system) when the engine is started The battery saver system automatically with the parking brake released. The DRL and the parking brake released. The DRL turns off the following lights after a period operate with the headlight switch in the operate with the headlight switch in the of time when the ignition switch is placed in OFF position. When the DRL system is ac- OFF position. When the DRL system is ac- the OFF position and the doors are closed: tive, the clearance lights, tail lights, front tive, the clearance lights, tail lights, front side marker lights, and rear side marker ∙ Headlights, when the headlight switch side marker lights, and rear side marker lights are off. To turn the DRL system off, lights are off. To turn the DRL system off, is in the or position turn the switch to the position. turn the switch to the position. ∙ Interior lights, when left in the ON posi- When the headlight switch is placed in If the parking brake is applied before the tion the position for full illumination when engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. driving at night there will be no difference in The DRL illuminate when the parking brake CAUTION the low beam intensity. is released. The DRL will remain on until the If the parking brake is applied before the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. Even though the battery saver feature engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. automatically turns off the headlights The DRL illuminate once the parking brake It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight after a period of time, you should turn is released. The DRL will remain on until the switch on for interior controls and switches the headlight switch to the OFF position ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. to illuminate, as those remain off while the when the engine is not running to avoid switch is in the OFF position. discharging the vehicle battery. It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches WARNING to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position. When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause and accident injuring yourself and others.

Instruments and controls 2-43 LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (Type C — NISMO) (if so equipped) The LED DRL automatically illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is started and the parking brake released. The LED DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. To turn off the LED DRL system, turn the headlight switch to the position. If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the LED DRL do not illuminate. The LED DRL illuminate when the parking brake is released. The LED DRL will LIC2418 LIC3252 remain on until the ignition switch is placed INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS TURN SIGNAL SWITCH in the OFF position. CONTROL Turn signal It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight Press the “+” button ᭺A to increase the switch on for interior controls and switches brightness of instrument panel lights. ᭺1 Move the lever up or down to signal the to illuminate, as those remain off while the turning direction. When the turn is switch is in the OFF position. Press the “-” button ᭺B to decrease the completed, the turn signal cancels au- brightness of instrument panel lights. tomatically. WARNING Lane change signal When the LED DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is ᭺2 Move the lever up or down until the necessary at dusk to turn on your head- turn signal begins to flash, but the lever lights. Failure to do so could cause an does not latch, to signal a lane change. accident injuring yourself and others. Hold the lever until the lane change is completed.

2-44 Instruments and controls Move the lever up or down until the The headlights must be on and the low turn signal begins to flash, but the lever beams selected for the fog lights to oper- does not latch, and release the lever. ate. The fog lights automatically turn off The turn signal will automatically flash when the high beam headlights are se- three times. lected. Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane change based on road and traffic conditions.

NOTE: If the turn signal light bulb malfunctions, the turn signal indicator will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal is activated. LIC3256 FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped) To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the position, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to the position. To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch to the OFF position.

Instruments and controls 2-45 HORN HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)

LIC2419 LIC1389 LIC3037 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) WARNING To sound the horn, push near the horn icon WARNING on the steering wheel. Do not use or allow occupants to use Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so the seat heater if you or the occupants could affect proper operation of the cannot monitor elevated seat tempera- supplemental front air bag system. tures or have an inability to feel pain in Tampering with the supplemental front body parts that contact the seat. Use of air bag system may result in serious the seat heater by such people could personal injury. result in serious injury.

2-46 Instruments and controls VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH

CAUTION The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters. ∙ The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is 1. Start the engine. not running. 2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, ∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex- as desired. The indicator light in the tended periods or when no one is us- switch will illuminate. ing the seat. The heater is controlled by a thermo- ∙ Do not put anything on the seat which stat, automatically turning the heater insulates heat, such as a blanket, on and off. The indicator light will re- cushion or seat cover, etc. Otherwise, main on as long as the switch is on. the seat may become overheated. 3. When the seat is warmed or before you ∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the on the seat or pierce it with a pin or switch off. LIC3344 similar object. This may result in dam- The vehicle should be driven with the VDC age to the heater. system on for most driving conditions. ∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the should be removed immediately with VDC system reduces the engine output to a dry cloth. reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will ∙ When cleaning the seat, never use be reduced even if the accelerator is de- gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any pressed to the floor. If maximum engine similar materials. power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, ∙ If any malfunctions are found or the turn the VDC system off. heated seat does not operate, turn To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC the switch off and have the system OFF switch. The indicator and the Au- checked. It is recommended that you tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. warning light will come on.

Instruments and controls 2-47 E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so POWER OUTLET equipped)

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy- namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start- ing and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3357 LIC3457 The E-call (SOS) switch is used in combina- The power outlet is for powering electrical tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub- accessories such as cellular telephones. It scription to call for assistance in case of an is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. emergency. The power outlet is powered only when the Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscrip- ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position. tion) reach a response specialist that will provide assistance based on the situation CAUTION described by the vehicle’s occupant. For additional information, or to enroll your vehicle, ∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during refer to www.NissanUSA.com/connect or or immediately after use. call 855–426–6628.

2-48 Instruments and controls STORAGE

∙ Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information. ∙ Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. ∙ Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory. ∙ Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery. LIC2426 LIC2392 ∙ Avoid using power outlets when the FRONT-DOOR POCKETS CONSOLE SIDE POCKETS (if so air conditioner, headlights or rear win- equipped) dow defroster is on. ∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off. ∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open. ∙ When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.

Instruments and controls 2-49 WARNING To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items: ∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest. ∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest, storage pouch (if so equipped), or in the seatback LIC1328 pocket. LIC2704 SEATBACK POCKETS (if so STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped) equipped) A storage pouch may be located on the The seatback pockets are located on the front of the driver’s and/or passenger’s back of the driver’s (if so equipped) and seats. passenger’s seats. The pockets can be used to store maps. WARNING ∙ Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects or objects that cannot fully fit inside the pouch because they might increase the likelihood of an injury in a crash.

2-50 Instruments and controls To ensure proper operation of the passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys- tem, please observe the following items: ∙ Do not place loads heavier than 0.55 lbs. (0.25 kg) on the cushion storage pouch. ∙ Do not place a combined weight exceeding 2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head restraint, seatback pocket (if so equipped) and storage pouch at the same time.

LIC3794 LIC2422 Storage Tray (if so equipped) STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.

Instruments and controls 2-51 LIC3057 LIC3640 LIC2652 GLOVE BOX CONSOLE BOX SLIDE FRONT ARMREST (if so Open the glove box by pulling the handle. To open the console box, press in on the equipped) lever ᭺1 and raise the lid ᭺2 . To adjust the front armrest, push or pull the WARNING To close, push the lid down until the lock console cover to slide it to the front or rear Keep glove box lid closed while driving latches. as desired. to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.

2-52 Instruments and controls CAUTION ∙ Do not use for anything other than sunglasses. ∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sunglasses holder while parking in direct sunlight. The heat may damage the sunglasses.

LIC2312 LIC2424 OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES Front cup holders STORAGE CUP HOLDERS To open the sunglasses holder, push and WARNING release. Avoid abrupt starting and braking Only store one pair of sunglasses in the when the cup holder is being used to holder. prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger. WARNING CAUTION Keep the sunglasses holder closed while driving to avoid obstructing the Use only soft cups in the cup holder. driver’s view and to help prevent an Hard objects can injure you in an accident. accident.

Instruments and controls 2-53 LIC2656 LIC2423 LIC2425 Rear cup holders (if so equipped) Front bottle holder Rear bottle holder Soft bottle holder

CAUTION ∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident. ∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.

2-54 Instruments and controls WINDOWS

POWER WINDOWS To open a window, push the switch and continue to hold it down until the desired WARNING window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch and continue to hold it ∙ Make sure that all passengers have up until the desired window position is their hands, etc., inside the vehicle reached. while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock Locking passengers’ windows switch to prevent unexpected use of When the window lock switch is depressed, the power windows. only the driver’s side window can be ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death opened or closed. Push it again to cancel through unintended operation of the the window lock function. vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave LIC3208 children, people who require the as- Driver’s side power window sistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- switch perature inside a closed vehicle on a 1. Window lock button warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of 2. Power door lock switch injury or death to people and pets. 3. Front passenger side switch The power windows operate when the ig- 4. Right rear passenger side nition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch 5. Left rear passenger side is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s door is opened during this 6. Driver side automatic switch period of time, the power to the windows is The driver’s side control panel is equipped canceled. with switches to open or close all of the windows. Instruments and controls 2-55 LIC2309 LIC2663 LIC0410 Front passenger’s power window Rear power window switch Automatic operation switch The rear power window switches open or To fully open a window equipped with au- The passenger’s window switch operates close only the corresponding windows. To tomatic operation, push the window only the corresponding passenger’s win- open the window, push the switch and hold switch down to the second detent and re- dow. To open the window, push the switch it down ᭺1 . To close the window, pull the lease it; it need not be held. The window and continue to hold it down until the de- switch up ᭺2 . automatically opens all the way. To stop sired window position is reached ᭺1 .To the window, lift the switch up while the win- close the window, pull the switch and con- dow is opening. tinue to hold it up until the desired window position is reached ᭺2 . To fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically closes all the way. To stop the window, push the switch down while the window is closing. 2-56 Instruments and controls Auto-reverse function When power window switch does If the power window function does not op- not operate erate properly after performing the above The auto-reverse function can be acti- procedure have the system checked and vated when a window is closed by auto- If the power window automatic function repaired. It is recommended that you visit a matic operation. (closing only) does not operate properly, NISSAN dealer for this service. perform the following procedure to initial- Depending on the environment or driv- ize the power window system: ing conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or 1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- load similar to something being caught sition. in the window occurs. 2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch. WARNING 3. Pull the power window switch and hold There are some small distances imme- it to close the window, and then hold diately before the closed position which the switch more than 3 seconds after cannot be detected. Make sure that all the window is closed. passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the 4. Release the power window switch. Op- window. erate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, re- complete. The power window auto- placed, or jump started, the power window matically opens or closes depending auto-reverse function may not operate on if the automatic down or up func- properly. Have the power window auto- tion is selected. reverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for 5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for this service. other windows. If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered. Instruments and controls 2-57 MOONROOF (if so equipped)

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once If the moonroof does not operate properly more while it is opening or closing. after performing the procedure above, have your vehicle serviced. It is recom- Tilting the moonroof mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then this service. push the switch to the tilt up position ᭺1 Auto-reverse function (when and release it; it need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push the switch to the closing or tilting down the tilt down position ᭺2 . moonroof) Resetting the moonroof switch The auto-reverse function can be activated when the moonroof is closed or If the moonroof does not operate properly, tilted down by automatic operation when perform the following procedure to initial- the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- LIC2313 ize the moonroof operation system. sition or for a period of time after the igni- POWER MOONROOF 1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by tion switch is placed in the OFF position. repeatedly pushing the moonroof The moonroof will only operate when the Depending on the environment or driv- ᭺1 ignition switch is placed in the ON position. switch to the close position to tilt the ing conditions, the auto-reverse func- The power moonroof is operational for a moonroof up. tion may be activated if an impact or period of time, even if the ignition switch is 2. Push and hold the switch to the close load similar to something being caught placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the position ᭺1 . in the moonroof occurs. driver’s door or the front passenger’s door is opened during this period of time, the 3. Release the moonroof switch after the WARNING power to the moonroof is canceled. moonroof moves slightly up and down. There are some small distances imme- Sliding the moonroof 4. Push and hold the switch to the open diately before the closed position which position ᭺2 to fully tilt the moonroof cannot be detected. Make sure that all To fully open or close the moonroof, push down. passengers have their hands, etc., in- the switch to the open ᭺2 or close ᭺1 posi- side the vehicle before closing the tion and release it; it need not be held. The 5. Check if the moonroof switch operates moonroof. roof will automatically open or close all the normally. 2-58 Instruments and controls INTERIOR LIGHTS

When closing CAUTION If the control unit detects something ∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or caught in the moonroof as it moves to the sand from the moonroof before front, the moonroof will immediately open opening. backward. ∙ Do not place heavy objects on the When tilting down moonroof or surrounding area. If the control unit detects something Sunshade caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will immediately tilt up. Open and close the sunshade by sliding it forward or backward. If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and repeats opening or tilting up the If the moonroof does not close moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down Have your moonroof checked and re- LIC2302 switch within 5 seconds after it happens; paired. It is recommended that you visit a ᭺1 the moonroof will fully close gradually. NISSAN dealer for this service. The interior light can be turned on re- Make sure nothing is caught in the moon- gardless of door position. The light will roof. go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- WARNING sition when any door is opened. ∙ In an accident you could be thrown from the vehicle through an open moonroof. Always use seat belts and child restraints. ∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or extend any portion of their body out of the moonroof opening while the vehicle is in motion or while the moonroof is closing.

Instruments and controls 2-59 ᭺2 The interior lights can be set to operate when the doors are opened. To turn off the interior lights when a door is open, push the switch; the interior lights will not illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is closed and locked. The lights will also go off after a period of time when the doors are open.

NOTE: The step lights (if so equipped) illuminate when the driver and passenger LIC2303 LIC2304 doors are opened regardless of the inte- CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped) MAP LIGHTS rior light switch position. These lights will turn off automatically after a period The console light will turn on whenever the To turn the map lights on, push the of time while doors are open to prevent parking lights or headlights are illuminated. switches. To turn them off, push the the battery from becoming discharged. switches again.

CAUTION CAUTION Do not use for extended periods of time Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery. sult in a discharged battery.

2-60 Instruments and controls When the switch is in the DOOR position ᭺2 , The lights will turn off automatically after a the interior lights will stay on for a period of period of time while doors are open to pre- time when: vent the battery from becoming discharged. ∙ The doors are unlocked by the key fob, a key, or the power door lock switch, while all doors are closed and the ignition CAUTION switch is placed in the OFF position. Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could re- ∙ The driver’s door is opened and then sult in a discharged battery. closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch. ∙ The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed.

SIC2063A The lights will turn off while the timer is DOME LIGHT activated when: ∙ The driver’s door is locked by the key The interior light has a three-position fob, a key, or the power door lock switch. switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position. ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON position. When the switch is in the ON position ᭺1 , the interior lights illuminate, regardless of When the switch is in the OFF position ᭺3 , door position. The lights will go off after a the interior lights do not illuminate, regard- period of time unless the ignition switch is less of door position. placed in the ACC or ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-61 TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro- WARNING opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the vides a convenient way to consolidate the light goes off. functions of up to three individual hand- ∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal held transmitters into one built-in device. Transceiver with any garage door The light will go off after a period of time if opener that lacks safety stop and re- the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition HomeLink® Universal Transceiver: verse features as required by federal switch is placed in the ON position. ∙ Will operate most radio frequency de- safety standards. (These standards became effective for opener models For additional information, refer to “Exterior vices such as garage doors, gates, manufactured after April 1, 1982). A and interior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself” home and office lighting, entry door section of this manual. garage door opener which cannot de- locks and security systems. tect an object in the path of a closing ∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No garage door and then automatically separate batteries are required. If the stop and reverse, does not meet cur- vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis- rent federal safety standards. Using a connected, HomeLink® will retain all garage door opener without these programming. features increases the risk of serious injury or death. When the HomeLink® Universal Trans- ∙ During the programming procedure ceiver is programmed, retain the original your garage door or security gate will transmitter for future programming pro- open and close (if the transmitter is cedures (Example: new vehicle pur- within range). Make sure that people chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the or objects are clear of the garage door, programmed HomeLink® Universal gate, etc. that you are programming. Transceiver buttons should be erased for security purposes. For additional infor- ∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be turned mation, refer to “Programming off while programming the HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe HomeLink®” in this section. exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.

2-62 Instruments and controls PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE: Place the ignition switch in the ACC position when programming HomeLink®. It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker programming and accurate transmission of the radio LIC2365 LIC2366 frequency. 1. Position the end of your hand-held 2. Using both hands, simultaneously transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from press and hold the desired HomeLink® the HomeLink® surface, keeping the button and hand-held transmitter but- HomeLink® indicator light ᭺1 in view. ton. DO NOT release until the HomeLink® indicator light ᭺1 flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be released. (The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.)

Instruments and controls 2-63 NOTE: tenna wire is attached to the unit). If If you live in Canada or you are having diffi- there is difficulty locating the button, culties training a gate operator or garage Some devices may require you to replace reference the garage door opener’s door opener by using the “Training” proce- Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted manual. dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®” in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana- step 2 with the following: dian customers and gate openers” in this 5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” section. button. NOTE: 3. Press and hold the programmed 6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press When programming a garage door HomeLink® button and observe the in- and hold the trained HomeLink® but- opener, etc., unplug the device during dicator light. ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat the “cycling” process to prevent possible the “press/hold/release” sequence up damage to the garage door opener com- ᭺1 ∙ If the indicator light is to three times to complete the training ponents. solid/continuous, programming is process. HomeLink® should now acti- complete and your device should vate your rolling code equipped device. 1. For additional information, refer to “Pro- activate when the HomeLink® button gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this 7. If you have any questions or are having is pressed and released. section. difficulty programming your HomeLink® ∙ If the indicator light ᭺1 blinks rapidly buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: 2. Using both hands, simultaneously press for 2 seconds and then turns to a www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515. and hold the desired HomeLink® button and the hand-held transmitter button. solid/continuous light, continue PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de- During training, your hand-held transmit- vice. A second person may make the CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE ter may automatically stop transmitting. following steps easier. Use a ladder or OPENERS Continue to press and hold the desired other device. Do not stand on your HomeLink® button while you press and Canadian radio-frequency laws require vehicle to perform the next steps. re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held trans- transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) mitter every 2 seconds until the fre- 4. At the receiver located on the garage after several seconds of transmission – quency signal has been learned. The door opener motor in the garage, lo- which may not be long enough for HomeLink® indicator light will flash slowly cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the HomeLink® to pick up the signal during and then rapidly after several seconds name and color of the button may vary training. Similar to this Canadian law, some upon successful training. DO NOT release by manufacturer but it is usually lo- U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim- until the HomeLink® indicator light cated near where the hanging an- eout” in the same manner. flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the 2-64 Instruments and controls indicator light flashes rapidly, both but- PROGRAMMING TROUBLE- CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED tons may be released. The rapid flashing DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION indicates successful training. Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®” If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the The following procedure clears the pro- step 3 to complete. hand-held transmitter information: grammed information from both buttons. If the device was unplugged during the Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How- ∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat- programming procedure, remember to ever, individual buttons can be repro- teries with new batteries. plug it back in when programming is grammed. For additional information, refer completed. ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink® its battery area facing away from the button” in this section. OPERATING THE HOMELINK® HomeLink® surface. UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER To clear all programming: ∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink® 1. Press and hold the two outer The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after and hand-held transmitter buttons HomeLink® buttons until the indicator it is programmed, can be used to activate without interruption. light begins to flash in approximately the programmed device. To operate, sim- 10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than ply press and release the appropriate pro- ∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 20 seconds. grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans- 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit- ceiver button. The amber indicator light will 2. Release both buttons. illuminate while the signal is being trans- ter in that position for up to 15 seconds. mitted. If HomeLink® is not programmed within HomeLink® is now in the programming that time, try holding the transmitter in mode and can be programmed at any For convenience, the hand-held transmit- another position – keeping the indicator time beginning with “Programming ter of the device may also be used at any light in view at all times. HomeLink®” - Step 1. time. If you have any questions or are having difficulty programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

Instruments and controls 2-65 REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN NOTE: HOMELINK® BUTTON If your vehicle is stolen, you should change Changes or modifications not expressly To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal the codes of any non-rolling code device approved by the party responsible for Transceiver button, complete the following: that has been programmed into compliance could void the user’s author- HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of ity to operate the equipment. 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® each device or call the manufacturer or button. DO NOT release the button. For Canada: dealer of those devices for additional infor- This device complies with Industry 2. The indicator light will begin to flash mation. after 20 seconds. Without releasing the Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro- When your vehicle is recovered, you will Operation is subject to the following two gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1. need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni- conditions: (1) this device may not cause versal Transceiver with your new trans- interference, and (2) this device must ac- For questions or comments, contact mitter information. cept any interference, including interfer- HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or ence that may cause undesired opera- 1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico). FCC Notice: tion of the device. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but- For USA: ton has now been reprogrammed. The This device complies with Part 15 of the new device can be activated by pressing the HomeLink® button that was just pro- FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- grammed. This procedure will not affect lowing two conditions: (1) This device any other programmed HomeLink® but- may not cause interference, and (2) this tons. device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

2-66 Instruments and controls 3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys...... 3-2 Troubleshooting guide NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ...... 3-2 (manual transmission only)...... 3-24 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Hood ...... 3-25 keys...... 3-4 Trunk lid ...... 3-26 Doors ...... 3-5 Trunk lid release switch...... 3-26 Locking with key...... 3-5 Interior trunk lid release ...... 3-26 Locking with inside lock knob...... 3-6 Interior trunk access ...... 3-27 Locking with power door lock switch ...... 3-6 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-27 Automatic door locks (if so equipped) ...... 3-7 Opener operation ...... 3-27 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-28 Remote keyless entry system (if so equipped) . . . 3-8 Steering wheel ...... 3-30 How to use remote keyless entry system ...... 3-9 Tilt operation ...... 3-30 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ...... 3-11 Telescopic operation ...... 3-30 Operating range...... 3-13 Sun visors ...... 3-30 Door locks/unlocks precaution ...... 3-14 Vanity mirrors ...... 3-31 NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation ...... 3-14 Mirrors ...... 3-31 How to use the remote keyless entry Manual anti-glare rearview mirror function ...... 3-18 (if so equipped) ...... 3-31 Warning lights and audible reminders ...... 3-21 Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror Warning signals ...... 3-21 (if so equipped) ...... 3-31 Troubleshooting guide (Continuously Outside mirrors ...... 3-32 Variable Transmission only)...... 3-23 KEYS

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate. A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.

LPD2027 LPD2076 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) 1. Integrated door lock key fob 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) 2. Key number plate 2. Mechanical key 3. Key number plate (one plate) CAUTION NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so Do not leave the ignition key inside the equipped) vehicle when you leave the vehicle. Your vehicle can only be driven with the A key number plate is supplied with your Intelligent Keys which are registered to keys. Record the key number and keep it in your vehicle’s Intelligent Key components a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- components. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments As many as four Intelligent Keys can be CAUTION ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near registered and used with one vehicle. The equipment that produces a magnetic Listed below are conditions or occur- new keys must be registered prior to use field, such as a TV, audio equipment rences which will damage the Intelli- with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle and personal computers. Immobilizer System of your vehicle. It is rec- gent Key: If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which NISSAN recommends erasing the ID for this service. Since the registration pro- contains electrical components, to code of that Intelligent Key from the ve- cess requires erasing all memory in the come into contact with water or salt hicle. This may prevent the unauthor- Intelligent Key components, when register- water. This could affect the system ized use of the Intelligent Key to oper- ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent function. ate the vehicle. For information Keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer. ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. regarding the erasing procedure, it is A key number plate is supplied with your ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key recommended that you visit a NISSAN keys. Record the key number and keep it in sharply against another object. dealer. a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli- vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom- gent Key. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent NISSAN does not record key numbers so it Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- is very important to keep track of your key mediately wipe until it is completely number plate. dry. A key number is only necessary when you ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an have lost all keys and do not have one to extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with number. a key holder that contains a magnet.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3 CAUTION key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After Always carry the mechanical key in- the registration process, these compo- stalled in the Intelligent Key slot. nents will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System For additional information, refer to “Doors” during registration. Any key that is not in this section. given to the dealer at the time of registra- NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER tion will no longer be able to start your SYSTEM KEYS vehicle. You can only drive your vehicle using the CAUTION keys which are registered to the NISSAN Do not allow the immobilizer system Vehicle Immobilizer System components key, which contains an electrical tran- in your vehicle. sponder, to come into contact with wa- SPA1951 A mechanical key can be used for all the ter or salt water. This could affect sys- Mechanical key locks. tem function. The Intelligent Key contains the mechani- Never leave the keys in the vehicle. cal key. Additional or replacement keys: To remove the mechanical key, release the If you still have a key, the key number is not lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key. necessary when you need extra NISSAN To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex- into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob isting key can be duplicated without know- returns to the lock position. ing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock can be used with one vehicle. You should the driver’s door. bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys- tem keys that you have to a NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all 3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments DOORS

When the doors are locked using one of the ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death following methods, the doors cannot be through unintended operation of the opened using the inside or outside door vehicle and/or its systems, including handles. The doors must be unlocked to entrapment in windows or inadver- open the doors. tent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the as- WARNING sistance of others or pets unattended ∙ Always have the doors locked while in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem- driving. Along with the use of seat perature inside a closed vehicle on a belts, this provides greater safety in warm day can quickly become high the event of an accident by helping to enough to cause a significant risk of prevent persons from being thrown injury or death to people and pets. from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintention- LPD2129 ally opening the doors, and will help Driver’s side keep out intruders. LOCKING WITH KEY ∙ Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown. Manual To lock the driver’s door, turn the key toward the front of the vehicle ᭺1 . To unlock, turn it toward the rear ᭺2 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5 LPD0461 SPA2726 LPD2309 Driver’s side Inside lock Driver’s and passenger’s side Power (if so equipped) LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR The power door lock system allows you to To lock the door without the key, move the LOCK SWITCH lock or unlock all doors at the same time. inside lock knob to the lock position ᭺1 , To lock all the doors without a key, push the then close the door. Turning the key toward the front ᭺1 of the door lock switch (driver’s or front passen- vehicle locks all doors. To unlock the door without the key, move ger’s side) to the lock position ᭺1 . When the inside lock knob to the unlock position locking the door this way, be certain not to Turning the key one time toward the rear ᭺2 . ᭺2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From leave the key inside the vehicle. that position, returning the key to neutral To unlock all the doors without a key, push ᭺3 (where the key can only be removed and the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas- inserted) and turning it toward the rear senger’s side) to the unlock position ᭺2 . again ᭺4 within five seconds unlocks all doors.

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments Lockout protection ∙ Vehicles not equipped with Intelligent Key (if so equipped) When the power door lock switch is moved to the lock position and any door is open, all – All doors unlock automatically when doors will lock and unlock automatically. the transmission is placed in the P With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle (Park) position (if so equipped), the ignition is turned to the OFF position while any door open, all doors will unlock or when the key is removed from the automatically and a chime will sound after ignition. the door is closed. These functions help to prevent the Intelli- gent Key from being accidentally locked inside the vehicle. AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS (if so equipped) LPD2570 CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK ∙ All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph Child safety locks help prevent the rear (24 km/h). doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the ve- ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission hicle. (CVT) (if so equipped) The child safety lock levers are located on – All doors unlock automatically when the edge of the rear doors. the transmission is placed in the P When the lever is in the unlock position ᭺2 , (Park) position. the door can be opened from the outside ∙ Manual transmission (if so equipped) or the inside. – All doors unlock automatically when When the lever is in the LOCK position ᭺1 , the ignition is placed in the off posi- the door can be opened only from the tion. outside. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (if so equipped)

WARNING As many as four key fobs can be used with ∙ Do not place the key fob for an ex- one vehicle. For information concerning tended period in an area where tem- ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect the purchase and use of additional key peratures exceed 140°F (60°C). electric medical equipment. Those fobs, it is recommended that you visit a who use a pacemaker should contact NISSAN dealer. ∙ Do not attach the key fob with a key the electric medical equipment holder that contains a magnet. manufacturer for the possible influ- The key fob will not function when: ∙ Do not place the key fob near equip- ences before use. ∙ The battery is discharged. ment that produces a magnetic field, ∙ The remote keyless entry key fob ∙ The distance between the vehicle and such as a TV, audio equipment and transmits radio waves when the but- the key fob is over 33 ft (10 m). personal computers. tons are pressed. The FAA advises ra- If a key fob is lost or stolen, NISSAN rec- dio waves may affect aircraft naviga- The panic alarm will not activate when ommends erasing the ID code of that tion and communication systems. Do the key is in the ignition switch. key fob. This will prevent the key fob not operate the remote keyless entry from unauthorized use to unlock the key fob while on an airplane. Make CAUTION vehicle. For information regarding the sure the buttons are not operated un- Listed below are conditions or occur- erasing procedure, it is recommended intentionally when the unit is stored rences which will damage the key fob: that you visit a NISSAN dealer. for a flight. ∙ Do not allow the key fob, which con- It is possible to lock/unlock all doors, turn tains electrical components, to come the interior lights on, and activate the panic into contact with water or salt water. alarm by using the key fob from outside the This could affect the system function. vehicle. ∙ Do not drop the key fob. Be sure to remove the key from the ve- ∙ Do not strike the key fob sharply hicle before locking the doors. against another object. The key fob can operate at a distance of ∙ Do not change or modify the key fob. approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. ∙ Wetting may damage the key fob. If The effective distance depends on the the key fob gets wet, immediately conditions around the vehicle. wipe until it is completely dry. 3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NOTE: An auto-relock function will operate after a full or partial unlock, when no further user action occurs. The relock will operate approximately 1 minute after full or partial unlock. The auto-relock function is canceled when any door is opened or the key is inserted into the ignition.

LPD2028 LPD2029 HOW TO USE REMOTE KEYLESS Unlocking the doors ENTRY SYSTEM 1. Press the button on the key fob to Locking the doors unlock the driver’s door. 2. The hazard warning lights flash once. 1. Remove the ignition key. 2. Close all the doors. 3. Press the button again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors. 3. Press the button on the key fob. ∙ All the doors will lock. ∙ The hazard indicator flashes twice and the horn beeps once.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9 Using the interior light Press the button on the key fob once to turn on the interior lights. For additional information, refer to “Interior lights” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2030 LPD2031 Releasing the trunk lid Using the panic alarm Press the button on the key fob for If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- longer than 0.5 seconds to open the trunk ened, you may activate the panic alarm to lid. The trunk release button on the key fob call attention by pressing and holding will not operate when the ignition switch is the button on the key fob for longer placed in the ON position. than 0.5 seconds. The panic alarm will stay on for a period of time. The panic alarm stops when: ∙ It has run for a period of time. ∙ Any button is pressed on the key fob.

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so equipped)

The hazard warning lights will flash once WARNING and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reac- ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect tivated. electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact Deactivating the horn beep feature does the electric medical equipment not silence the horn if the alarm is trig- manufacturer for the possible influ- gered. ences before use. ∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an air- LPD2032 plane. Make sure the buttons are not Silencing the horn beep feature operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight. If desired, the horn beep feature can be deactivated using the key fob. The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door locks using the remote control To deactivate: Press and hold the function or pushing the request switch on and buttons for at least 2 seconds. the vehicle without taking the key out from The hazard warning lights will flash three a pocket or purse. The operating environ- times to confirm that the horn beep fea- ment and/or conditions may affect the In- ture has been deactivated. telligent Key system operation. To activate: Press and hold the Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system. and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11 CAUTION ∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park- additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom- ing meter. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. ∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key In such cases, correct the operating condi- with you when operating the vehicle. CAUTION tions before using the Intelligent Key func- ∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the tion or use the mechanical key. Listed below are conditions or occur- vehicle when you leave the vehicle. rences which will damage the Intelli- Although the life of the battery varies de- gent Key: The Intelligent Key is always communicat- pending on the operating conditions, the ing with the vehicle as it receives radio battery’s life is approximately two years. If ∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which waves. The Intelligent Key system trans- the battery is discharged, replace it with a contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt mits weak radio waves. Environmental new one. conditions may interfere with the opera- water. This could affect the system tion of the Intelligent Key system under the When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the function. following operating conditions: Intelligent Key system warning light ( ) ∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key. will blink green for about 30 seconds after ∙ When operating near a location where the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- ∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key strong radio waves are transmitted, sition. sharply against another object. such as a TV tower, power station and Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re- ∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli- broadcasting station. ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near gent Key. ∙ When in possession of wireless equip- equipment which transmits strong radio ∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent ment, such as a cellular telephone, waves, such as signals from a TV and per- Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im- transceiver or a CB radio. sonal computer, the battery life may be- mediately wipe until it is completely come shorter. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact dry. with or covered by metallic materials. For information regarding replacement of ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in an area where ∙ When any type of radio wave remote a battery, refer to “Battery replacement” in temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C). control is used nearby. the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. As many as four Intelligent Keys can be ∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near a key holder that contains a magnet. an electric appliance such as a personal registered and used with one vehicle. For computer. information about the purchase and use of 3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near When the Intelligent Key battery is dis- equipment that produces a magnetic charged or strong radio waves are present field, such as a TV, audio equipment near the operating location, the Intelligent and personal computers. Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN properly. recommends erasing the ID code of that The operating range is within 31.50 in Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may (80 cm) from each request switch ᭺1 . prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli- gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor- If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door mation regarding the erasing procedure, it glass, handle or rear bumper, the request is recommended that you visit a NISSAN switches may not function. dealer. When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelli- gent Key, to push the request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

LPD2402 OPERATING RANGE The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the request switch ᭺1 .

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13 ∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors. ∙ Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch. The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2554 LPD2399 DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® PRECAUTION OPERATION ∙ Do not push the door handle request You can lock or unlock the doors and trunk switch with the Intelligent Key held in lid without taking the Intelligent Key out of your hand as illustrated. The close dis- your pocket or bag. tance to the door handle will cause the When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, Intelligent Key system to have difficulty you can lock or unlock all doors and trunk recognizing that the Intelligent Key is lid by pushing the door handle request outside the vehicle. switch within the range of operation. ∙ After locking with the door handle request switch, verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments ∙ Doors and trunk lid do not lock with the door handle request switch with the In- telligent Key inside the vehicle; a beep sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intel- ligent Key.

CAUTION ∙ After locking the doors using the request switch, make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handle or the trunk opener switch. LPD2400 LPD2165 ∙ When locking the doors using the re- NOTE: Locking doors quest switch, make sure to have the 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- ∙ Doors and trunk lid lock with the door Intelligent Key in your possession be- tion (Continuously Variable Transmis- handle request switch while the ignition fore operating the request switch to sion only), place the ignition switch in switch is not in the LOCK position. prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle. the LOCK position and make sure you ∙ Doors and trunk lid do not lock by push- carry the Intelligent Key with you. ing the door handle request switch ∙ The request switch is operational only 2. Close all doors. while any door is open. However, the when the Intelligent Key has been de- driver’s side door will lock with the me- tected by the Intelligent Key system. 3. Push any door handle request switch chanical key even if any door is open. ᭺1 while carrying the Intelligent Key with you. 4. All doors and the trunk will lock. 5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice. Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15 Lockout protection ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in- To prevent the Intelligent Key from being side the door pockets. accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on protection is equipped with the Intelligent or under the spare tire area. Key. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in- When the driver’s side door is open, the side or near metallic materials. doors are locked and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed; the lock will automatically unlock and the door buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli- LPD2400 gent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch to lock the Unlocking doors door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, 1. Carry the Intelligent Key. pocket or your other hand. 2. Push the door handle request switch CAUTION ᭺1 . The lockout protection may not func- 3. The hazard warning lights flash once tion under the following conditions: and the outside chime sounds once. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on 4. Push the door handle request switch top of the instrument panel. ᭺1 again within 1 minute to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the rear parcel shelf. ∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin. 3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments The interior light timer illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations. ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON position. ∙ Locking the doors with the remote control. ∙ Switching the room light switch to the LPD2165 OFF position. LPD2122 If a door handle is pulled while unlocking Opening the trunk lid the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original 1. Push the trunk opener request switch position will unlock the door. If the door ᭺A for more than 1 second while carry- does not unlock after returning the door ing the Intelligent Key with you. handle, push the door handle request 2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will switch to unlock the door. sound four times. All doors and trunk lid will be locked auto- 3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk. matically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after Lockout protection pushing the request switch. To prevent the Intelligent Key from being ∙ Opening any door or the trunk lid. accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. Key.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17 When all doors are locked and the trunk lid CAUTION is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the After locking the doors using the Intel- trunk will open. ligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the HOW TO USE THE REMOTE door handles. KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle. LPD2972 The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions: Locking doors ∙ The Intelligent Key is not within the op- 1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK erational range. position. ∙ The doors or the trunk are open or not 2. Close all doors. closed securely. 3. Press the button on the Intelli- ∙ The Intelligent Key battery is dis- gent Key. charged. 4. The hazard warning lights flash twice CAUTION and the horn beeps once. When locking the doors using the Intel- 5. All doors and the trunk lid will be locked. ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments All doors and trunk lid will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 1 minute after pressing the button: ∙ Opening any doors or trunk lid. ∙ Pushing the ignition switch. The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position. The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations: LPD2462 ∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po- WPD0364 Unlocking doors sition. Releasing the trunk lid ∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent 1. Press the button on the Intelligent Press the button for longer than Key. Key to unlock the driver’s door. 0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk ∙ Switching the room light switch to the release button will not operate when the 2. The hazard warning lights flash once. OFF position. ignition switch is placed in the ON position. 3. Press the button again within 1 minute to unlock all doors and trunk lid.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19 The panic alarm stops when: ∙ It has run for a period of time, or ∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key. ∙ The request switch on the driver or passenger door is pushed and the Intelli- gent Key is in range of the door handle.

WPD0361 LPD2971 Using the panic alarm Silencing the horn beep feature If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- If desired, the horn beep feature can be ened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding deactivated using the Intelligent Key. the button on the Intelligent Key for To deactivate: Press and hold the longer than 0.5 seconds. and buttons for at least 2 seconds. The panic alarm and headlights will stay on The hazard warning lights will flash three for a period of time. times to confirm that the horn beep feature has been deactivated. To activate: Press and hold the and buttons for at least 2 seconds once more.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments The hazard warning lights will flash once CAUTION and the horn will sound once to confirm that the horn beep feature has been reac- When the buzzer sounds and the warn- tivated. ing light illuminates, be sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. Deactivating the horn beep feature does not silence the horn if the alarm is trig- WARNING SIGNALS gered. To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelli- gent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning light comes on in the instrument panel.

LPD2572 When a chime or beep sounds or the warning light comes on, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. ᭺1 P (Park) position selecting warning light Audible reminder and warning ᭺2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning when locking the doors (if so light equipped) WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE When the chime or buzzer sounds from REMINDERS inside and outside the vehicle, check for the following: The Intelligent Key is equipped with a function that is designed to minimize improper ∙ The ignition switch is placed in the LOCK operations and to help prevent the vehicle position. from being stolen. The warning buzzer ∙ The Intelligent Key is not left inside the sounds and the warning light illuminates vehicle. when improper operations are detected. ∙ The shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21 Audible reminder and warning Alarm and warning when the Preventing the Intelligent Key when the engine stops (if so engine starts from being left in the vehicle equipped) When the Intelligent Key system warning If you lock all doors using the power door When the P position selecting warning light light ( ) blinks red and the outside lock switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all of the doors unlock immediately ( ) in the instrument panel blinks in red: buzzer sounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. and the buzzer will warn you when the door ∙ Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) is closed. position. Warning for low battery power When the chime sounds intermittently: When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intelligent Key system warning light ( ) ∙ Make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) will blink green for about 30 seconds after position and the ignition switch is the ignition switch is placed in the ON po- placed in the LOCK position. sition. This warning is to let you know that the battery of the Intelligent Key will run If the chime sounds continuously when the down soon. Replace it with a new one. For driver’s door is opened, check the following: additional information, refer to “Battery re- ∙ The shift lever is placed in the P (Park) placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section position and the ignition switch is of this manual. placed in the LOCK position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for battery replacement. ∙ The warning chime may stop when one of the following is performed: – Returning the ignition switch to the LOCK position. – Closing the doors.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continuously Variable Transmission only)

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When pushing the ignition switch to The P (Park) warning light in the instru- The shift lever is not in the P (Park) Make sure that the shift lever is in the stop the engine ment panel illuminates and the inside position. P (Park) position. chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is in the ACC Place the ignition switch in the OFF When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. position. position. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for a few with you. quest switch to lock the door seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. When closing the doors The P (Park) warning light in the instru- The ignition switch is in the ACC or Make sure that the shift lever is in the ment panel illuminates and the out- OFF position and the shift lever is not P (Park) position and place the ignition side chime sounds continuously. in the P (Park) position. switch in the OFF position. The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. trunk. with you. The ignition switch is in the ACC Place the ignition switch in the OFF When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. position. position. The outside chime sounds for approxi- Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key When closing the trunk lid mately 10 seconds and the trunk lid The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. with you. opens. When pressing the The outside chime sounds for a few The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key seconds and all the doors unlock. with you. button on the Intelligent Key to the The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key lock the door with you. A door is not closed securely. Close the doors securely.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (manual transmission only)

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy When the parking brake is fully applied The inside warning chime sounds The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF continuously. position. position. The ignition switch is in the ON Place the ignition switch in the OFF When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously. position. position. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key When pushing the door handle re- The outside chime sounds for a few with you. quest switch to lock the door seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. The key warning light in the instru- The ignition switch is in the ACC Place the ignition switch in the OFF ment panel blinks in yellow, the out- position. position. side chime sounds three times and When closing the doors the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The outside chime sounds for approxi- The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle or Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock. trunk. with you. When pushing the ignition switch to The key warning light in the instru- The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. start the engine ment panel blinks in green. For additional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it- yourself” section of this manual.

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments HOOD

WARNING ∙ Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident. ∙ If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2886 1. Pull the hood lock release handle ᭺1 NOTE: located below the instrument panel Do not place the support rod in a location until the hood springs up slightly. other than the designated slot. 2. Locate the lever ᭺2 in between the Hold the coated parts ᭺A when removing hood and grille and push the lever side- or resetting the support rod. Avoid direct ways with your fingertips. contact with the metal parts, as they 3. Raise the hood ᭺3 . may be hot immediately after the engine has been stopped. 4. Remove the support rod ᭺4 and insert it into the slot marked by an arrow ᭺5 . When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm) above the latch and release it. This allows proper en- gagement of the hood latch.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25 TRUNK LID

∙ Closely supervise children when they are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the trunk where they could be seriously injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys. To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch down in the direction of the arrow as illustrated. To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid down securely. LPD2119 LPD2558 Instrument panel NOTE: INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCH You can open the trunk lid with the Intel- ligent Key. For additional information, WARNING WARNING refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in this Closely supervise children when they ∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open. section. are around cars to prevent them from This could allow dangerous exhaust playing and becoming locked in the gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For trunk where they could be seriously in- additional information, refer to “Ex- jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the seatback and trunk lid securely latched “Starting and driving” section of this when not in use, and prevent children’s manual. access to car keys.

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments FUEL-FILLER DOOR

The interior trunk lid release mechanism WARNING provides a means of escape for children and adults in the event they become ∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the locked inside the trunk. cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of To open the trunk from the inside, pull the these areas by passengers without illuminated release handle until the lock re- proper restraints could result in seri- leases and push up on the trunk lid. The ous injury or death in an accident or release handle is made of a material that sudden stop. glows in the dark after a brief exposure to ∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or ambient light. straps to help prevent it from sliding The handle is located inside the trunk com- or shifting. Do not place cargo higher partment on the interior of the trunk lid. than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS cause personal injury. LPD2810 The trunk can be accessed from the driv- ∙ When returning the seatbacks to the OPENER OPERATION upright position, be certain they are er’s side or the passenger side of the rear The fuel-filler door release is located below completely secured in the latched po- seat. the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler sition. If they are not completely se- 1. Move the front seat to the most for- cured, passengers may be injured in door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel- ward position. an accident or sudden stop. filler door securely. 2. Pull up on the knob on the rear seat- ∙ Closely supervise children when they back. are around cars to prevent them from playing and becoming locked in the 3. Fold down the driver’s or passenger’s trunk where they could be seriously side seatback. injured. Keep the car locked, with the rear seatback and trunk lid securely latched when not in use, and prevent children’s access to car keys.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27 FUEL-FILLER CAP ∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in ∙ The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning message the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity will appear if the fuel-filler cap is not WARNING can cause an explosion of flammable properly tightened. It may take a few ∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or driving trips for the message to be dis- highly explosive under certain condi- trailer. To reduce the risk of serious played. Failure to tighten the fuel-filler tions. You could be burned or seri- injury or death when filling portable cap properly after the LOOSE FUEL CAP ously injured if it is misused or mis- fuel containers: warning message appears may cause handled. Always stop the engine and – Always place the container on the the Malfunction Indicator Light do not smoke or allow open flames or ground when filling. (MIL) to illuminate. sparks near the vehicle when ∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap refueling. – Do not use electronic devices when filling. properly may cause the Malfunc- ∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate. If – Keep the pump nozzle in contact after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off the light illuminates because the with the container while you are automatically. Continued refueling fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, filling it. may cause fuel overflow, resulting in tighten or install the cap and continue fuel spray and possibly a fire. – Use only approved portable fuel to drive the vehicle. The light ∙ Use only an original equipment type containers for flammable liquid. should turn off after a few driving trips. fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has If the light does not turn off after a built-in safety valve needed for CAUTION a few driving trips, have the vehicle in- proper operation of the fuel system ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more spected. It is recommended that you and emission control system. An in- than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. correct cap can result in a serious mal- additional information, refer to “Fuel ∙ For additional information, refer to function and possible injury. It could recommendation” in the “Technical “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in also cause the Malfunction Indi- and consumer information” section of the “Instruments and controls” sec- cator Light (MIL) to come on. this manual. tion of this manual. ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body ∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, to attempt to start your vehicle. flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments LPD2125 LPD2124 LPD2398 To remove the fuel-filler cap: Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) A 1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock- LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 3. Press the button ᭺ on the steer- wise to remove. ing wheel for about 1 second to turn off The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the Loose Fuel Cap warning ᭺B after 2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder the odometer or vehicle information dis- tightening the fuel-filler cap. ᭺1 while refueling. play (if so equipped) when the fuel-filler cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle To install the fuel-filler cap: has been refueled. It may take a few driving 1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the trips for the message to be displayed. To fuel-filler tube. turn off the warning, do the following: 2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a 1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as single click is heard. previously described as soon as possible. 2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29 STEERING WHEEL SUN VISORS

3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out as needed ᭺3 .

CAUTION ∙ Do not store the sun visor before returning the extension to its original position. ∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor forcedly downward.

LPD2123 TILT OPERATION Pull the lock lever down ᭺1 and adjust the steering wheel up or down ᭺2 to the desired position. Push the lock lever up ᭺1 firmly lock the steering wheel in place.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION LPD2154 Pull the lock lever down ᭺1 and adjust the 1. To block glare from the front, swing steering wheel forward or backward ᭺3 to down the main sun visor ᭺1 . the desired position. 2. To block glare from the side, remove Push the lock lever up ᭺1 firmly to lock the the main sun visor from the center steering wheel in place. mount and swing the visor to the side ᭺2 . 3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments MIRRORS

LPD2573 WPD0126 LPD2418 VANITY MIRRORS MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW Type A (if so equipped) AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun MIRROR (if so equipped) REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped) visor down and flip open the mirror cover. Use the night position ᭺1 to reduce glare Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and from the headlights of vehicles behind you The inside mirror is designed so that it au- turn on when the mirror cover is open. at night. tomatically dims according to the intensity Use the day position ᭺2 when driving in of the headlights of the vehicle following daylight hours. you. The automatic anti-glare feature is activated when the ignition switch is in the WARNING ON position. Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31 Type B (if so equipped) ∙ To turn off the anti-glare feature, press the O button and the indicator light will turn off. ∙ To turn on the anti-glare feature, press the | button and the indicator light will turn on. For additional information on HomeLink® Universal Transceiver operation, refer to “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2411 LPD0237 Type B (if so equipped) OUTSIDE MIRRORS NOTE: The outside mirror remote control will op- Do not hang any objects over the sen- erate only when the ignition switch is in the sors ᭺1 or apply glass cleaner to the sen- ACC or ON position. sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the sensors, resulting in improper op- Move the small switch ᭺1 to select the right eration. or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de- 2 The indicator light ᭺3 will illuminate when sired position using the large switch ᭺. the automatic anti-glare feature is operat- Move the switch to the center (neutral) po- ing. sition to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments WARNING ∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects. ∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LPD2112 Manual folding outside mirrors Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it. Heated mirrors (if so equipped) Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For additional information, refer to “Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru- ments and controls” section of this manual.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33 4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual...... 4-2 Heater operation ...... 4-17 Control panel buttons ...... 4-3 Air flow charts ...... 4-18 How to use the touch-screen...... 4-3 Heater and air conditioner (manual) How to use the MENU button ...... 4-5 (if so equipped) ...... 4-20 Controls ...... 4-21 (brightness control) button ...... 4-7 Heater operation ...... 4-22 How to use the VOL (volume) knob / Air conditioner operation ...... 4-23 PUSH (power)button...... 4-7 Air flow charts ...... 4-24 Selecting menu from launch bar ...... 4-7 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) RearView Monitor ...... 4-8 (if so equipped) ...... 4-28 RearView Monitor system operation ...... 4-9 Automatic operation ...... 4-29 How to read the displayed lines...... 4-9 Manual operation ...... 4-30 Difference between predicted and Operating tips ...... 4-31 actual distances...... 4-10 Servicing air conditioner (if so equipped)...... 4-31 How to park with predicted course Audio system...... 4-31 lines (if so equipped)...... 4-11 Radio...... 4-31 Adjusting the screen ...... 4-13 FM radio reception ...... 4-32 How to turn on and off predicted AM radio reception ...... 4-32 course lines (if so equipped) ...... 4-13 Audio operation precautions ...... 4-32 RearView Monitor system limitations ...... 4-13 FM/AM radio...... 4-36 System maintenance...... 4-14 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Vents...... 4-15 Port...... 4-40 Heater (manual) (if so equipped) ...... 4-15 iPod®* player operation...... 4-43 Controls ...... 4-16 Bluetooth® streaming audio ...... 4-46 Steering wheel switch for audio control...... 4-49 Control buttons ...... 4-59 Antenna...... 4-51 Connecting procedure ...... 4-60 Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ...... 4-51 Voice commands ...... 4-61 Requirements ...... 4-51 Phone display screen...... 4-63 Operating Siri® Eyes Free ...... 4-52 Making a call ...... 4-64 Troubleshooting guide ...... 4-53 Receiving a call ...... 4-65 Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-54 During a call ...... 4-65 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ...... 4-54 Ending a call...... 4-65 Regulatory information ...... 4-56 Text messaging (if so equipped) ...... 4-65 Using the system...... 4-57 Bluetooth® connections screen ...... 4-69 Indicators ...... 4-58 Phone and text message settings ...... 4-71 NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S MANUAL

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s WARNING Manual that includes the following information. ∙ Positioning of the heating or air conditioning controls and display con- ∙ NissanConnect® Services trols should not be done while driving ∙ Navigation system in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. ∙ Audio system TM ∙ Do not disassemble or modify this ∙ Apple CarPlay system. If you do, it may result in acci- ∙ Android AutoTM dents, fire, or electrical shock. ∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system ∙ Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen ∙ Viewing information screen or lack of sound. Continued ∙ Other settings use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock. ∙ Voice recognition ∙ In case you notice any foreign object ∙ General system information in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS

When you use this system, make sure the engine is running. If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start. Reference symbols: “Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen. HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN

CAUTION ∙ The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury. ∙ To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will LHA4680 scratch or deteriorate the panel. 1. MENU button 5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH ∙ Do not splash any liquid such as water (power) button or car fragrance on the display. Con- 2. button* * For additional information regarding the tact with liquid will cause the system 3. Display screen Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System to malfunction. control button, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands- To help ensure safe driving, some functions 4. (brightness control) button Free Phone System” in this section. cannot be operated while driving. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3 The on-screen functions that are not avail- Touch-screen operation able while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.

WARNING ∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to driving. ∙ Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.

LHA4700

Menu Item Result Selecting the item Touch an item to select. To select the “Phone” key, touch the “Phone” key on the screen. Touch the “ ”keyto return to the previous screen. Adjusting the item Touch the “+” key or the “Ϫ” key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time. Inputting characters Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters. 123 Touch to manually enter numbers. OK Completes the character input. Touch-screen maintenance screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen. If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle: 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Touch the “Settings” key. 3. Touch the desired item.

LHA4706 LHA4700

Menu item Result Settings Touch to change the following settings. Connections Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, refer to “USB connections screen” and “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section. Phone For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” in this section. Sound For additional information, refer to “Audio system” in this section. Volume & Beeps For additional information, refer to “Volume & beeps” in this section. Clock Touch this key to adjust clock settings. On-screen Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen. Clock Clock Format Touch to set the clock to 12 hour or 24 hour formats. Daylight Sav- Touch to adjusts the daylight saving time to on or off. ings Time Set Clock Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes. Manually

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5 Menu item Result System Voice For additional information, refer to “Settings” in this section. Camera Touch this key to change the camera settings. Others Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Display Touch this key to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to “Adjusting the screen” in this section. Language Touch this key to change the language on the display. OSS Licenses Touch this key to display software licensing information. Return All Set- Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory. tings to De- fault

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems (brightness control) BUTTON The following menu items are available on the Launch Bar: To change the display brightness, press ∙AM the button. Pressing the button again will change the display to the day or the ∙FM night display. ∙ USB/iPod Press and hold the button for more ∙ Bluetooth than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press and hold the button again to turn the dis- ∙AUX play on. ∙ Settings HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON

Press the PUSH (power) button to LHA4707 turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH (volume) knob to adjust audio volume. BAR Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar ᭺1 which is displayed on most of the main menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as settings screens, camera screens, etc.) Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7 REARVIEW MONITOR

LHA4780 WARNING ∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience fea- ∙ The system is designed as an aid to ture and is not a substitute for proper the driver in showing large stationary ∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in- backing. Always turn and look out the objects directly behind the vehicle, to structions for proper use of the Rear- windows and check mirrors to be sure help avoid damaging the vehicle. View Monitor system could result in that it is safe to move before operating serious injury or death. the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.

CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera. The RearView Monitor system automati- LHA3819 LHA4805 cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when To display the rear view, the RearView Moni- HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) tor system uses a camera located just position. The radio can still be heard while above the vehicle’s license plate ᭺1 . Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle the RearView Monitor is active. width and distances to objects with refer- REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ence to the vehicle body line ᭺A are dis- OPERATION played on the monitor. With the ignition switch in the ON position, Distance guide lines move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor. Indicate distances from the vehicle body. ∙ Red line ᭺1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) ∙ Yellow line ᭺2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) ∙ Green line ᭺3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m) Vehicle width guide lines ᭺4 Indicate the vehicle width when backing up. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9 Predicted course lines ᭺5 (if so equipped) Indicate the predicted course when backing up. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position. The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course. DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When LHA4941 LHA4942 in doubt, turn around and view the objects Backing up on a steep uphill Backing up on a steep downhill as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the behind the vehicle. distance guide lines and the vehicle width distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor. closer than it appears on the monitor. 4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems object when backing up to the position ᭺A if the object projects over the actual backing up course. HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so equipped)

WARNING ∙ If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. ∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line. ∙ If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures: – Turn the steering wheel from lock LHA4806 LHA4013 to lock while the engine is running. Backing up near a projecting object Backing up behind a projecting – Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes. The predicted course lines ᭺A (if so object ∙ When the steering wheel is turned equipped) do not touch the object in the ᭺C The position is shown farther than the with the ignition switch in the ACC po- display. However, the vehicle may hit the ᭺B position in the display. However, the position, the predicted course lines may ᭺C object if it projects over the actual backing sition is actually at the same distance as be displayed incorrectly. up course. the position ᭺A . The vehicle may hit the Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11 4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the vehicle width guide lines ᭺D parallel to the parking space ᭺C while referring to the predicted course lines. 5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.

LHA4769 LHA4770 1. Visually check that the parking space is 3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting safe before parking your vehicle. the steering wheel so that the predicted course lines ᭺B enter the park- 2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed ing space ᭺C . on the screen ᭺A when the shift lever is moved to the R (Reverse) position.

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF ∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor- PREDICTED COURSE LINES (if so ner areas of the bumper cannot be equipped) viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limita- To toggle ON and OFF the predicted course tion. The system will not show small lines while in the P (Park) position: objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper 1. Touch the “Settings” key. or on the ground. 2. Touch the “Camera” key. ∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni- 3. Touch the “Predicted Course Lines” key tor differ from actual distance be- to turn the feature ON or OFF. cause a wide-angle lens is used. REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to LHA3522 LIMITATIONS when viewed in the rearview and out- ADJUSTING THE SCREEN side mirrors. WARNING 1. While on the main menu screen, touch ∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference. Listed below are the system limitations the “Settings” key. The lines are highly affected by the for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate number of occupants, fuel level, ve- 2. Touch the “Camera” key. the vehicle in accordance with these hicle position, road conditions and system limitations could result in seri- 3. Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, Tint”, road grade. ous injury or death. “Color”, or “Black Level” key. ∙ Make sure that the liftgate is securely ∙ The system cannot completely elimi- closed when backing up. 4. Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “–” nate blind spots and may not show key on the touch-screen display. every object. ∙ Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is in- NOTE: stalled above the license plate. Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13 ∙ When washing the vehicle with high ∙ Objects on the monitor may not be pressure water, be sure not to spray it clear in a dark environment. around the camera. Otherwise, water ∙ There may be a delay when switching may enter the camera unit causing between views. water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock. ∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not ∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci- display objects clearly. Clean the cam- sion instrument. Otherwise, it may era. malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock. ∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth The following are operating limitations and dampened with a diluted mild cleaning do not represent a system malfunction: agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

∙ When the temperature is extremely LHA3819 high or low, the screen may not clearly SYSTEM MAINTENANCE display objects. ∙ When strong light directly shines on the CAUTION camera, objects may not be displayed ∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner clearly. to clean the camera. This will cause ∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on discoloration. the screen. This is due to strong re- ∙ Do not damage the camera as the moni- flected light from the bumper. tor screen may be adversely affected. ∙ The screen may flicker under fluores- If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the cent light. camera ᭺1 , the RearView Monitor may not ∙ The colors of objects on the RearView display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a Monitor may differ somewhat from the diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip- actual color of objects. ing it with a dry cloth. 4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems VENTS HEATER (manual) (if so equipped)

WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly LHA4299 fatal injuries to people or animals. Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for slides. long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the win- Open or close the vents by using the dial. dows to fog up. Move the dial toward the to open the vents or toward the to close them. NOTE: ∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. ∙ When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15 CONTROLS Fan speed control dial The fan speed control dial turns the fan on and off and controls fan speed. Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. — Air flows from center and side vents. — Air flows from center and side vents and the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows mainly from the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets and the front and rear floor outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. LHA4253 Temperature control dial 1. Fan speed control dial / sys- 5. Rear window and outside mir- The temperature control dial allows you to tem OFF dial ror defroster switch adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To 2. Air flow control buttons 6. Front windshield defroster lower the temperature, turn the dial to the 3. Temperature control dial button left. To increase the temperature, turn the 4. Air recirculation button dial to the right.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Air recirculation button HEATER OPERATION Defrosting or defogging On position (Indicator light on): Heating This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows. Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. This mode is used to direct heated air to Press the button to the ON position the foot outlets. Some air also flows from 1. Press the defrost/defog button. when: the defrost outlets and the side vent outlets. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to ∙ driving on a dusty road. the desired position. 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- ∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering 3. Turn the temperature control dial to tion for normal heating. passenger compartment. the desired position between the Off position (Indicator light off): 2. Press the air flow control button. middle and the hot position. Outside air is drawn into the passenger compartment and distributed through the 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to ∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the selected outlet. the desired position. windows, turn the fan control dial Use the OFF position for normal heater op- to the highest setting and the tempera- 4. Turn the temperature control dial to eration. ture control to the full HOT position. the desired position between the Rear window and outside mirror middle and the hot position. Bi-level heating defroster switch Ventilation The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the front For additional information, refer to “Rear This mode directs outside air to the side and rear floor outlets. window and outside mirror (if so equipped) and center vents. defroster switch” in the “Instruments and 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- controls” section of this manual. tion. tion. 2. Press the air flow control button. 2. Press the air flow control button. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. the desired position. 4. Turn the temperature control dial to 4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. the desired position. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17 Heating and defogging This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield. 1. Press the air flow control button. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position. Operating tips Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation. AIR FLOW CHARTS The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating, defrosting or defogging. The air recirculation button should always be in the OFF position for heating and defrosting.

LHA4400 4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4401 LHA4402 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)

NOTE: ∙ Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents. ∙ When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should LHA4403 help reduce odors inside the vehicle. 4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CONTROLS Fan speed control dial The fan speed control dial turns the fan on and off, and controls fan speed. Air flow control buttons The air flow control buttons allow you to select the air flow outlets. MAX — Air flows from center and side A/C vents with maximum cooling. — Air flows from center and side vents. — Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from foot outlets. — Air flows from defroster outlets and foot outlets. — Air flows mainly from defroster outlets. LHA2243 Temperature control dial 1. Fan speed control dial / sys- 4. Air recirculation button The temperature control dial allows you to tem OFF dial / A/C (air conditioner) 5. Rear window and outside mir- adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To button ror (if so equipped) defroster lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the 2. Air flow control buttons switch dial to the right. 3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C 6. Front windshield defroster button button Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21 Air recirculation button The air conditioner cooling function op- Ventilation ON position (Indicator light on): erates only when the engine is running. This mode directs outside air to the side Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle. Rear window and outside mirror and center vents. Press the button to the ON position (if so equipped) defroster switch 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- when: tion. For additional information, refer to “Rear ∙ driving on a dusty road. window and outside mirror (if so equipped) 2. Press the air flow control button. defroster switch” in the “Instruments and ∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering controls” section of this manual. 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to passenger compartment. the desired position. HEATER OPERATION ∙ for maximum cooling when using the 4. Turn the temperature control dial to air conditioner. Heating the desired position. The air recirculation function does not op- This mode is used to direct heated air to Defrosting or defogging erate when in the or air flow the foot outlets. Some air also flows from modes. This mode directs the air to the defrost the defrost outlets and the side vent out- outlets to defrost/defog the windows. OFF position (Indicator light off): lets. Outside air is drawn into the passenger 1. Press the defrost/defog button . compartment and distributed through the 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- selected outlet. tion for normal heating. 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position. Use the OFF position for normal heater or 2. Press the air flow control button. air conditioner operation. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to the desired position between the A/C (air conditioner) button the desired position. middle and the hot position. Start the engine, press the fan speed 4. Turn the temperature control dial to ∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the control buttons to the desired position and the desired position between the windows, turn the fan speed con- press the button to turn on the air middle and the hot position. trol dial to the highest setting and the conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, temperature control to the full HOT po- press the button again. sition. 4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ When the position is selected, the 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to Cooling air conditioner automatically turns on if the desired position. This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the outside temperature is more than the air. 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air 3. Turn the temperature control dial to which helps defog the windshield. the desired position between the 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- middle and the hot position. The mode automatically turns off, tion. allowing outside air to be drawn into the ∙ When the position is selected, the 2. Press the air flow control button. passenger compartment to further im- air conditioner automatically turns on if prove the defogging performance. The the outside temperature is more than 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to recirculation mode cannot be activated 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air the desired position. in the position. which helps defog the windshield. 4. Press the button. Bi-level heating The mode automatically turns off, The bi-level mode directs warmed air to allowing outside air to be drawn into the 5. Turn the temperature control dial to the side and center vents and to the front passenger compartment to further im- the desired position. prove the defogging performance. and rear floor outlets. ∙ For quick cooling when the outside 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- Operating tips temperature is high, press the tion. Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades button to the ON position. Be sure to and air inlet in front of the windshield. return the to the OFF position for 2. Press the air flow control button. This improves heater operation. normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION for quick cooling. the desired position. Start the engine, turn the fan speed Dehumidified heating 4. Turn the temperature control dial to control dial to the desired position, and This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the desired position. press the button to activate the air the air. Heating and defogging conditioner. When the air conditioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions are 1. Press the button to the OFF posi- This mode heats the interior and defogs tion. the windshield. added to the heater operation. The air conditioner cooling function op- 2. Press the air flow control button. 1. Press the air flow control button. erates only when the engine is running. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23 3. Turn the fan speed control dial to Operating tips AIR FLOW CHARTS the desired position. ∙ Keep the windows and moonroof The following charts show the button and dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK 4. Press the button. closed while the air conditioner is in operation. heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re- 5. Turn the temperature control dial to circulation button should always be in the desired position. ∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or the OFF position for heating and defrost- 3 minutes with the windows open to ing. Dehumidified defogging vent hot air from the passenger com- This mode is used to defog the windows partment. Then, close the windows. and dehumidify the air. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly. 1. Press the air flow control button. ∙ The air conditioning system should 2. Turn the fan speed control dial to be operated for approximately the desired position. 10 minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the ∙ When the or are selected, system due to lack of lubrication. the air conditioner automatically turns ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from on if the outside temperature is more the ventilators in hot, humid conditions than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not which helps defog the windshield. indicate a malfunction. The mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air to be drawn into the ∙ If the engine coolant temperature passenger compartment to further im- gauge indicates engine coolant tem- prove the defogging performance. perature over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional ∙ The air conditioner is always on in information, refer to “If your vehicle mode, regardless of whether the indica- overheats” in the “In case of emer- tor light is on or off. gency” section of this manual. 3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position. 4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4404 LHA4405 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25 LHA4504 LHA4505 4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems LHA4775 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27 HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)

8. Temperature control buttons (passenger’s side) 9. DUAL button 10. A/C (air conditioner) button 11. Fan speed control buttons 12. AUTO (automatic) button 13. ON-OFF button WARNING ∙ The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running. ∙ Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure them- selves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly LHA2518 fatal injuries to people or animals. 1. Temperature control buttons (driv- 4. Display screen ∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for er’s side) 5. MODE (manual air flow control) long periods as it may cause the inte- 2. Front defroster button button rior air to become stale and the win- 3. Rear window and outside 6. Fresh air intake button dows to fog up. mirror (if so equipped) defroster 7. Air recirculation button Start the engine and operate the controls switch to activate the air conditioner. 4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: ∙ The temperature of the passenger 2. Use the temperature control buttons compartment will be maintained auto- to set the desired temperature. ∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve- matically. Air flow distribution and fan hicle can build up in the air condi- ∙ The temperature of the passenger speed are also controlled automatically. tioner unit. Odor can enter the pas- compartment will be maintained auto- senger compartment through the ∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from matically. Air flow distribution and fan vents. the vents in hot, humid conditions as speed are also controlled automatically. the air is cooled rapidly. This does not ∙ When parking, set the heater and air ∙ Do not set the temperature lower than indicate a malfunction. conditioner controls to turn off air re- the outside air temperature or the sys- circulation to allow fresh air into the NOTE: tem may not work properly. passenger compartment. This should ∙ Not recommended if windows fog up. help reduce odors inside the vehicle. Fan speed may vary until the temperature of the passenger compartment is AUTOMATIC OPERATION Dehumidified defrosting or achieved. defogging Cooling and/or dehumidified 3. You can individually set driver’s and heating (AUTO) front passenger’s side temperature us- 1. Press the front defroster button. ing each set of temperature control 2. Use the temperature control buttons This mode may be used all year round as buttons. When the DUAL button or pas- the system automatically works to keep a to set the desired temperature. senger’s side temperature control but- constant temperature. Air flow distribution tons are pressed, the DUAL indicator ∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside and fan speed are also controlled auto- of the windows, use the fan speed con- matically. will come on. To turn off the passenger’s side temperature control, press trol dial to set the fan speed to maxi- 1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indica- the DUAL button. mum. tor on the button will illuminate and Heating (A/C OFF) ∙ As soon as possible after the wind- AUTO will be displayed.) shield is clean, press the AUTO button to 2. Use the temperature control buttons The air conditioner does not activate. When return to the automatic mode. to set the desired temperature. you need to heat only, use this mode. ∙ Adjust the temperature display to 1. Press the button (A/C indicator about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation. will turn off). Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29 ∙ When the front defroster button is Fresh air intake Air flow control pressed, the air conditioner will auto- Press the fresh air intake button to Pressing the MODE button manually con- matically be turned on at outside tem- draw outside air into the passenger com- trols air flow and selects the air outlet: peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir- partment. culate mode automatically turns off, — Air flows from center and side allowing outside air to be drawn into the Automatic intake air control vents. passenger compartment to further im- In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be — Air flows from center and side prove the defogging performance. controlled automatically. To manually con- vents and foot outlets. trol the intake air, press the air recir- — Air flows mainly from foot MANUAL OPERATION culation button. To return to the automatic outlets. Fan speed control control mode, press and hold the air — Air flows from defroster and recirculation button or press and hold foot outlets. Press the fan speed control buttons the fresh air intake button for about To turn system off to manually control the fan speed. 2 seconds. The indicator lights (both air re- Press the ON-OFF button. Press the AUTO button to return to auto- circulation and fresh air intake buttons) will matic control of the fan speed. flash twice and then the intake air will be Rear window and outside mirror Temperature control controlled automatically. (if so equipped) defroster switch Press the temperature control A/C (air conditioner) button For additional information, refer to “Rear buttons , to set the desired Start the engine, press the fan speed window and outside mirror (if so equipped) temperature. control buttons to the desired position and defroster switch” in the “Instruments and press the button to turn on the air controls” section of this manual. Air recirculation conditioner. To turn off the air conditioner, Press the air recirculation button to press the button again. recirculate interior air inside the vehicle. The air conditioner cooling function op- Press the AUTO button to return to auto- erates only when the engine is running. matic mode. The air recirculation cannot be activated when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode. 4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER (if so AUDIO SYSTEM equipped)

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN RADIO vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position and press the PUSH button to This refrigerant does not harm the turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio earth’s ozone layer. with the engine not running, the ignition Special charging equipment and lubricant switch should be placed in the ACC position. is required when servicing your NISSAN air Radio reception is affected by station sig- conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or nal strength, distance from radio transmit- lubricants will cause severe damage to ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other your air conditioner system. For additional external influences. Intermittent changes information, refer to “Air conditioner sys- in reception quality normally are caused by tem (if so equipped) refrigerant and oil rec- these external influences. ommendations” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle LHA4596 may influence radio reception quality. OPERATING TIPS It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your “environmentally Radio reception The sunload sensor, located on the top friendly” air conditioning system. passenger’s side of the instrument panel, Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en- helps the system maintain a constant WARNING temperature. Do not put anything on or hance radio reception. These circuits are around this sensor. The air conditioner system contains re- designed to extend reception range, and to frigerant under high pressure. To avoid enhance the quality of that reception. ∙ When the engine coolant temperature personal injury, any air conditioner ser- However, there are some general charac- and outside air temperature are low, the vice should be done only by an experi- air flow from the foot outlets may not teristics of both FM and AM radio signals enced technician with proper that can affect radio reception quality in a operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. equipment. However, this is not a malfunction. After moving vehicle, even when the finest the coolant temperature warms up, air equipment is used. These characteristics flow from the foot outlets will operate are completely normal in a given reception normally. area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31 Reception conditions will constantly Static and flutter: During signal interfer- Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical change because of vehicle movement. ence from buildings, large hills or due to power lines, electric signs and even traffic Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter- antenna position (usually in conjunction lights. ference from other vehicles can work with increased distance from the station against ideal reception. Described below transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS are some of the factors that can affect your This can be reduced by adjusting the treble MP3 or WMA terms radio reception. control to reduce treble response. ∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Some cellular phones or other devices may Multipath reception: Because of the reflec- Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the cause interference or a buzzing noise to tive characteristics of FM signals, direct and most well-known compressed digital come from the audio system speakers. reflected signals reach the receiver at the audio file format. This format allows for Storing the device in a different location same time. The signals may cancel each near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction may reduce or eliminate the noise. other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of the size of normal audio files. MP3 of sound. FM RADIO RECEPTION conversion of an audio track from CD- AM RADIO RECEPTION ROM can reduce the file size by approxi- Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per- 30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single AM signals, because of their low frequency, ceptible loss in quality. MP3 channel) FM having slightly more range can bend around objects and skip along compression removes the redundant than stereo FM. External influences may the ground. In addition, the signals can be and irrelevant parts of a sound signal sometimes interfere with FM station re- bounced off the ionosphere and bent back that the human ear doesn’t hear. ception even if the FM station is within 25 to earth. Because of these characteristics, mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is AM signals are also subject to interference ∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is directly related to the distance between as they travel from transmitter to receiver. a compressed audio format created by the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol- Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of WMA codec offers greater file compres- through freeway underpasses or in areas the same characteristics as light. For ex- sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor- ample, they will reflect off objects. with many tall buildings. It can also occur age of more digital audio tracks in the for several seconds during ionospheric tur- same amount of space when com- Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away bulence even in areas where no obstacles pared to MP3s at the same level of qual- from a station transmitter, the signals will exist. ity. tend to fade and/or drift. 4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number USB (Universal Serial Bus) This system cannot be used to format USB of bits per second used by a digital mu- Connection Port devices. To format a USB device, use a per- sic file. The size and quality of a com- sonal computer. pressed digital audio file is determined WARNING In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the by the bit rate used when encoding the front seats plays only sound without im- Do not connect, disconnect or operate file. ages for regulatory reasons, even when the the USB device while driving. Doing so vehicle is parked. ∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre- can be a distraction. If distracted you quency is the rate at which the samples could lose control of your vehicle and This system supports various USB of a signal are converted from analog to cause an accident or serious injury. memory devices, USB hard drives and digital (A/D conversion) per second. iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system. ∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of CAUTION the methods for writing data to media. ∙ Do not force the USB device into the ∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play Writing data once to the media is called USB port. Inserting the USB device correctly. tilted or up-side-down into the port a single session, and writing more than ∙ Some characters used in other lan- may damage the port. Make sure that once is called a multisession. guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may the USB device is connected correctly not appear properly in the display. Using ∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the into the USB port. part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file English language characters with a USB that contains information about the ∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so device is recommended. equipped) when pulling the USB de- digital music file such as song title, art- General notes for USB use: vice out of the port. This could dam- ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura- age the port and the cover. ∙ For additional information, refer to your tion, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed device manufacturer’s owner informa- on the Artist/song title line on the dis- ∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place tion regarding the proper use and care play. where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the of the device. * Windows® and Windows Media® are reg- port. istered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other coun- The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de- tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. vice. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33 Notes for iPod® use: ∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large ∙ An incorrect song title may appear video files while in the shuffle mode, the when the Play Mode is changed while iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- vehicle center display may momen- using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation). tered in the U.S. and other countries. tarily black out, but will soon recover. ∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same ∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may order as they appear on the iPod®. cause a checkmark to be displayed on iPod®* player and off (flickering). Always make sure ∙ Some characters used in other lan- ∙ The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may that the iPod® is connected properly. guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. ∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re- displayed properly on the vehicle center In this case, please manually reset the main in fast forward or rewind mode if it screen. We recommend using English iPod®. is connected during a seek operation. In or Spanish language characters with an this case, please manually reset the iPod®. ∙ If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation iPod®. ∙ Large video podcast files cause slow with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album ∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will responses in the iPod®. The vehicle cen- name or artist name to prevent the continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is ter display may momentarily black out, iPod® from resetting itself. disconnected during a seek operation. but it will soon recover. ∙ Be careful not to do the following, or the ∙ An incorrect song title may appear ∙ If the iPod® automatically selects large cable could be damaged and a loss of when the Play Mode is changed while video podcast files while in the shuffle function may occur: using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation). mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon ∙ Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in ∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same recover. (40 mm) radius maximum). order as they appear on an iPod®. ∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may ∙ Twist the cable excessively (more ∙ Large video files cause slow responses cause a checkmark to be displayed on than 180 degrees). in an iPod®. The vehicle center display and off (flickering). Always make sure may momentarily black out, but will that the iPod® is connected properly. ∙ Pull or drop the cable. soon recover. ∙ The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will ∙ Do not force the iPod® cable connec- continue to fast forward or rewind if it is tor into the device port. disconnected during a seek operation. 4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ Close the center console lid on the ∙ When not in use for extended periods of ∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped cable or connectors. time, store the cable in a clean, dust free under the following conditions: environment at room temperature and ∙ Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® ∙ Store objects with sharp edges in the without direct sun exposure. storage where the cable is stored. Hands-Free Phone System. ∙ Do not use the cable for any other pur- ∙ Checking the connection to the ∙ Spill liquids on the cable and connec- poses other than its intended use in the hands-free phone. tors. vehicle. ∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de- ∙ Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if *iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- vice in an area surrounded by metal or the cable and/or connectors are wet. It tered in the U.S. and other countries. may damage the iPod®. far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® Bluetooth® streaming audio module to prevent tone quality degra- ∙ If the cable and connectors are ex- dation and wireless connection disrup- posed to water, allow the cable and/or ∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may tion. connectors to dry completely before not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system. ∙ While an audio device is connected connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait through the Bluetooth® wireless con- 24 hours for it to dry). ∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless nection, the battery power of the device connection between a compatible ∙ If the connector is exposed to fluids may discharge quicker than usual. Bluetooth® audio device and the in- other than water, evaporative residue vehicle Bluetooth® module before using ∙ This system supports the Bluetooth® may cause a short between the con- the Bluetooth® audio. Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP). nector pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® ∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® BLUETOOTH® is a and a loss of function may occur. audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your trademark owned ∙ If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, audio device before using it with this by Bluetooth SIG, connectors cracked, contamination system. Inc. and licensed such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the con- to Panasonic. nectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35 For additional information, refer to “Audio operation precautions” regarding all operation precautions in this section. Audio main operation VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button Place the ignition switch in the ON position and press the PUSH (power) button while the system is off to call up the mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately before the system was turned off. To turn the system off, press the PUSH (power) button. Turn the VOL (volume) knob to adjust the volume. This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes. LHA4672 FM/AM RADIO 4. / (SEEK/TRACK) buttons 1. MENU button 5. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button 2. AUDIO button 3. Display screen

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MENU button

Press the MENU button to show the Menu screen. Touch the “Settings” key on the display, then touch the “Sound” key. Sound Settings Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers. Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Speed Sensitive Volume Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed. Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching “-”/“+” , “L”/”R”, or “R”/”F” keys. AUDIO button Push to display the audio screen. When this button is pushed while the audio screen is not displayed, the last audio source played will play.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37 5. Preset list ∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to scan To listen to a preset station, touch the and update the station list displayed on corresponding station from the preset the right side of the AM Menu screen. list. If displayed, touch the “<”or“>”keys (SEEK/TRACK) buttons to scroll the preset list. AM radio operation Press the or buttons to tune from low to high or high to low frequencies Press the MENU button and touch the and to stop at the next broadcasting sta- “AM” key or press the AUDIO button and tion. select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar 1 to 6 Station memory operations to bring up the AM display screen. Up to six stations can be registered in the If another audio source is playing when the preset list. “AM” key is pressed, the audio source play- LHA4708 ing will automatically be turned off and the 1. Select the AM radio band. AM/FM radio screen last radio station played will begin playing. 2. Tune to the station you wish to store. AM Menu 1. “AM Menu” / “FM Menu” key 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- Touch to display the radio menu screen. Touch the “AM Menu” key to display the AM bers in the preset list. Menu screen options: 2. “Direct Tune” (if so equipped) The information such as frequency will be Touch to manually enter a station. ∙ SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the displayed on the preset list. “AM Menu” key on the radio screen and To select and listen to the preset stations, 3. Audio source indicator then touch the “SCAN” key. The stations Indicates the currently selected audio push on the steering wheel briefly or will be tuned from low to high frequen- source. touch a preferred station on the preset list cies and stop at each broadcasting sta- on the radio screen. 4. Reception information display tion for several seconds. Touching the Reception information currently avail- “SCAN” key again during this period of able such as frequency, station name, several seconds will stop tuning and the etc. is displayed. radio will remain tuned to that station.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems FM radio operation ∙ Refresh: Touch the “Refresh” key to up- Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation date the station list displayed on the Press the MENU button and touch the right side of the FM Menu screen. Connecting auxiliary devices “FM” key or press the AUDIO button and select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar ∙ RDS Info: Radio station and song infor- Connect an AUX device into the AUX input jack located on the center console below to bring up the FM display screen. mation can be displayed on the FM dis- the heater and air conditioner controls. If another audio source is playing when the play screen. The AUX input jack accepts any standard “FM” key is pressed, the audio source play- (SEEK/TRACK) buttons ing will automatically be turned off and the analog audio input such as from a portable last radio station played will begin playing. cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or Press the or buttons to tune phone. The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown from low to high or high to low frequencies on the screen during FM stereo reception. Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in and to stop at the next broadcasting sta- the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, tion. the radio automatically changes from ste- plug is used, the audio output may not 1 to 12 Station memory operations function normally. reo to monaural reception. Up to 12 stations can be registered in the Activation and playing FM Menu preset list. Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX Touch the “FM” Menu key to display the FM 1. Select the FM radio band. cable to the AUX device and the AUX input Menu screen options: jack. Select AUX mode from the audio 2. Tune to the station you wish to store. ∙ SCAN: To scan tune the stations, touch source menu screen or by pressing the the “FM Menu” key on the radio screen 3. Touch and hold one of the preset num- Source button on the steering wheel. and then touch the “SCAN” key. The sta- bers in the preset list. tions will be tuned from low to high fre- The information such as frequency will be quencies and stop at each broadcast- displayed on the preset list. ing stations for several seconds. Touching the “SCAN” key again during To select and listen to the preset stations, this period of several seconds will stop push on the steering wheel briefly or tuning and the radio will remain tuned touch a preferred station on the preset list to that station. on the radio screen. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39 Additional features For additional information, refer to “iPod® player operation” in this section regarding the iPod® player available with this system. For additional information, refer to “USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port” in this section regarding the USB connection port available with this system. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming audio” in this section about the Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system. LHA4709 Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of LHA4294 AUX screen Labeling USB (Universal Serial Bus) ∙ Audio source indicator Additional Obligation of Labeling CONNECTION PORT Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing. This product is protected by certain intel- Connecting a device to the USB lectual property rights of Microsoft Connection Port ∙ “Volume Setting” keys Corporation and third parties. Use or distri- Touch one of the keys to select the bution of such technology outside of this WARNING sound output gain from Low, Medium product is prohibited without a license and High. from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so ∙ AUX from Launch Bar subsidiary and third parties. can be a distraction. If distracted you Touch to change from another source could lose control of your vehicle and to AUX. cause an accident or serious injury.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems CAUTION ∙ To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions. ∙ Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port. ∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could dam- LHA4711 LHA4710 age the port and the cover. USB connections screen USB screen ∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Press the MENU button and touch the 1. “USB Menu” key Pulling the cable may damage the port. “Connections” key or press the “Settings” Touch to switch to the USB Menu key and touch the “Connections” key to screen. For additional information, refer to your de- change USB settings. vice manufacturer’s owner information re- 2. Track information ∙ Auto Change Source garding the proper use and care of the device. Track information such as the song Touch “ON” or “OFF” to change the audio name, artist name and album name The USB port is located on the center con- source settings for USB memory de- are displayed. sole ᭺1 . Insert the USB device into the con- vices or an iPod® connected through a nection port. USB cable. 3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio When a compatible storage device is source. plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle’s audio system. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41 4. USB operation keys USB memory device player Fast-forwarding/rewinding Touch to control USB playback func- operation To rewind or fast-forward the track, push tions and hold the or buttons on the Activation and playing control panel or touch and hold the “ ” 5. Play time and progress bar Connecting the USB memory device into The play time of the track is displayed. the port will start playing the USB memory. or “ ” keys on the screen. The bar indicates the progress in play- Changing play mode ing a track. USB memory device can also be played by touching the “USB” key on the Menu screen Repeat mode USB operation keys or by touching USB on the Launch Bar. Touch the “ ” key on the USB screen to Touch to control USB playback functions. To pause playing the USB memory device change the repeat mode. Keys Description touch the “ ” key. To resume playing, The following modes are available: All: Repeat all Each time “ ”keyis touch the “ ”key. touched, the repeat mode Skipping tracks 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder changes. Touch to return to the begin- To skip the tracks, push the or 1 Track: Repeat track ning of the current track. Touch buttons on the control panel or touch the Random mode again to select the previous “ ”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat- track. Touch and hold to rewind edly until the preferred track is selected. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to the current track. change the random mode as follows: Touch to play the track. NOTE: No text displayed: Random off

Touch to pause the track. Depending on the condition, skipping to All: Repeat all the previous track may require pushing 1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder Touch to select the next track. the button or touching the key twice. Touch and hold to fast-forward Pushing the button or touching the key the track. once may only restart the current track from the beginning. Each time “ ”keyis touched, the random mode changes.

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USB menu CAUTION Touch the “USB Menu” key on the USB ∙ Do not force the USB device into the screen to display the USB Menu screen. USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB screen. may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list into the USB port. to select the folder. The sub- ∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so folder or track list will be equipped) when pulling the USB de- displayed. Select a sub-folder vice out of the port. This could dam- or track from the list. age the port and the cover. “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the ∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place USB screen. LHA4294 where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION port. Connecting iPod® For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information re- WARNING garding the proper use and care of the Do not connect, disconnect, or operate device. the USB device while driving. Doing so To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that can be a distraction. If distracted you the iPod® can be controlled with the audio could lose control of your vehicle and system controls and display screen, use cause an accident or serious injury. the USB connection port located on the center console ᭺1 . Connect the iPod®- specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports charging via a USB connection, its Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43 battery will be charged while connected to ∙ iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware the vehicle with the ignition switch in the version 5.1 or later) ON position. ∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® version 1.3.1 or later) can only be operated by the vehicle audio ∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware controls. version 1.1.3 or later) To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, ∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware remove the USB end of the cable from the version 1.1.3 or later) USB connection port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®. ∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later) * iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis- ∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware tered in the U.S. and other countries. version 1.0.2 or later) Compatibility LHA4724 ∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware iPod screen The following models are compatible: version 1.1 or later) 1. “iPod Menu” key ∙ iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware ∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later) Touch to switch to the iPod Menu version 1.3.0 or later) screen. ∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or ∙ iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware later) 2. Track information version 2.0.1 or later) Track information such as the song ∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later) ∙ iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware name, artist name and album name version 2.0.4 or later) ∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later) are displayed. ∙ iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware * Some features of this iPod® may not be 3. Audio source indicator version 4.2.1 or later)* fully functional. Indicates the currently selected audio source. ∙ iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up- version 5.1 or later) dated to the version indicated above.

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. Album artwork Keys Description NOTE: An image of the album artwork is dis- Touch to select the next track. Depending on the condition, skipping to played when available if the setting is Touch and hold to fast-forward the previous track may require pushing turned on. the track. the button or touching the key twice. 5. iPod® operation keys Each time “ ”keyis Pushing the button or touching the key Touch to control iPod® playback func- touched, the random mode once may only restart the current track tions changes. from the beginning. 6. Play time and progress bar iPod® memory device player Fast-forwarding/rewinding The play time of the track is displayed. To rewind or fast-forward the track, push operation The bar indicates the progress in play- and hold the or buttons on the ing a track. Activation and playing control panel or touch and hold the “ ” iPod® operation keys Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB or “ ” keys on the screen, Touch to control iPod® playback functions. cable will activate the iPod® mode. Changing play mode Repeat mode Keys Description The iPod® can also be played by touching the “iPod” key on the Menu screen or by Touch the “ ” key on the iPod® screen Each time “ ”keyis touching iPod on the Launch Bar. touched, the repeat mode to change the repeat mode. The following changes. Skipping tracks modes are available. Touch to return to the begin- No text displayed: Repeat off ning of the current track. Touch To skip the tracks, push the or All: Repeat all again to select the previous buttons on the control panel or touch the track. Touch and hold to rewind One: Repeat track the current track. “ ”or“ ” keys on the screen repeat- Touch to play the track. edly until the preferred track is selected. Random mode Touch the “ ” key on the screen to Touch to pause the track. change the random mode as follows. “ ” is not highlighted: Random off “ ” highlighted: Random on Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45 iPod® Menu BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO Touch the “iPod Menu” key on the iPod® If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio screen to display the iPod® Menu screen. device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehi- “Now Playing” key Touch to display the USB cle’s audio system so that the audio files on screen. the device play through the vehicle’s “Folder List” key Touch to display the folder speakers. For additional information, refer (if so equipped) list. Touch an item on the list to “FM/AM radio” in this section. to select the folder. The sub- folder or track list will be NOTE: displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list. For additional information, refer to the “Album Artwork” Touch to run on/off the al- cellular phone Owner’s Manual. key bum artwork display on the USB screen. LHA4726 “Playlists” key Touch to display the list ac- “Artists” key cording to the selected item. Connecting procedure “Albums” key NOTE: “Songs” key “Podcasts” key The connecting procedure must be per- “Genres” key formed when the vehicle is stationary. If “Composers” key the vehicle starts moving during the pro- “Audiobooks” key cedure, the procedure will be canceled. “iTunes Radio” key

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add Hands-Free Phone System: New” key to connect a phone. Manual Connecting Procedure 4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the 1. Press the MENU button on the screen. control panel. 5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the screen. connection. Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

Automatic Connecting Procedure If no phone is connected to the system, press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the system will announce “transferring to the add phone settings menu”. The system will start the pairing procedure. When a compatible phone is found, a message with a PIN appears on the screen. Operate the Bluetooth® phone to complete the connection process. For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47 4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys Bluetooth® audio operation Touch to control Bluetooth® audio The ability to pause, change tracks, fast playback functions forward, rewind, randomize and repeat 5. Play time and progress bar music may be different between devices. The play time of the track is displayed. Some or all of these functions may not be The bar indicates the progress in play- supported on each device. ing a track. NOTE: Bluetooth® operation keys Depending on the Bluetooth® audio de- Touch to control Bluetooth® playback vice that is connected, it may not be pos- functions. sible to perform audio operations or a Keys Description delay may occur before music is played back. LHA4727 Each time “ ” key is touched, Activation and playing Bluetooth® screen the repeat mode changes. Touch to return to the beginning A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by of the current track. Touch again 1. “BT Menu” key touching the “Bluetooth” key on the Menu Depending on the Bluetooth® version to select the previous track. Touch and hold to rewind the current screen or by touching Bluetooth on the supported by the connected device, ei- track. Launch Bar. ther the “BT Menu” key or “Connections” Touch to play the track. key is displayed. To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio, touch the “ ” key. Touch the “ ”key 2. Track information Touch to pause the track. to resume playing. Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name Touch to select the next track. Changing folders Touch and hold to fast-forward are displayed. the track. To change folders, touch the “BT Menu” key. 3. Audio source indicator Each time “ ” key is touched, Indicates the currently selected audio the random mode changes. source. 4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Fast-forwarding/rewinding BT Menu To fast-forward or rewind the track, push Touch the “BT Menu” key on the Bluetooth® audio screen to display the Bluetooth® au- and hold the or buttons on the dio menu screen. control panel or touch the “ ”or“ ” keys on the screen. The following items are available. Changing play mode “Now Playing” key Touch to display the Repeat mode Bluetooth® audio screen. “Current List” key (if so A list of track in the cur- Touch the “ ” key on the screen to equipped)* rently selected folder is change the repeat mode. displayed. Random mode “Connections” key Touch to display the connections screen. Touch the “ ” key on the screen to “Folder List” key* Touch to display the change the random mode. folder list. Touch an item LHA2498 on the list to select the Type A (if so equipped) NOTE: folder. STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR Available repeat/random modes change *: displayed only when available. AUDIO CONTROL depending on the connected device. NOTE: The audio system can be operated using the controls on the steering wheel. Depending on the connected device, the “BT Menu” key may not be displayed. 1. Tuning switch/ENTER button (if so equipped) 2. SOURCE switch 3. Volume control switch

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49 SOURCE switch iPod®: Push the SOURCE switch to change the ∙ Push the switch for less than mode in the following sequence: 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number. AM → FM → USB/iPod®*→ Bluetooth® Au- USB: dio* → AUX* → AM. * These modes are only available when ∙ Push the switch for less than compatible media storage is inserted into 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the the device or connected to the system. track number. Volume control switch ∙ Push the switch for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward Push the volume control switch up or down the current song. to increase or decrease the volume. Bluetooth® Audio: LHA4781 Tuning switch Type B (if so equipped) ∙ Push the switch for less than For most audio sources, pushing the tun- 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the ing switches for more than 1.5 seconds next song. provides a different function than pressing for less than 1.5 seconds. ∙ Push the switch for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward AM and FM: the current song. ∙ Push the switch for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station. ∙ Push the switch for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station.

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

ANTENNA Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant REQUIREMENTS can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes The antenna pattern is printed inside the Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or rear window. mode to reduce user distraction. In this later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac- are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free CAUTION tion by voice control. After connecting a system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility. ∙ Do not place metalized film near the compatible Apple device by using rear window glass or attach any metal Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please parts to it. This may cause poor recep- from the button on the steering check phone settings. tion or noise. wheel. If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered ∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear accessible from the lock screen. Please in the U.S. and other countries. window, be careful not to scratch or check phone settings. damage the rear window antenna. ∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as For best results, always update your device Lightly wipe along the antenna with a displaying pictures or opening apps, to the latest software version. dampened soft cloth. may not be available while driving. ∙ For getting best results, always update your device to the latest software version. ∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly. ∙ For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple website.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51 NOTE: For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®. Example2–Replying to text messages 1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming text messages. 2. After reading the message, push or LHA4747 LHA4938 push and hold the button to reply Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) using Siri Eyes Free. OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE 2. Say “Play (artist name, song name, etc.)”. 3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes- 1. Push button for more than sage” or a similar command to reply 1.5 seconds. 3. Your vehicle will automatically change using Siri Eyes Free. to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* 2. Speak your command and then listen when the music starts playing. Mode to the Siri® Eyes Free reply. selection is determined by the phone. After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the * If the iPhone® is also connected with the button again within 5 seconds of the end of USB cable. the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the session. If the audio track does not start playing Example 1 – Playing music automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the track or audio source to re- 1. Push button for more than sume playback. 1.5 seconds. 4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure Cannot access Siri Eyes Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system. Freefromswitchonthe Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting. steering wheel Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone. For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party Audio Source does not music apps may vary. change automatically to For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade iPod® or Bluetooth® Au- performance. dio mode Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel. Play, pause, next track, For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party previous track or play music apps may vary and is controlled by the device. timer does not work Cannot hear any music/ Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode. audio being played back from a connected iPhone® Cannot receive text mes- Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”. sage notifications on the Press the INFO button. Turn on “Show Notifications”. vehicle audio system Cannot reply to text After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push the button for more than 1.5 seconds on the steer- message notifications by ing wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”. Siri Eyes Free

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53 CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

When installing a CB, ham radio or car CAUTION WARNING phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the ∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos- ∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve- new equipment may adversely affect the sible from the electronic control hicle in a safe location. If you have to engine control system and other electronic modules. use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full at- parts. ∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in tention may be given to vehicle (20 cm) away from the electronic con- operation. WARNING trol system harnesses. Do not route ∙ A cellular phone should not be used the antenna wire next to any harness. ∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking for any purpose while driving so full ∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave on the phone, pull off the road to a attention may be given to vehicle op- ratio as recommended by the safe location and stop your vehicle. eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit manufacturer. the use of cellular phones while ∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB driving. CAUTION radio chassis to the body. ∙ If you must make a call while your ve- To avoid discharging the vehicle bat- ∙ For additional information, it is rec- hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu- tery, use a phone after starting the ommended that you visit a NISSAN lar phone operational mode (if so engine. dealer for this service. equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. ∙ If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.

NOTE: Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatic ally to the system, consult the phone’s Owner’s Manual for details on device operation. You can connect up to six different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in- vehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time. Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes. ∙ Set up the wireless connection be- LHA4937 tween a compatible cellular phone and Your NISSAN is equipped with the make or receive a hands-free telephone the in-vehicle phone module before us- Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If call with your cellular phone in the vehicle. ing the hands-free phone system. you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless Once your cellular phone is connected to connection between your cellular phone the in-vehicle phone module, no other and the in-vehicle phone module. With phone connecting procedure is required. Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can Your phone is automatically connected Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55 ∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones ∙ While a cellular phone is connected 1. This device may not cause interference may not be recognized or work properly. through the Bluetooth® wireless con- and Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth nection, the battery power of the cellu- 2. this device must accept any interfer- or www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom- lar phone may discharge quicker than ence, including interference that may mended phone list and connecting in- usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free cause undesired operation of the de- structions. Phone System cannot charge cellular vice. phones. ∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free IC Regulatory information phone under the following conditions: ∙ Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing – Operation is subject to the following two – Your vehicle is outside of the cellular noise to come from the audio system conditions: (1) this device may not cause service area. interference, and (2) this device must ac- speakers. Storing the device in a differ- cept any interference, including interfer- – Your vehicle is in an area where it is ent location may reduce or eliminate ence that may cause undesired opera- difficult to receive a cellular signal; the noise. tion of the device. such as in a tunnel, in an under- ∙ For additional information, refer to the ground parking garage, near a tall – This Class B digital apparatus meets all cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard- building or in a mountainous area. requirements of the Canadian ing the telephone charges, cellular Interference-Causing Equipment Regu- – Your cellular phone is locked to pre- phone antenna and body, etc. lations. vent it from being dialed. REGULATORY INFORMATION BLUETOOTH® is a ∙ When the radio wave condition is not FCC Regulatory information ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it trademark owned may be difficult to hear the other per- – CAUTION: To maintain compliance with by Bluetooth SIG, son’s voice during a call. FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only Inc. and licensed the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an- ∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an tenna, modification, or attachments to Panasonic. area surrounded by metal or far away could damage the transmitter and may from the in-vehicle phone module to violate FCC regulations. prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption. – Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems USING THE SYSTEM ∙ Wait until the tone sounds before ∙ If you want to go back to the previous speaking a command. Otherwise, the command, you can say “Go back” or The system allows hands-free operation of command will not be received properly. “Correction” any time the system is the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. waiting for a response. ∙ Start speaking a command within If the vehicle is in motion, some commands 5 seconds after the tone sounds. ∙ You can cancel a command when the may not be available so full attention may system is waiting for a response by say- be given to vehicle operation. ∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus- ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an- ing between words. nounces “Exit” and ends the Voice Rec- Initialization ∙ For calling contacts by name, please ognition session. You can also press When the ignition switch is placed in the ON say both the first and last name of the and hold the button on the steer- position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial- contact for better recognition. ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to end the Voice Recognition session. ized, which takes a few seconds. If the Whenever the Voice Recognition ses- button is pressed before the initialization Giving voice commands sion is canceled, a double beep is completes, the system will announce To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, played to indicate you have exited the “There is no phone connected” and will not press the button located on the system. react to voice commands. steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. ∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the After the tone sounds, speak a command. Operating tips voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume To get the best performance out of the The command given is picked up by the control switches on the steering wheel NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe microphone, and voice feedback is given while being provided with feedback. You the following: when the command is accepted. can also use the radio volume control knob. ∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet ∙ If a command is not recognized, the as possible. Keep all vents pointed away system announces, “Please say or se- from the microphone and close the lect a command from the displayed list.” windows to eliminate surrounding Make sure the command is said exactly noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, as prompted by the system and repeat etc.), which may prevent the system the command in a clear voice. from recognizing voice commands correctly. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57 Voice Prompt Interrupt Indicator Description In most cases you can interrupt the voice Indicates there are feedback to speak the next command by unread received pressing the button on the steering messages. wheel. After interrupting the system, wait Indicates the for a beep before speaking your command. Bluetooth® device that is currently connected. Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth® device is receiving. Indicates the amount of remain- LHA4723 ing Bluetooth® device battery. INDICATORS When a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, indicators ᭺1 for the phone and text messaging are displayed on the top of the screen.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems You can use the button to interrupt the system feedback and give a command at once.

If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® can be accessed by pressing the button for less than two seconds. For additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes Free” in this section. LHA4747 LHA4938 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) PHONE BUTTON CONTROL BUTTONS VOICE COMMAND BUTTON To answer an incoming call or to end a call press The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Press and hold the but- Hands-Free Phone System are located on ton for more than 1.5 seconds the button. the steering wheel. to initiate the Voice Recogni- To reject a call press and hold tion session. To exit the Voice Recognition session press the button. and hold the for more than 1.5 seconds. For additional information, refer to “Voice prompt interrupt” in this section.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59 To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® 5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the Hands-Free Phone System: connection. Manual Connecting Procedure 6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu touch the “ ” key on the Con- 1. Press the MENU button on the nections screen. The following options control panel. are available: 2. Touch the “Connections” key on the screen. 3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the “Add New” key to connect a phone. 4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the LHA4726 screen. CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE: The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled. Menu Item Result Bluetooth Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. ON Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the “ON” key again. The indicator light will go off. Favorite (Connection first) Allows user to toggle “Phone” and “Audio” favorite settings on and off. PIN Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems NOTE: VOICE COMMANDS “Call ” Some cellular phones may require you to Voice commands can be used to operate the Speak this command to make a call to a con- accept certain permissions in order to Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. Press tact that is stored in the phonebook. Say “Call” enable features on your Bluetooth® sys- and hold the button for less than followed by a phonebook name to initiate a tem. During the Bluetooth® pairing pro- 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone command call. If the system does not recognize the cess, please check your cellular phone’s menu. The commands available are: name it will display a list of similar names. After display for a pop-up with the request to ∙ Call the prompt, speak or touch an item number from the displayed list to place the call. grant phonebook access. ∙ Dial Granting phonebook access permission “Dial ” will allow your contacts to be down- ∙ Recent Calls loaded to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® sys- ∙ Read/Send Text (if so equipped) Speak this command to make a call with a tem. A pop-up may display on your cellu- spoken phone number. After the prompt, lar phone stating that the Bluetooth® ∙ Siri® (if so equipped) say “Dial” followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone system would like to access your con- ∙ Voice Assistant (if so equipped) number. The system will repeat the num- tacts and call history. Please select “Al- ber back. Say “Dial” to initiate the call or low” or Yes” to grant this permission. ∙ Phonebook “Correction” to re-enter the phone number. Automatic Connecting Procedure ∙ Quick Dial “Recent Calls” If no phone is connected to the system, ∙ Redial The following commands are available un- press and hold the button on the ∙ Select Phone der “Recent Calls”: steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds. After the prompt, speak “Add Phone”, the ∙ Add Phone ∙ Incoming Calls system will announce “transferring to the ∙ Call Mobile Speak this command to list the last 20 in- add phone settings menu”. The system will coming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from start the pairing procedure. When a com- ∙ Call Home an entry in the phonebook, the name will patible phone is found, a message with a ∙ Call Office be displayed. Otherwise, the phone num- PIN appears on the screen. Operate the ber of the incoming call will be displayed. Bluetooth® phone to complete the con- ∙ Call Main When prompted, speak or touch the item nection process. For additional informa- number on the screen to place the call. ∙ Call Other tion, refer to “Bluetooth® connections Select the “Next” key to move through the screen” in this section. ∙ Settings list of incoming calls. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61 ∙ Outgoing Calls “Phonebook through voice “Redial” Speak this command to list the last 20 command” outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the Speak this command to call the last num- call was to an entry in the phonebook, Speak “Phonebook” to view a list of quick ber dialed. After the prompt, say “Redial” to the name will be displayed. Otherwise, steps to access entries stored in the dial the number of the last outgoing call. the phone number of the outgoing call phonebook. Commands are organized by The system will display “Redialing will be displayed. the phone number type selected in the cel- ”. The name of the When prompted, speak or touch the lular device. For additional information, re- phonebook entry will be displayed if it is item number on the screen to place the fer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. available, otherwise the number being re- dialed will be displayed. call. Select the “Next” key to move The following commands are available: through the list of outgoing calls. “Select Phone” ∙ ∙ Missed Calls Speak this command to access the Con- ∙ Main Speak this command to list the last 20 nections menu. For additional information, missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is ∙ Home refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in from an entry in the phonebook, the this section. name will be displayed. Otherwise, the ∙ Mobile phone number of the missed call will be ∙ Office “Add Phone” displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the ∙ Other Speak this command to access the Con- nections menu. For additional information, item number on the screen to place the For additional information on manually se- call. Select the “Next” key to move refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in lecting phonebook entries, refer to “Making this section. through the list of missed calls. a call” in this section. “Settings” “Read Text/Send Text” (if so “Quick dial” equipped) Speak this command to access the Sys- Speak this command to access the Quick tem Voice settings menu. The system will Speak this command to access text mes- dial menu. After the prompt, speak or se- exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of saging functions. For additional informa- lect an item number on the displayed list to the following options on the screen to tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec- place the call. For additional information, change the settings. tion. refer to “Making a call” in this section. 4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems ∙ Beep Only for Opening Prompt ∙ Call History By touching the “ON” key, the indicator Displays the Call History screen. For ad- light will illuminate, the system voice will ditional information, refer to “Making a turn off and only a tone will sound when call” in this section. the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys- ∙ Dial Number tem is activated. To turn the system Displays the Dial Number screen. For voice back on, touch the “ON” key again, additional information, refer to “Making the indicator light will turn off. a call” in this section. ∙ Best Match List ∙ Text Message When the system doesn’t recognize a Displays the received message screen. phonebook name or dial number, it will For additional information, refer to “Text provide a list of similar sounding results. messaging” in this section. To turn this off, touch the “ON” key, the indicator light will turn off. To turn on, ∙ Connections touch the “ON” key again, the indicator LHA4705 Displays the Connections screen. For light will turn on. PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® connections screen” in this The Phone screen can be displayed by section. pressing the button on the control ∙ Volume panel. Displays the volume adjustment The following options are displayed: screen. For additional information, refer ∙ Quick Dial to “Volume & beeps” in this section. Displays the Quick Dial screen. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section. ∙ Phonebook Displays the Phonebook screen. For additional information, refer to “Making a call” in this section. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63 MAKING A CALL ∙ Dial Number ∙ Touch the “Copy from Phonebook” key Enter the phone number manually us- to save a number from the phonebook. To make a call press the button on ing the keypad displayed on the screen. Use the scroll keys on the side to move the control panel. Touch an option from Press the “OK” key on the screen to initi- up and down through the menu. Select menu screen: ate the call. a person to be added. A menu will dis- ∙ Phonebook For additional options to make a call, refer play the Entry #, phone number, phone Select a person and the phone number to “Voice commands” in this section. number type stored in the cellular you wish to call from the phonebook. phone and Voice Tag. Select the “OK” Depending on the device, the phone- Quick Dial key. book will be downloaded from the cel- Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly Voice tag lular phone automatically when it is make a call. The system allows up to 20 connected. If the automatic download A voice tag can be recorded for each of the entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial does not take place, the phone number registered Quick Dial numbers and can be must be transferred to the hands-free press the button on the control used to dial the number by speaking it. On phone system from the cellular phone panel. Touch the “Quick Dial” key to display a the Quick Dial registration screen, touch prior to using this method. For addi- list of quick dial entries. Touch the “Edit” key the “Voice Tag” key. Select a relationship tional information, refer to “Phone and to edit current entries or touch the “Add from the list or create a new voice tag. To text message settings” in this section. New” key to make a new entry. Two meth- record a new voice tag touch the “Custom- ods are given to create a quick dial entry: ize” key on the screen then touch the “Store” ∙ Call History key. Speak a name after the prompt, the Select a phonebook name or phone ∙ Touch the “Copy from Call History” key new tag will be stored. To edit or create a number from the recent incoming, out- to save a phone number from the In- new voice tag select the “Customize” key going or missed calls tabs. Touch a coming, Outgoing or Missed call history again. Touch the “Play” key to play the re- phonebook name or phone number lists. Select the person or phone num- corded voice tag, touch the “Restore” key to listed to initiate the call. ber from the menu to be added. A reg- edit the voice tag or “Delete” to delete the istration menu will display the Entry #, current voice tag. phone number, phone number type stored in the cellular phone and Voice Tag. Select the “OK” key.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems RECEIVING A CALL ∙ Use Handset ∙ “Switch call” Touch this key to transfer the call to the Speak this command to hold the sec- When a call is received by the phone con- handset. To transfer the call back from ond call and switch back to the original nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands- the handset to the Bluetooth® Hands- call. Free Phone System, the call information is Free Phone System, press the but- displayed on the control panel display. ton on the control panel then select the ENDING A CALL Press the button on the steering “Transfer Hands-free” key on the screen. To end an active call, press the button wheel or touch the “ Answer” key on ∙ Switch Call on the steering wheel or touch the the screen to accept the call. To reject the This option will only be available when a “ Hang up” key on the screen. call touch the “ Decline” key on the second call is active. TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped) screen. If supported by the phone, the If the user is not able to answer the call Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System WARNING right away, touch the “Hold Call” key dis- allows for call waiting functionality. If a played on the screen. A message will be call is received while another call is al- ∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re- played for the caller: “I’m not able to take a ready active, a message will be dis- strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”. call right now.” The user may then accept Check local regulations before using played on the screen. Press the the call when available or reject the call. this feature. button on the steering wheel or touch To reject a call, press and hold the the “ Answer” key on screen to ac- ∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re- button on the steering wheel. cept the incoming call. Touch the strict the use of some of the applica- “ Decline” key on the screen to re- tions and features, such as social net- DURING A CALL ject the second call. working and texting. Check local While a call is active the following options regulations for any requirements. While a call is active, press the button will appear on the control panel display: on the steering wheel to access additional ∙ Use the text messaging feature after ∙ Mute options. Speak one of the following com- stopping your vehicle in a safe loca- Touch this key to mute or unmute the mands: tion. If you have to use the feature system. while driving, exercise extreme cau- ∙ “Send Digits” tion at all times so full attention may ∙ Dial Number Speak this command followed by the be given to vehicle operation. Touch this key to dial digits during the digits to enter digits during the phone phone call. call. Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65 ∙ If you are unable to devote full atten- NOTE: “Read” key. Touch the “Ignore” key to save the message to be checked later. tion to vehicle operation while using Many phones may require special per- the text messaging feature, pull off mission to enable text messaging. Check Access text messaging through the ve- the road to a safe location and stop the phone’s screen during Bluetooth® hicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or your vehicle. pairing. For some phones, you may need through the vehicles control panel. to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s NOTE: Text messaging using Bluetooth® Bluetooth® menu for text messages to Hands-Free Phone System (if so This feature is automatically disabled if appear on the head unit. For additional the connected device does not support information, refer to your phone’s own- equipped) the Message Access Profile (MAP). For er’s manual. Text message integration Sending a text message (if so equipped) additional information, refer to the requires that the phone support MAP phone’s owner’s manual for details and (Message Access Profile) for both receiv- 1. Press and hold the button on the instructions. ing and sending text messages. Some steering wheel for less than 1.5 sec- phones may not support all text mes- onds. saging features. Please refer to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or 2. Say “Send Text” after the tone. www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat- 3. The system will provide a list of avail- ibility information, as well as your de- able commands in order to determine vice’s owner’s manual. the recipient of the text message. The system allows for the sending and re- Choose from the following: ceiving of text messages through the ve- ∙ Phonebook hicle interface. The availability of the text message func- ∙ Quick Dial tion may vary depending on the cellular ∙ Incoming Calls phone. ∙ Outgoing Calls When the cellular phone connected to the vehicle receives a text message, a notifica- ∙ Missed Calls tion will appear on the control panel dis- ∙ Dial play. To check the message, touch the 4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system the button on the steering wheel and NOTE: prompts for which message to send. speak the number item list on the screen. Text messages are only displayed if the Nine predefined messages are avail- The following options will be available: vehicle speed is less than 5 mph able. To choose one of the predefined (8 km/h). messages, speak one of the following ∙ Play Speak this command to have the sys- after the tone: NOTE: tem say the message. ∙ “Driving, can’t text” For Apple iPhones®, text messages can ∙ Reply only be sent through Siri. ∙ “Call me” Speak this command to send a text ∙ “On my way” message response to the sender of the Text messaging using the control text message. panel ∙ “Running late” ∙ Call Display received message list ∙ “Okay” Speak this command to call the sender. 1. Press the button on the control ∙ “Yes” ∙ Previous panel. ∙ “No” Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available). 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the ∙ “Where are you?” screen ∙Next ∙ “When?” Speak this command to move to the 3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply to the message. next text message (if available). Reading a received text message Up to 100 messages can be stored in the Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) message list. 1. Press and hold the button on the steering wheel for less than 1.5 sec- If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, onds. it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For 2. Say “Read Text” after the tone. additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes The display will show a list of 20 messages Free” in this section. with the sender and delivery time. Touch the “Next” key on the screen to view all messages. To view a text message press Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67 Received message screen ∙ Play/Stop Sending a text message (if so equipped) Touch the “Play” key to have the hands- Touching the “Read” key on the incoming This function may not be supported de- free phone system read out the re- message notification screen or selecting a pending on the cellular phone. ceived message. Touch the “Stop” key to message from the message list will show stop reading. the details of the received message on the 1. Press the button on the control display. ∙ Call panel. If the sender of the message is regis- Available actions: 2. Touch the “Text Message” key on the tered in the phonebook, touch the “Call” screen. ∙Prev. key to make a call to the sender. Touch this key to read the previous 3. Touch the “Create Message” key on the ∙ Reply message. screen. A reply message can be selected from ∙Next the predefined list. Touch this key to read the next message. The following items are available:

Available item Action To Enter Number by Keypad Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm. Quick Dial Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Phonebook Select a recipient from the phonebook. Call History Select a recipient/phone number from call history. Select Text Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Send Touch to send the message.

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems Access the Connections screen to change Connecting Bluetooth® settings and view Bluetooth® information. For additional information on connecting a To access the Connections screen press cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® the MENU button on the control Hands-Free Phone System, refer to “Con- panel. Touch the “Connections” key on the necting procedure” in this section. screen then select the Bluetooth tab. The paired phone will be added to the list NOTE: on the Bluetooth® connections screen. Some cellular phones or other devices Touching the name of another device on may cause interference or a buzzing the list will switch the connected device. noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a differ- “ ” (back) key ent location may reduce or eliminate the Touch the “ ” key to go back to the noise. LHA4716 previous screen. Bluetooth tab BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS This tab will display up to six Bluetooth® SCREEN devices. If six devices are already con- 1. “ ” (back) key nected, one of the devices must be deleted 2. Bluetooth tab before another device can be connected. 3. Connections screen “Add New” key 4. “Add New” key 5. “ ” (settings) key Touch the this key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For addi- 6. “ ” (info) key tional information, refer to “Connecting 7. “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio connec- procedure” in this section., tion) key 8. “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System connection) key

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69 “ ” (Bluetooth® settings) key “ ” (info) key “ ” (Bluetooth® Audio Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis- Touch the “ ” key on the screen to dis- connection) key play a list of options. play the information of the cellular phone A list of connected devices will be displayed or to delete the device. ∙ Bluetooth on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth® Touch the “Delete” key to remove a paired the name to connect a device to connection on or off device then select “Yes” when a message Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a appears. favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Se- ∙ Favorite (Connection first) “ ” (Bluetooth® Hands-Free lect the key again to disconnect the device. Touch this key to change which device The device will not be removed from the will be connected first when multiple Phone System connection) list. For additional information on removing devices are connected to the vehicle. key a device, refer to “ (info) key” in this Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the section. device a favorite connection. A list of connected devices will be displayed Turn the “ ” key on or off to make the on the screen. Touch the “ ” key next to device a favorite connection. the name to connect a device to the Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is ∙ Pin listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the Touch this key to customize the PIN icon. Select the key again to disconnect the code. Input a four digit number then device. The device will not be removed touch the “OK” key. The new PIN will be from the list. For additional information on set. removing a device, refer to “ (info) key” in this section.

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user’s preference. To access the “Phone” settings menu press the MENU button on the control panel. Touch the “Settings” key then select the “Phone” key.

LHA4721 The following options are available: Menu Item Result Quick Dial Edit Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to “Quick dial” in this section. Delete All Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. Phonebook Download Entire Phone- All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle book are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone’s owner’s manual. Auto Downloaded Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Text Message Text Message Turns the text messaging function on/off. Text Message Ringtone Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Signature Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Auto Reply Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Auto Reply Text Message Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages. Notifications Driver Only When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Vehicle Ringtone Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off. Automatic Hold When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71 Volume & beeps Volume Settings The Volume settings screen can be found There are several methods to customize by pressing the button on the control the volume settings. panel then touching the “Volume” key on Volume & Beeps the screen. To adjust the volume of the The Volume & Beeps screen can be found following options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the screen. by pressing the MENU button on the The available settings are: control panel, touching the “Settings” key on the screen and selecting “Volume & ∙ Ringtone Beeps”. To adjust the volume of the follow- Adjust the volume level of the ringtone ing options, touch the “–” and “+” keys on the of incoming calls. screen. ∙ Outgoing Call The available settings are: Adjust the volume level of the outgoing ∙ Ringtone calls. Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls. ∙ Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls. ∙ Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice. ∙ Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging. ∙ Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations. 4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73 5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ...... 5-2 Starting the engine (models without NISSAN Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...... 5-2 Intelligent Key® system) ...... 5-14 Three-way catalyst ...... 5-2 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Tire Pressure Monitoring System Intelligent Key® system) ...... 5-16 (TPMS)...... 5-3 Driving the vehicle ...... 5-17 Avoiding collision and rollover ...... 5-7 Continuously Variable Transmission Off-roadrecovery...... 5-7 (CVT) (if so equipped) ...... 5-17 Rapid air pressure loss ...... 5-7 Manual transmission (if so equipped) ...... 5-23 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...... 5-8 Parking brake ...... 5-25 Ignition switch (if so equipped)...... 5-9 SPORT mode switch (if so equipped)...... 5-26 Continuously Variable Transmission ECO mode switch (if so equipped) ...... 5-26 (if so equipped) ...... 5-9 Shift lever indicator (MRA8DE engine Manual transmission (M/T) Manual Transmission models only) ...... 5-27 (if so equipped) ...... 5-10 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped)...... 5-27 Ignition switch positions...... 5-10 BSW system operation ...... 5-29 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-10 How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-30 Push-button ignition switch (if so equipped) .....5-11 BSW system limitations...... 5-31 Operating range...... 5-12 BSW driving situations ...... 5-32 Push-button ignition switch positions ...... 5-12 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-35 Emergency engine shut off ...... 5-13 System maintenance...... 5-36 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-37 discharge ...... 5-13 RCTA system operation...... 5-38 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ...... 5-14 How to enable/disable the RCTA Before starting the engine...... 5-14 system ...... 5-40 RCTA system limitations...... 5-41 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-68 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-43 Increasing fuel economy ...... 5-70 System maintenance...... 5-44 Parking/parking on hills ...... 5-70 Cruise control (if so equipped) ...... 5-45 Power steering ...... 5-71 Precautions on cruise control...... 5-45 Brake system...... 5-72 Cruise control operations...... 5-46 Brake precautions ...... 5-72 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-47 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-73 ICC system operation ...... 5-48 Brake Assist ...... 5-74 The ICC switch ...... 5-50 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ...... 5-74 ICC system limitations...... 5-56 Rise-up and build-up ...... 5-76 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-59 Brake force distribution...... 5-76 System maintenance...... 5-61 Cold weather driving ...... 5-77 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so equipped) ...... 5-62 Freeing a frozen door lock ...... 5-77 AEB system operation ...... 5-63 Antifreeze ...... 5-77 Turning the AEB system on/off ...... 5-65 Battery...... 5-77 AEB system limitations ...... 5-65 Draining of coolant water...... 5-77 System temporarily unavailable ...... 5-66 Tire equipment ...... 5-77 System malfunction ...... 5-67 Special winter equipment ...... 5-78 System maintenance...... 5-67 Driving on snow or ice ...... 5-78 Break-in schedule ...... 5-68 Engine block heater (if so equipped) ...... 5-78 PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING

WARNING ∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are ∙ The exhaust system and body should entering the vehicle, drive with all be inspected by a qualified mechanic ∙ Do not leave children or adults who windows fully open, and have the ve- whenever: would normally require the assis- hicle inspected immediately. tance of others alone in your vehicle. a. The vehicle is raised for service. Pets should also not be left alone. ∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces b. You suspect that exhaust fumes They could accidentally injure them- such as a garage. are entering into the passenger selves or others through inadvertent compartment. ∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en- operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, gine running for any extended length c. You notice a change in the sound of sunny days, temperatures in a closed of time. the exhaust system. vehicle could quickly become high d. You have had an accident involving enough to cause severe or possibly ∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, damage to the exhaust system, fatal injuries to people or animals. doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) underbody, or rear of the vehicle. closed while driving, otherwise ex- ∙ Closely supervise children when they haust gases could be drawn into the are around cars to prevent them from THREE-WAY CATALYST passenger compartment. If you must playing and becoming locked in the The three-way catalyst is an emission con- drive with one of these open, follow trunk where they could be seriously trol device installed in the exhaust system. these precautions: injured. Keep the car locked, with the Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst rear seatback and trunk lid securely 1. Open all the windows. are burned at high temperatures to help latched when not in use, and prevent reduce pollutants. children’s access to car keys. 2. Set the air recirculation button to off and the fan control dial to WARNING high to circulate the air. EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide) ∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys- ∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con- tem are very hot. Keep people, animals WARNING nections must pass to a trailer or flammable materials away from the ∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they through the seal on the trunk lid or the exhaust system components. body, follow the manufacturer’s rec- contain colorless and odorless carbon ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan- ommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle. flammable materials such as dry gerous. It can cause unconsciousness grass, waste paper or rags. They may or death. ignite and cause a fire. 5-2 Starting and driving CAUTION TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING Please note that the TPMS is not a substi- SYSTEM (TPMS) tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is ∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor- from leaded gasoline will seriously re- Each tire, including the spare (if provided), rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation duce the three-way catalyst’s ability should be checked monthly when cold and has not reached the level to trigger illumi- to help reduce exhaust pollutants. inflated to the inflation pressure recom- nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. ∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc- mended by the vehicle manufacturer on Your vehicle has also been equipped with a tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate electrical systems can cause overrich label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, size than the size indicated on the vehicle when the system is not operating properly. causing it to overheat. Do not keep placard or tire inflation pressure label, you The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- driving if the engine misfires, or if no- should determine the proper tire inflation bined with the low tire pressure telltale. ticeable loss of performance or other pressure for those tires.) When the system detects a malfunction, unusual operating conditions are de- As an added safety feature, your vehicle the telltale will flash for approximately one tected. Have the vehicle inspected has been equipped with a Tire Pressure minute and then remain continuously illu- promptly. It is recommended that you Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates minated. This sequence will continue upon visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. a low tire pressure telltale when one or subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunc- ∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low more of your tires is significantly under- fuel level. Running out of fuel could inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire tion indicator is illuminated, the system cause the engine to misfire, damag- pressure telltale illuminates, you should may not be able to detect or signal low tire ing the three-way catalyst. stop and check your tires as soon as pos- pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions sible, and inflate them to the proper pres- may occur for a variety of reasons, includ- ∙ Do not race the engine while warming sure. Driving on a significantly under- ing the installation of replacement or alter- it up. inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that ∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also prevent the TPMS from functioning prop- start the engine. reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction and may affect the vehicle’s handling and telltale after replacing one or more tires or stopping ability. wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. Starting and driving 5-3 Additional information: ∙ The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (TypeA-ifso ∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low - on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op- ∙ When replacing a wheel without the AddAir”(TypeB-ifsoequipped) warn- eration and the outside temperature. TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS ing message is displayed in the odom- Do not reduce the tire pressure after does not monitor the tire pressure of eter when the low tire pressure warning driving because the tire pressure rises the spare tire. light is illuminated and low tire pressure after driving. Low outside temperature ∙ The TPMS will activate only when the is detected. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” can lower the temperature of the air vehicle is driven at speeds above (TypeA-ifsoequipped) or the “Tire inside the tire which can cause a lower 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may Pressure Low - Add Air” (TypeB-ifso tire inflation pressure. This may cause not detect a sudden drop in tire pres- equipped) warning message turns off the low tire pressure warning light to sure (for example, a flat tire while driv- when the low tire pressure warning light illuminate. If the warning light illumi- ing). turns off. The low tire pressure warning nates, check the tire pressure for all four light remains illuminated until the tires tires. ∙ The low tire pressure warning light does are inflated to the recommended COLD not automatically turn off when the tire ∙ The Tire and Loading Information label tire pressure. The “CHECK TIRE PRES” pressure of all your tires is adjusted. Af- is located in the driver’s door opening. (TypeA-ifsoequipped) or the “Tire ter the tires are inflated to the recom- Pressure Low - Add Air” (TypeB-ifso For additional information, refer to “Check mended pressure, the vehicle must be equipped) warning message is dis- tire pressure warning message” or “Low tire driven at speeds above 16 mph pressure warning light” in the “Instruments played each time the ignition switch is (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn and controls” section and “Tire Pressure placed in the ON position as long as the off the low tire pressure warning light. Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of low tire pressure warning light remains Use a tire pressure gauge to check the emergency” section of this manual. illuminated. tire pressure. ∙ The “CHECK TIRE PRES” (TypeA-ifso WARNING equipped) or the “Tire Pressure Low - ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect AddAir”(TypeB-ifsoequipped) warn- electric medical equipment. Those ing is not displayed if the low tire pres- who use a pacemaker should contact sure warning light illuminates to indi- the electric medical equipment cate a TPMS malfunction. manufacturer for the possible influences before use. 5-4 Starting and driving Some examples are: ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light ∙ When replacing a wheel without the illuminates while driving, avoid sud- TPMS such as the spare tire, when a ∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi- den steering maneuvers or abrupt spare tire is mounted or a wheel is lar radio frequencies are near the ve- braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off replaced, the TPMS will not function hicle. the road to a safe location and stop and the low tire pressure warning the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- light will flash for approximately ∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen- ing with under-inflated tires may per- 1 minute. The light will remain on after cies is being used in or near the vehicle. manently damage the tires and in- 1 minute. Have your tires replaced ∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or crease the likelihood of tire failure. and/or TPMS reset as soon as pos- a DC/AC converter is being used in or Serious vehicle damage could occur sible. It is recommended that you visit near the vehicle. and may lead to an accident and could a NISSAN dealer for this service. result in serious personal injury. The low tire pressure warning light may ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- Check the tire pressure for all four illuminate in the following cases: nally specified by NISSAN could affect tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the the proper operation of the TPMS. ∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel recommended COLD tire pressure and tire without TPMS. shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol mation label to turn the low tire pres- tire sealant into the tires, as this may ∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the sure warning light off. If you have a flat cause a malfunction of the tire pres- ID has not been registered. sure sensors. tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon ∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by as possible. (For additional informa- NISSAN. tion on changing a flat tire, refer to CAUTION “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer- FCC Notice: Do not place metalized film or any metal gency” section of this manual.) parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This For USA: may cause poor reception of the signals This device complies with Part 15 of the from the tire pressure sensors, and the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- TPMS will not function properly. lowing two conditions: (1) This device Some devices and transmitters may tem- may not cause harmful interference, and porarily interfere with the operation of the (2) this device must accept any interfer- TPMS and cause the low tire pressure ence received, including interference warning light to illuminate. that may cause undesired operation. Starting and driving 5-5 NOTE: 3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po- ∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy- sition. Do not start the engine. Fill Tire Alert under the following con- Changes or modifications not expressly ditions: approved by the party responsible for Operation: compliance could void the user’s author- 1. Add air to the tire. – If there is interference from an exter- ity to operate the equipment. nal device or transmitter. 2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica- For Canada: tors will start flashing. – The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the This device complies with Industry 3. When the designated pressure is tire. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). reached, the horn beeps once and the Operation is subject to the following two hazard indicators stop flashing. – There is a malfunction in the TPMS conditions: (1) this device may not cause system. 4. Perform the above steps for each tire. interference, and (2) this device must ac- – There is a malfunction in the horn or cept any interference, including interfer- ∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than hazard indicators. ence that may cause undesired opera- approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn tion of the device. beeps and the hazard indicators flash – The identification code of the tire’s three times. To correct the pressure, pressure sensor is not registered to TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if so push the core of the valve stem on the the system. equipped) tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated – The battery of the tire pressure sen- When adding air to an under-inflated tire, pressure, the horn beeps once. sor is low. the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the ve- ∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash ∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op- hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec- within approximately 15 seconds af- erate due to TPMS interference, move ommended COLD tire pressure. ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi- the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is or forward and try again. Vehicle set-up: not operating. If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a 1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place. tire pressure gauge. 2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position (if so equipped). 5-6 Starting and driving AVOIDING COLLISION AND Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in drive the vehicle back onto the road ROLLOVER collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, surface until vehicle speed is reduced. an unbelted or improperly belted person 6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn is significantly more likely to be injured WARNING the steering wheel until both tires re- or killed than a person properly wearing turn to the road surface. When all tires Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe a seat belt. and prudent manner may result in loss are on the road surface, steer the ve- of control or an accident. OFF-ROAD RECOVERY hicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane. Be alert and drive defensively at all times. While driving, the right side or left side ∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re- wheels may unintentionally leave the road Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive turn the vehicle to the road surface speed, high speed cornering, or sudden surface. If this occurs, maintain control of based on vehicle, road or traffic con- steering maneuvers, because these driving the vehicle by following the procedure be- ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a practices could cause you to lose control of low. Please note that this procedure is only stop in a safe place off the road. your vehicle. a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS As with any vehicle, loss of control could the vehicle, road and traffic. result in a collision with other vehicles or Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged particularly if the loss of control causes due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air 2. Do not apply the brakes. the vehicle to slide sideways. pressure loss can also be caused by driving 3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering on under-inflated tires. Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving wheel with both hands and try to hold a when tired. Never drive when under the in- Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han- straight course. dling and stability of the vehicle, especially fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre- at highway speeds. scription or over-the-counter drugs which 4. When appropriate, slowly release the may cause drowsiness). Always wear your accelerator pedal to gradually slow the Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats, vehicle. maintaining the correct air pressure and seat belts and supplemental restraint sys- visually inspecting the tires for wear and 5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the tem” section of this manual, and also in- damage. For additional information, refer vehicle to follow the road while vehicle struct your passengers to do so. to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” speed is reduced. Do not attempt to section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses Starting and driving 5-7 air pressure or “blows-out” while driving, 4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How- maintain control of the vehicle by following location off the road and away from ever, you must choose not to drive under the procedure below. Please note that this traffic if possible. the influence of alcohol. Every year thou- sands of people are injured or killed in procedure is only a general guide. The ve- 5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu- alcohol-related collisions. Although the lo- hicle must be driven as appropriate based ally stop the vehicle. on the conditions of the vehicle, road and cal laws vary on what is considered to be traffic. 6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol and contact a roadside emergency affects all people differently and most WARNING service to change the tire. For addi- people underestimate the effects of alco- tional information, refer to “Changing a hol. If there is a sudden loss of tire air pres- flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! sure, the vehicle will generally move or section of this manual. pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, situation, losing control of the vehicle DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t may cause a collision and result in per- DRIVING drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is sonal injury. impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition. To help avoid loss of control: WARNING ∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes. Never drive under the influence of alco- ∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream pedal. reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving ∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel. after drinking alcohol increases the 1. Remain calm and do not overreact. likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Addi- 2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering tionally, if you are injured in an accident, wheel with both hands and try to hold a alcohol can increase the severity of the straight course. injury. 3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle. 5-8 Starting and driving IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

WARNING When the ignition switch cannot be turned to the LOCK position: Never remove or turn the key to the LOCK position while driving. The steer- 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi- ing wheel will lock (for models with a tion. steering lock mechanism). This may 2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the cause the driver to lose control of the ON direction. vehicle and could result in serious vehicle damage or personal injury. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. 4. Remove the key if it is inserted in the ignition switch. If the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position, the shift lever cannot be moved WSD0041 from the P (Park) position. CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE The shift lever can be moved if the igni- TRANSMISSION (if so equipped) tion switch is placed in the ON position The ignition lock is designed so that the and the foot brake pedal is depressed. ignition switch cannot be turned to the There is an OFF position between the LOCK position until the shift lever is moved LOCK and ACC positions. The OFF posi- to the P (Park) position. tion is indicated by a “1” on the key cylinder. ∙ When moving the ignition switch to the LOCK position, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position. ∙ When removing the key from the ignition switch, make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-9 In order for the steering wheel to be locked, NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER it must be turned about 1/8 of a turn clock- SYSTEM wise from the straight up position. The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System To lock the steering wheel, turn the key will not allow the engine to start without to the LOCK position. Remove the key. To the use of the registered key. unlock the steering wheel, insert the key and turn it gently while rotating the If the engine fails to start using a registered steering wheel slightly right and left. key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an auto- IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS mated toll road device or automatic pay- LOCK: Normal parking position (0) ment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedure: OFF: (1) 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- WSD0052 The engine can be turned off without lock- sition for approximately 5 seconds. ing the steering wheel. MANUAL TRANSMISSION (M/T) (if 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or so equipped) ACC: (Accessories) (2) LOCK position, and wait approximately This position activates electrical accesso- 10 seconds. The ignition switch includes a device that ries such as the radio when the engine is 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. helps prevent accidental removal of the not running. key while driving. 4. Restart the engine while holding the ON: Normal operating position (3) device (which may have caused the in- The key can only be removed when the terference) separate from the regis- ignition switch is in the LOCK position. This position turns on the ignition system and the electrical accessories. tered key. On M/T models, to turn the ignition key to START: (4) If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN the LOCK position from the ACC or ON po- recommends placing the registered key on sition, turn the key to the OFF position, push This position starts the engine. As soon as a separate key ring to avoid interference the key in, then turn the key to the LOCK the engine has started, release the key. It from other devices. position. automatically returns to the ON position.

5-10 Starting and driving PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH (if so equipped)

When the ignition switch is pushed without 3. Push the ignition switch again to the depressing the brake pedal or the clutch OFF position. pedal for manual transmission (M/T) mod- The shift lever can be moved from the P els, the ignition switch position will illumi- (Park) position if the ignition switch is in nate as follows: the ON position and the brake pedal is Push center: depressed. ∙ Once to change to ACC. If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved ∙ Two times to change to ON. from the LOCK position. ∙ Three times to return to OFF. Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed in the meter. For addi- The ignition switch will automatically re- tional information, refer to “Warning lights, turn to the LOCK position when any door is indicator lights and audible reminders” in LSD2014 either opened or closed with the switch in the “Instruments and controls” section of the OFF position. WARNING this manual. The ignition lock is designed so that the Do not operate the push-button igni- ignition switch position cannot be placed tion switch while driving the vehicle ex- in the OFF position until the shift lever is cept in an emergency. (The engine will moved to the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) stop when the ignition switch is pushed position (M/T). three consecutive times in quick succession or the ignition switch is pushed When the ignition switch cannot be pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the toward the OFF position, proceed as fol- engine stops while the vehicle is being lows: driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury. 1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position or N (Neutral) position (M/T). 2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch position will change to the ON position. Starting and driving 5-11 one who does not carry the Intelligent Key, ACC (Accessories) to push the ignition switch to start the en- This position activates electrical accesso- gine. ries, such as the radio, when the engine is The operating range of the engine start not running. function is inside of the vehicle ᭺1 . ACC has a battery saver feature that will ∙ The luggage area is not included in the turn the ignition switch to the OFF position operating range, but the Intelligent Key after a period of time under the following may function. conditions: ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the ∙ All doors are closed. instrument panel or inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the In- ∙ The shift lever is in P (Park). telligent Key may not function. ON (Normal operating position) LSD2089 ∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the This position turns on the ignition system OPERATING RANGE door or window outside the vehicle, the and electrical accessories. Intelligent Key may function. The Intelligent Key functions can only be ON has a battery saver feature that will turn used when the Intelligent Key is within the PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH the ignition switch to the OFF position, if the specified operating range. POSITIONS vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions: When the Intelligent Key battery is almost LOCK (Normal parking position) discharged or strong radio waves are pres- The ignition switch can only be locked in ∙ All doors are closed. ent near the operating location, the Intelli- this position. ∙ The shift lever is in P (Park). gent Key system’s operating range becomes narrower and may not function The ignition switch will be unlocked when it The battery saver feature will be canceled if properly. is pushed to the ACC position while carry- any of the following occur: ing the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key is within the operating ∙ Any door is opened. range, it is possible for anyone, even some- The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition ∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P switched off. (Park) position. 5-12 Starting and driving ∙ The ignition switch changes position. After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without de- CAUTION pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to the ACC Do not leave the vehicle with the igni- position. tion switch in the ACC or ON position when the engine is not running for an 4. Push the ignition switch while depress- extended period.This can discharge the ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds battery. after the chime sounds. The engine will start. OFF The ignition switch is in the OFF position NOTE: when the engine is turned off using the ∙ When the ignition switch is pushed to ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on the ACC or ON position or the engine the ignition switch. SSD0860 is started by the above procedure, the EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF Intelligent Key battery discharge in- NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® dicator appears in the vehicle infor- To shut off the engine in an emergency BATTERY DISCHARGE mation display even when the Intelli- situation while driving, perform the follow- gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is ing procedure: If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® not a malfunction. To turn off the In- is discharged or environmental conditions telligent Key battery discharge indi- ∙ Rapidly push the ignition switch three interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec- cator, touch the ignition switch with start the engine according to the following the Intelligent Key again. onds, or procedure: ∙ If the Intelligent Key battery dis- ∙ Push and hold the ignition switch for 1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi- more than 2 seconds. charge indicator appears, replace the tion. battery as soon as possible. For addi- 2. Firmly apply the foot brake. tional information, refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” 3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel- section of this manual. ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.) Starting and driving 5-13 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE (models without NISSAN Intelligent Key® system) NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER ∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is 1. Apply the parking brake. clear. SYSTEM 2. Continuously Variable Transmission The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil, model: coolant, brake and clutch fluid (if so will not allow the engine to start without Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N equipped), and windshield-washer fluid the use of the registered key. (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. as frequently as possible, or at least If the engine fails to start using a registered whenever you refuel. The shift lever cannot be moved out key (for example, when interference is of P (Park) and into any of the other ∙ Check that all windows and lights are caused by another registered key, an auto- gear positions if the ignition switch clean. mated toll road device or automatic pay- is turned to the OFF position or if the ment device on the key ring), restart the ∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear- key is removed from the ignition engine using the following procedure: ance and condition. Also check tires for switch. proper inflation. 1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po- The starter is designed not to oper- sition for approximately 5 seconds. ∙ Lock all doors. ate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions. 2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or ∙ Position seat and adjust head LOCK position, and wait approximately restraints/headrests. Manual transmission model: 10 seconds. ∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors. Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De- 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2. press the clutch pedal to the floor ∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen- while cranking the engine. 4. Restart the engine while holding the gers to do likewise. device (which may have caused the in- The starter is designed not to oper- ∙ Check the operation of warning lights terference) separate from the regis- ate unless the clutch pedal is fully when the ignition switch is placed in the tered key. depressed. ON position. For additional information, If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights The Intelligent Key must be carried recommends placing the registered key on and audible reminders” in the “Instru- when operating the ignition switch. a separate key ring to avoid interference ments and controls” section of this from other devices. manual.

5-14 Starting and driving 3. Crank the engine with your foot off CAUTION 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly the accelerator pedal by turning the and/or only driven short distances. ignition switch to the START position. Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine In these cases, the battery may need to Release the switch when the engine be charged to maintain battery health. starts. If the engine starts, but fails to does not start, turn the ignition switch run, repeat the above procedure. to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in starter could be damaged. extremely cold weather or when re- 4. Warm-up starting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the Allow the engine to idle for at least floor) and hold it and then crank the 30 seconds after starting. Do not race engine. Release the switch and the the engine while warming it up. Drive at accelerator pedal when the engine a moderate speed for a short distance starts. first, especially in cold weather. ∙ If the engine is very hard to start be- NOTE: cause it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery dis- and hold it. Crank the engine for charge and potential no-start conditions 5-6 seconds. After cranking the en- such as: gine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off 1. Installation or extended use of elec- the accelerator pedal by turning the tronic accessories that consume bat- ignition switch to the START position. tery power when the engine is not Release the key when the engine running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD starts. If the engine starts, but fails to players, etc.). run, repeat the above procedure.

Starting and driving 5-15 STARTING THE ENGINE (models with NISSAN Intelligent Key® system)

1. Apply the parking brake. floor) and while holding, crank the en- the engine while warming it up. Drive at gine. Release the accelerator pedal a moderate speed for a short distance 2. Continuously Variable Transmission when the engine starts. first, especially in cold weather. In cold model: weather, keep the engine running for a ∙ If the engine is very hard to start be- Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N minimum of2-3minutes before shut- cause it is flooded, depress the accel- (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended. ting it off. Starting and stopping the erator pedal all the way to the floor and engine over a short period of time may The starter is designed not to oper- hold it. Push the ignition switch to the make the vehicle more difficult to start. ate if the shift lever is in any of the ON position to start cranking the en- driving positions. gine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop crank- 5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever ing by pushing the ignition switch to to the P (Park) position or to N (Neutral) Manual Transmission (M/T) model: the LOCK position. After cranking the and apply the parking brake (M/T) and engine, release the accelerator pedal. push the ignition switch to the OFF po- Move the shift lever to N (Neutral). De- sition. press the clutch pedal to the floor. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the The starter is designed not to oper- brake pedal and pushing the ignition NOTE: ate unless the clutch pedal is fully switch to start the engine. If the engine Care should be taken to avoid situations depressed. starts, but fails to run, repeat the above that can lead to potential battery dis- procedure. 3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po- charge and potential no-start conditions sition. Depress the brake pedal and the such as: CAUTION clutch pedal (if so equipped) and push 1. Installation or extended use of elec- the ignition switch to start the engine. Do not operate the starter for more tronic accessories that consume bat- than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine tery power when the engine is not To start the engine immediately, push does not start, push the ignition switch and release the ignition switch while running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds players, etc.). depressing the brake pedal with the before cranking again, otherwise the ignition switch in any position. starter could be damaged. 2. The vehicle is not driven regularly ∙ If the engine is very hard to start in and/or only driven short distances. 4. Warm-up extremely cold weather or when re- In these cases, the battery may need to starting, depress the accelerator Allow the engine to idle for at least be charged to maintain battery health. pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the 30 seconds after starting. Do not race 5-16 Starting and driving DRIVING THE VEHICLE

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE CAUTION Starting the vehicle TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift WARNING equipped) to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal WARNING the N (Neutral) position may cause se- while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) (if ∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal rious damage to the transmission. so equipped). Always depress the brake while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu- ∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve- pedal until shifting is completed. Fail- tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uretodosocouldcauseyoutolose (if so equipped). Always depress the uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by control and have an accident. brake pedal until shifting is com- depressing the accelerator pedal. The pleted. Failure to do so could cause foot brake should be used for this ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use you to lose control and have an purpose. caution when shifting into a forward accident. or reverse gear before the engine has The CVT in your vehicle is electronically warmed up. ∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use controlled to produce maximum power caution when shifting into a forward and smooth operation. ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery or reverse gear before the engine has roads. This may cause a loss of warmed up. The recommended operating procedures control. for this transmission are shown on the fol- ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery lowing pages. Follow these procedures for ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R roads. This may cause a loss of maximum vehicle performance and driv- (Reverse) position while the vehicle is control. ing enjoyment. moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is re- ∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R versing. This could cause an accident (Reverse) position while the vehicle is NOTE: or damage the transmission. moving forward and P (Park) or D Engine power may be automatically re- (Drive) position while the vehicle is reduced to protect the CVT if the engine ∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift versing. This could cause an accident speed increases quickly when driving on to the N (Neutral) position while driv- or damage the transmission. slippery roads or while being tested on ing. Coasting with the transmission in some dynamometers. the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.

Starting and driving 5-17 CAUTION To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose. 1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. 2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever into a driving gear. 3. Release the foot brake, then gradually LSD2568 LSD2673 start the vehicle in motion. Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) To move the shift lever: 4. Stop the vehicle completely before moving the shift lever into the P (Park) Press the button ᭺A while depressing position. the brake pedal The Continuously Variable Transmission Press the button ᭺A to shift is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST Shift without pressing the button ᭺A be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any drive position while the ig- Shifting nition switch is in the ON position. After starting the engine, fully depress the The shift lever cannot be moved out of P brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) and into any of the other gear po- (Park) to any of the desired shift positions. sitions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or ACC position or if the keyisremoved. 5-18 Starting and driving WARNING stopped. The brake pedal must be de- D (Drive) pressed and the shift lever button Use this position for all normal forward Apply the parking brake if the shift lever pressed in to move the shift lever from N driving. is in any position while the engine is not (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park). running. Failure to do so could cause Apply the parking brake. When parking on a L (Low) (if so equipped) the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll hill, apply the parking brake first, then place Use this position for maximum engine away and result in serious personal in- the shift lever into the P (Park) position. jury or property damage. braking on steep downhill R (Reverse) gradients/climbing steep slopes and If the key is turned to the OFF or ACC posi- whenever approaching sharp bends. Do tion for any reason while the vehicle is in N CAUTION not use the L (Low) position in any other (Neutral), or any drive position, the key can- circumstances. not be turned to the LOCK position and be To prevent transmission damage, use removed from the ignition switch. If this the R (Reverse) position only when the Manual shift mode (if so occurs, perform the following steps: vehicle is completely stopped. equipped) Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. 1. Apply the parking brake when the ve- When the shift lever is in the manual shift Make sure the vehicle is completely hicle is stopped. gate, the transmission is ready for the stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be 2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) to park position. The brake pedal must be de- the vehicle and turn the ignition switch selected manually by moving the shift le- pressed and the shift lever button to the LOCK position to remove the key. ver up or down. To cancel manual shift pressed in to move the shift lever from P mode, return the shift lever to the D (Drive) P (Park) (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to position. The transmission returns to auto- R (Reverse). matic driving mode. CAUTION N (Neutral) To prevent transmission damage, use When the shift lever is shifted from D (Drive) the P (Park) position only when the ve- Neither forward nor reverse gear is en- to the manual shift gate with the vehicle hicle is completely stopped. gaged. The engine can be started in this stopped or while driving, the transmission position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and enters the manual shift mode. Shift ranges Use the P (Park) shift lever position when restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is can be selected manually. In the manual the vehicle is parked or when starting the moving. shift mode, the shift range is displayed on engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely the position indicator in the meter. When Starting and driving 5-19 moving the shift lever to the manual shift When shifting up ∙ When this situation occurs, the Con- gate, the position indicator displays 1 (1st) tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts up to 7 (7th) depending on vehicle speed. position indicator light will blink and to higher range.) the chime will sound. Shift ranges up or down one by one as When shifting down follows: ∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans- Move the shift lever to the Ϫ (down) side. mission may shift up automatically to 1⇔ 2 ⇔ 3 ⇔ 4 ⇔ 5 ⇔ 6 ⇔ 7 (Shifts to lower range.) a higher range than selected if the M7 (7th) engine speed is too high. When the ∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the vehicle speed decreases, the trans- Use this position for all normal forward same side twice will shift the ranges in mission automatically shifts down driving at highway speeds. succession. and shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle comes to a stop. M6 (6th) and M5 (5th) ∙ The transmission will automatically downshift the gears. (For example, if you ∙ CVT operation is limited to automatic Use this position when driving up long select the 3rd range, the transmission drive mode when CVT fluid tempera- slopes or for engine braking when driving will shift down between the 3rd and 1st ture is extremely low even if manual down long slopes. gears.) shift mode is selected. This is not a mal- M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd) function. When CVT fluid warms up, When canceling the manual shift mode manual mode can be selected. Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill grades. Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi- ∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high, tion to return the transmission to the nor- the shift range may upshift in lower M1 (1st) mal driving mode. rpm than usual. This is not a malfunction. Use this position when climbing steep hills ∙ In the manual shift mode, the trans- slowly or driving slowly through deep snow, mission may not shift to the selected sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak- gear. This helps maintain driving per- ing on steep downhill grades. formance and reduces the chance of ∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds vehicle damage or loss of control. for extended periods of time in lower than the 6th range. This reduces fuel economy. 5-20 Starting and driving To move the shift lever, complete the fol- WARNING lowing procedure: If the shift lever cannot be moved from 1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK the P (Park) position while the engine is position. running and the brake pedal is de- 2. Apply the parking brake. pressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause 3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a an accident injuring yourself and 3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift others. lock release cover. ∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used. 4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift LSD2569 lock release slot and push down. Shift lock release 5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift If the battery charge is low or discharged, lock release. the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal 6. Push the ignition switch to the ON po- depressed and the shift lever button sition to unlock the steering wheel. pressed. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location. It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged. For additional infor- If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P mation, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In (Park), have the transmission checked as case of emergency” section of this manual. soon as possible. It is recommended that It is recommended that you contact a you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.

Starting and driving 5-21 To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push switch back to the ON position. The ve- the O/D OFF switch again. The indi- hicle should return to its normal operat- cator light will turn off. ing condition. If it does not return to its Each time the engine is started, or when normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if the shift lever is moved to any position necessary. It is recommended that you other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. mode will be automatically turned off. Accelerator downshift WARNING — in D (Drive) position — When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation oc- For passing or hill climbing, depress the curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re- accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts duced. The reduced speed may be lower the transmission down into a lower gear, than other traffic, which could increase LSD2620 depending on the vehicle speed. the chance of a collision. Be especially Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch (if so Fail-safe careful when driving. If necessary, pull equipped) to the side of the road at a safe place If the vehicle is driven under extreme and allow the transmission to return to When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with conditions, such as excessive wheel normal operation, or have it repaired if the shift lever in the D (Drive) position, spinning and subsequent hard braking, necessary. the light in the instrument panel illu- the fail-safe system may be activated. minates. For additional information, refer The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “In- may come on to indicate the fail-safe struments and controls” section of this mode is activated. For additional infor- manual. mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator Use the overdrive OFF mode when you Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con- need improved engine braking. trols” section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the 5-22 Starting and driving MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so CAUTION equipped) ∙ Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This may cause WARNING clutch damage. ∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery ∙ Fully depress the clutch pedal before roads. This may cause a loss of shifting to help prevent transmission control. damage. ∙ Do not over-rev the engine when ∙ Stop your vehicle completely before shifting to a lower gear. This may shifting into R (Reverse). cause a loss of control or engine damage. ∙ When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running (for example, at a stop ∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position light), shift to N (Neutral) and release while driving. Doing so may result in the clutch pedal with the foot brake SSD0552 an accident due to loss of engine applied. braking. Shifting ∙ Do not shift to the N (Neutral) position To change gears or when upshifting or while driving. Doing so may result in an accident due to loss of engine downshifting, depress the clutch pedal braking. fully, shift into the appropriate gear, then release the clutch slowly and smoothly. To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise may be heard. Trans- mission damage may occur. Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd, 4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according to vehicle speed. Starting and driving 5-23 To back up, lift up on the shift lever ring ᭺1 MR16DDT engine models (6 M/T) MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T) and then move it to the R (Reverse) position after stopping the vehicle completely. GEAR Change mph (km/h) GEAR mph (km/h) 1st to 2nd 13 (21) 1st 30 (48) The shift lever ring ᭺1 returns to its original 2nd to 3rd 22 (35) 2nd 52 (84) position when the shift lever is moved to 3rd to 4th 30 (48) 3rd 73 (117) the N (Neutral) position. 4th to 5th 35 (56) 4th 94 (152) If it is difficult to move the shift lever into R 5th to 6th 42 (68) 5th — (Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then 6th — Suggested maximum speed in MR16DDT engine models (6 M/T) release the clutch pedal. Depress the each gear clutch pedal again and shift into R (Re- GEAR mph (km/h) verse) or 1 (1st). Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is 1st 29 (46) not running smoothly or if you need to ac- Suggested up-shift speeds 2nd 47 (75) celerate. 3rd 68 (108) The following are suggested vehicle Do not exceed the maximum suggested 4th 90 (145) speeds for shifting into a higher gear. speed (shown below) in any gear. For level 5th — These suggestions relate to fuel economy road driving, use the highest gear sug- 6th — and vehicle performance. Actual upshift gested for that speed. Always observe speeds will vary according to road condi- posted speed limits, and drive according to tions, the weather and individual driving the road conditions, which will ensure safe habits. operation. Do not over-rev the engine MRA8DE engine models (6 M/T) when shifting to a lower gear as it may GEAR Change mph (km/h) cause engine damage or loss of vehicle 1st to 2nd 8(13) control. 2nd to 3rd 17 (27) 3rd to 4th 25 (40) 4th to 5th 36 (58) 5th to 6th 51 (82)

5-24 Starting and driving PARKING BRAKE

WARNING 3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, press the button and ∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re- lower completely ᭺B . leased before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an 4. Before driving, be sure the brake warn- accident. ing light goes out. ∙ Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle. ∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged. ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the LSD2197 vehicle and/or its systems, do not To engage: Pull the lever up ᭺A . leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unat- To release: tended in your vehicle. Additionally, 1. Firmly apply the foot brake. the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly be- 2. Manual transmission models: come high enough to cause a signifi- Place the shift lever in the N (Neutral) cant risk of injury or death to people and pets. position. Continuously Variable Transmission models: Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

Starting and driving 5-25 SPORT MODE SWITCH (if so ECO MODE SWITCH (if so equipped) equipped)

The ECO mode cannot be turned off while the accelerator pedal is depressed, even if the ECO mode switch is pushed off. Release the accelerator pedal to turn off the ECO mode. The ECO mode will turn off automatically if a malfunction occurs in the system. Turn off the ECO mode or depress the accelerator pedal fully when: ∙ Driving with a heavy load of passengers or cargo in the vehicle ∙ Driving on a steep uphill slope LIC2417 LIC2416 ∙ ECO mode may affect air conditioner The SPORT mode switch adjusts the The ECO mode helps to enhance the fuel performance throttle sensitivity and transmission points economy by controlling the throttle sensi- to enhance performance. Push the SPORT tivity and transmission points. NOTE: mode switch on the instrument panel to To turn on the ECO mode, push the ECO activate. The SPORT mode indicator light Selecting this drive mode will not neces- mode switch. The ECO mode indicator light (on the speedometer) will illuminate. The sarily improve fuel economy as many (on the meter or vehicle information dis- SPORT mode indicator light will remain lit driving factors influence its effective- play) will remain lit while the mode is active. while the mode is active. ness. To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO NOTE: mode switch again. The ECO mode indica- In the SPORT mode, fuel economy may tor light (on the meter or vehicle informa- be reduced. tion display) will turn off.

5-26 Starting and driving BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)

NOTE: WARNING ∙ The shift indicator is a guide for fuel Failure to follow the warnings and in- economy. Always pay attention to structions for proper use of the BSW road conditions and other traffic. system could result in serious injury or ∙ Downshift the indicator icon to the 1 death. (1st) position if not displayed. ∙ The BSW system is not a replacement ∙ If the downshifting icon is displayed for proper driving procedures and is when decreasing your vehicle speed, not designed to prevent contact with it indicates that the engine speed is vehicles or objects. When changing low compared to the gear position. lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely LSD2143 solely on the BSW system. SHIFT LEVER INDICATOR (MRA8DE The BSW system helps alert the driver of engine Manual Transmission other vehicles in adjacent lanes when models only) changing lanes. The shift lever indicator is used to support the suitable timing of gear change. It operates only when the ECO mode is on. The shift indicator icon and recommended gear position are displayed. The shift indicator icon indicates when to upshift or downshift for fuel economy.

Starting and driving 5-27 LSD2692 SSD1030 The BSW system uses radar sensors ᭺1 Detection zone installed near the rear bumper to detect The radar sensors can detect vehicles on other vehicles in an adjacent lane. either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

5-28 Starting and driving 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator BSW SYSTEM OPERATION The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h). If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The BSW indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicles leaves the detection zone. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light. If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to “BSW driving situations” in this section. LSD2624 Starting and driving 5-29 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN- TER button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN- TER button. 3. Select “Blind Spot/RCTA” and press the ENTER button.

NOTE: ∙ When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted. ∙ The RCTA system (if so equipped) is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled. LSD2622 5-30 Starting and driving ∙ When the BSW system is turned on, – A vehicle merging into an adjacent ∙ The following conditions may reduce the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the lane at a speed approximately the the ability of the radar to detect other vehicle information display illumi- same as your vehicle. vehicles: nates. – A vehicle approaching rapidly from – Severe weather BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS behind. – Road spray – A vehicle which your vehicle over- – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on WARNING takes rapidly. the vehicle Listed below are the system limitations – A vehicle that passes through the ∙ Do not attach stickers (including for the BSW system. Failure to operate detection zone quickly. the vehicle in accordance with these transparent material), install accesso- system limitations could result in seri- – When overtaking several vehicles ries or apply additional paint near the ous injury or death. in a row, the vehicles after the first radar sensors. These conditions may vehicle may not be detected if they reduce the ability of the radar to de- ∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve- are traveling close together. tect other vehicles. hicles under all conditions. ∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is ∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio ∙ The radar sensors may not be able to designed based on a standard lane system volume, open vehicle window) detect and activate BSW when certain width. When driving in a wider lane, will interfere with the chime sound, objects are present such as: the radar sensors may not detect ve- and it may not be heard. – Pedestrian, bicycles, animals. hicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors – Vehicles such as motorcycles, low may detect vehicles driving two lanes height vehicles, or high ground away. clearance vehicles. ∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig- – Oncoming vehicles. nore most stationary objects; how- – Vehicles remaining in the detec- ever, objects such as guardrails, walls, tion zone when you accelerate foliage and parked vehicles may oc- from a stop. casionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.

Starting and driving 5-31 Another vehicle approaching from behind Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

LSD2299 LSD2300 Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the Indicator detection zone, then the system chimes on (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. Indicator off NOTE: Indicator ∙ The radar sensors may not detect ve- flashing hicles which are approaching rapidly from behind. ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected. 5-32 Starting and driving ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

LSD2302 LSD2303 Illustration3–Overtaking another ve- Illustration4–Overtaking another vehicle hicle Overtaking another vehicle Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes minates if you overtake a vehicle and that (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds. NOTE: ∙ When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together. ∙ The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly. Starting and driving 5-33 ∙ The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.

LSD2305 LSD2308 Illustration 5 – Entering from the side Illustration 6 – Entering from the side Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu- detection zone, then the system chimes minates if a vehicle enters the detection (twice) and the side indicator light flashes. zone from either side. NOTE: ∙ If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.

5-34 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink ᭺A in the vehicle information display. The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. Action to take: When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD2623 Starting and driving 5-35 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn additional paint near the radar sensors. off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi- Do not strike or damage the area around cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in- the radar sensors. It is recommended that formation display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. For USA Action to take: FCC : OAYSRR2B This device complies with part 15 of the Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the LSD2692 FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- engine off and restart the engine. If the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE message continues to appear, have the lowing two conditions: system checked. It is recommended that The two radar sensors ᭺1 for the BSW and (1) This device may not cause harmful you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. RCTA systems are located near the rear interference, and (2) this device must ac- bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- cept any interference received, including dar sensors clean. interference that may cause undesired operation. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- FCC Warning ing water, mist or fog. Changes or modifications not expressly The blocked condition may also be caused approved by the party responsible for by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- compliance could void the user’s author- structing the radar sensors. ity to operate the equipment Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. 5-36 Starting and driving REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)

For Canada WARNING Applicable law: Canada 310 Failure to follow the warnings and in- This device complies with Industry structions for proper use of the RCTA Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). system could result in serious injury or Operation is subject to the following two death. conditions: (1) this device may not cause ∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement interference, and (2) this device must ac- for proper driving procedures and is cept any interference, including interfer- not designed to prevent contact with ence that may cause undesired opera- vehicles or objects. When backing out tion of the device. of a parking space, always use the Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will Output power: less than 20 milliwatts move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system. The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

Starting and driving 5-37 1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light 2. BSW/RCTA Indicator RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.

LSD2624 5-38 Starting and driving LSD2216 LSD2692 The RCTA system uses radar sensors ᭺1 installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle. The radar sensors ᭺1 can detect an approaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) away.

Starting and driving 5-39 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system. 1. Press the button until “Settings” displays in the vehicle information display. Use the button to select “Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN- TER button. 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN- TER button. 3. Select “Blind Spot/RCTA” and press the ENTER button. When the RCTA system is turned on, the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.

NOTE: ∙ The RCTA system is integrated into the BSW system. There is not a separate selection in the vehicle information display for the RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also disabled. ∙ When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained LSD2622 even if the engine is restarted. 5-40 Starting and driving WARNING Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death. ∙ Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as: – Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles – A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h) – A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph LSD3195 (8 km/h) RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations: – Illustration ᭺A : When a vehicle parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.

Starting and driving 5-41 – Illustration ᭺B : When the vehicle is parked in an angled parking space. – Illustration ᭺C : When the vehicle is parked on inclined ground. – Illustration ᭺D : When an approaching vehicle turns into your vehicle’s parking lot aisle. – Illustration ᭺E : When the angle formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small. ∙ The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles: LSD2043 LSD2044 – Severe weather Illustration 1 Illustration 2 – Road spray NOTE: – Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on In the case of several vehicles approach- the vehicle ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may ∙ Do not attach stickers (including not be sounded by the RCTA system af- transparent material), install accesso- ter the first vehicle passes the sensors. ries or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles. ∙ Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.

5-42 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar Obstruction” warning message will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink ᭺A in the vehicle information display. The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.

NOTE: If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA system will also stop working. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.

LSD2623 Starting and driving 5-43 Malfunction Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will additional paint near the radar sensors. turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the Do not strike or damage the area around BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in the radar sensors. It is recommended that the vehicle information display. you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a NOTE: collision. If the BSW system stops working, the Radio frequency statement RCTA system (if so equipped) will also stop working. For USA Action to take FCC : OAYSRR2B Stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the LSD2692 This device complies with part 15 of the engine off and restart the engine. If the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- message continues to appear, have the SYSTEM MAINTENANCE lowing two conditions: system checked. It is recommended that ᭺1 you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The two radar sensors for the BSW and (1) This device may not cause harmful RCTA systems are located near the rear interference, and (2) this device must ac- bumper. Always keep the area near the ra- cept any interference received, including dar sensors clean. interference that may cause undesired operation. The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splash- FCC Warning ing water, mist or fog. Changes or modifications not expressly The blocked condition may also be caused approved by the party responsible for by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob- compliance could void the user’s author- structing the radar sensors. ity to operate the equipment Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors. 5-44 Starting and driving CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

For Canada Applicable law: Canada 310 This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard (s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Frequency bands: 24.05GHz – 24.25GHz Output power: less than 20 milliwatts LSD2430 LSD2572 Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE ∙ If the cruise control system malfunc- CONTROL tions, it cancels automatically. The CRUISE indicator light or indicator 1. CANCEL switch in the instrument panel then blinks to 2. ACCEL/RES switch warn the driver. For additional information, refer to “Warning lights, indicator 3. COAST/SET switch lights and audible reminders” or “Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments 4. ON/OFF switch and controls” section of this manual. ∙ If the CRUISE indicator light or indicator blinks, push the ON/OFF switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Starting and driving 5-45 ∙ The CRUISE indicator light or indi- CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS ∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The CRUISE cator may blink when the ON/OFF The cruise control allows driving at a speed indicator light or indicator in the switch is pushed on while pushing the between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with- instrument panel goes out. ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or CANCEL out keeping your foot on the accelerator The cruise control is automatically can- switch. To properly set the cruise con- pedal. celed if: trol system, use the following procedures. To turn on the cruise control, push the ∙ You depress the brake or clutch pedal ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light (for Manual Transmission models) while WARNING or indicator in the instrument panel pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch. The preset speed is deleted Do not use the cruise control when driv- comes on. ing under the following conditions: To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve- from memory. hicle to the desired speed, push the ∙ When it is not possible to keep the ∙ The vehicle slows down more than COAST/SET switch and release it. Take your vehicle at a set speed. 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed. foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle ∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies maintains the set speed. ∙ You depress the clutch pedal (for in speed. Manual Transmission models), or move ∙ To pass another vehicle, depress the the shift lever to N (Neutral) (for Continu- ∙ On winding or hilly roads. accelerator pedal. When you release the ously Variable Transmission models). ∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.). pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed. To reset at a faster cruising speed, use ∙ In very windy areas. one of the following three methods: ∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When control and result in an accident. speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the the vehicle attains the desired speed, cruise control. push and release the COAST/SET switch. To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods: ∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. desire, release the switch. ∙ Tap the brake pedal. 5-46 Starting and driving INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC) (if so equipped)

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES WARNING switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph Failure to follow the warnings and in- (1.6 km/h). structions for proper use of the ICC system could result in serious injury or To reset at a slower cruising speed, use death. one of the following three methods: ∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the the driver and is not a collision warn- vehicle attains the desired speed, push ing or avoidance device. It is the driv- the COAST/SET switch and release it. er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive ∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. safely and be in control of the vehicle Release the switch when the vehicle at all times. slows to the desired speed. ∙ Always observe posted speed limits ∙ Push and release the COAST/SET and do not set the speed over them. LSD2698 switch. Each time you do this, the set ∙ Always drive carefully and attentively The ICC system is intended to enhance the speed decreases by about 1 mph when using the ICC system. Read and operation of the vehicle when following a (1.6 km/h). understand the Owner’s Manual thor- vehicle traveling in the same lane and di- To resume the preset speed, push and oughly before using the ICC system. rection. release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle To avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system to prevent ac- The ICC system uses a radar sensor ᭺A returns to the last set cruising speed when located on the front of the vehicle to detect the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h). cidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in emergency situations. Do vehicles traveling ahead. not use the ICC system except in ap- If the radar sensor detects a slower moving propriate road and traffic conditions. vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in front at the selected distance. The detection range of the sensor is approximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

Starting and driving 5-47 ICC SYSTEM OPERATION The ICC system maintains a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you within the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set speed can be selected by the driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based on road conditions. The vehicle travels at the set speed when the road ahead is clear. The ICC system is designed to maintain a selected distance from the vehicle in front of you and can reduce the speed to match a slower vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC system can only apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking power. This system should only be used when traffic conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly constant or when vehicle speeds change gradually. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates, the distance between vehicles may become closer because the ICC system cannot decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. LSD2564 If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a 5-48 Starting and driving warning chime and blink the system dis- The ICC system does not control vehicle play to notify the driver to take necessary speed or warn you when you approach action. stationary and slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to vehicle operation to For additional information, refer to “Ap- maintain proper distance from vehicles proach warning” in this section. ahead when approaching toll gates or traf- The following items are controlled in the fic congestion. ICC system: ∙ When there are no vehicles traveling ahead, the ICC system maintains the speed set by the driver. The set speed range is between approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, SSD0254 the ICC system adjusts the speed to When driving on the freeway at a set speed maintain the distance, selected by the and approaching a slower traveling vehicle driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve- ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the to maintain the distance, selected by the limitations of the system. The system driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle will cancel once it judges a standstill ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway, with a warning chime. the ICC system will accelerate and maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay ∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has attention to the driving operation to main- moved out from its lane of travel, the tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates ICC system accelerates and maintains to the set speed. vehicle speed up to the set speed. Normally when controlling the distance to a vehicle ahead, this system automatically accelerates or decelerates your vehicle according to the speed of the vehicle ahead. Starting and driving 5-49 Depress the accelerator to properly accel- 3. COAST/SET switch: erate your vehicle when acceleration is re- Sets desired cruise speed or reduces quired for a lane change. Depress the brake speed incrementally. pedal when deceleration is required to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle 4. DISTANCE switch: ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us- Changes the vehicle’s following dis- ing the ICC system. tance: ∙ Long ∙ Middle ∙ Short 5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

LSD2505 Master switch to activate the system. THE ICC SWITCH The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/OFF switch and four control switches, all mounted on the steering wheel. 1. CANCEL switch: Deactivates the system without erasing the set speed. 2. ACCEL/RES switch: Resumes set speed or increases speed incrementally.

5-50 Starting and driving 2. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator: ∙ ICC system ON indicator (white): In- dicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch is ON. ∙ ICC system SET indicator (green): Indicates that the cruising speed is set. ∙ ICC system warning (orange): Indi- cates that there is a malfunction in the ICC system. 3. Set distance indicator: Displays the selected distance be- LSD2565 tween vehicles set with the distance LSD2576 The ICC system display and switch. Operating ICC indicators 4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator: To turn on the cruise control, quickly push and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch ᭺A . The display is located between the speed- Indicates whether it detects a vehicle The ICC system ON indicator (white), set ometer and tachometer. in front of you. distance indicator and set vehicle speed 1. Set vehicle speed indicator: indicator come on in a standby state for Indicates the set vehicle speed. setting. For Canadian models, the speed is displayed in km/h.

Starting and driving 5-51 ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or L (Low) (if so equipped) position ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When the brakes are operated by the driver When the COAST/SET switch is pushed under the following conditions, the system cannot be set. A warning chime will sound and a message will pop up: ∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC system, turn on the VDC system. LSD2577 Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn LSD2566 To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve- off the ICC system and reset the ICC ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead hicle to the desired speed, push the switch by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF ᭺2 System set display without vehicle COAST/SET switch and release it. The ICC switch again.) system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead ahead For additional information about the detection indicator, set distance indicator Vehicle detected ahead and set vehicle speed indicator ᭺B will VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic come on. Take your foot off the accelerator Control (VDC) system” in this section. When a vehicle is detected in the lane pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set ∙ When ABS or VDC is operating ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve- speed. hicle by controlling the throttle and apply- ∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC ing the brakes to match the speed of a When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un- system, make sure the wheels are no slower vehicle ahead. The system then der the following conditions, the system longer slipping. Push the CRUISE cannot be set and the ICC indicators will controls the vehicle speed based on the ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC sys- speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the blink for approximately 2 seconds: tem, and reset the ICC system by push- driver selected distance. ∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h) ing the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.) and a vehicle ahead is not detected 5-52 Starting and driving NOTE: ∙ The stop lights of the vehicle come on when braking is performed by the ICC system. ∙ When the brake operates, a noise may be heard. This is not a malfunction. When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC system will also display the set speed and selected distance. Vehicle ahead not detected When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler- LSD2575 LSD2566 ates your vehicle to resume the previously When passing another vehicle, the set ᭺1 System set display with vehicle ahead set vehicle speed. The ICC system then speed indicator ᭺B will flash when the ve- ᭺2 System set display without vehicle maintains the set speed. hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indicator will turn off when the ahead When a vehicle is no longer detected, the area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the How to change the set vehicle vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off. pedal is released, the vehicle will return to speed If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera- the previously set speed. tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the Even though your vehicle speed is set in the To cancel the preset speed, use one of the ICC system is in operation, the system con- ICC system, you can depress the accelera- following methods: trols the distance to that vehicle. tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate ∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve- your vehicle rapidly. When a vehicle is no longer detected under hicle speed indicator will go out. approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will be canceled. ∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed indicator will go out.

Starting and driving 5-53 ∙ Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The ∙ Push, then quickly release the ICC indicators will go out. COAST/SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed will decrease by ap- To reset at a faster cruising speed, use proximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada). one of the following methods: To resume the preset speed, push and ∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle the vehicle attains the desired speed, will resume the last set cruising speed push and release the COAST/SET when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph switch. (32 km/h). ∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch. The set vehicle speed will increase by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada). LSD2510 ∙ Push, then quickly release the ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do How to change the set distance this, the set speed will increase by ap- to the vehicle ahead proximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada). The distance to the vehicle ahead can be To reset at a slower cruising speed, use selected at any time depending on the traf- one of the following methods: fic conditions. ∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the Each time the distance switch ᭺A is vehicle attains the desired speed, push pushed, the set distance will change to the COAST/SET switch and release it. long, middle, short and back to long again, in that sequence. ∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. The set vehicle speed will decrease by approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for Canada).

5-54 Starting and driving Approach warning NOTE: If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle The approach warning chime may sound ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve- and the system display may blink when hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys- the ICC sensor detects objects on the tem warns the driver with the chime and side of the vehicle or on the side of the ICC system display. Decelerate by depress- road. This may cause the ICC system to ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve- decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The hicle distance if: ICC sensor may detect these objects when the vehicle is driven on winding ∙ The chime sounds. roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when ∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator entering or exiting a curve. In these blinks. cases you will have to manually control the proper distance ahead of your ve- The warning chime may not sound in hicle. LSD2636 some cases when there is a short distance between vehicles. Some examples are: Also, the sensor sensitivity can be af- Distance Approximate distance at fected by vehicle operation (steering 60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)] ∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the maneuver or driving position in the lane) 1. Long 200 (60) same speed and the distance between or traffic or vehicle condition (for ex- vehicles is not changing. 2. Middle 150 (45) ample, if a vehicle is being driven with some damage). 3. Short 90 (30) ∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster and the distance between ve- ∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will hicles is increasing. change according to the vehicle speed. The higher the vehicle speed, the longer ∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle. the distance. The warning chime will not sound when: ∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance ∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles becomes “long.” (Each time the engine that are parked or moving slowly. is started, the initial setting becomes “long.”) ∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed, overriding the system. Starting and driving 5-55 ∙ As there is a performance limit to the distance control function, never rely solely on the ICC system. This system does not correct careless, inattentive or absentminded driving, or over- come poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal, depending on the distance to the vehicle ahead and the surrounding circumstances in order to maintain a safe distance between vehicles. ∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, SSD0252 the vehicle decelerates to a standstill within the limitations of the system. ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS ∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto- The system will cancel once it judges matically to road conditions. This sys- that the vehicle has come to a stand- WARNING tem should be used in evenly flowing still and sound a warning chime. To Listed below are the system limitations traffic. Do not use the system on roads prevent the vehicle from moving, the for the ICC system. Failure to operate with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in driver must depress the brake pedal. heavy rain or in fog. the vehicle in accordance with these ∙ Always pay attention to the operation system limitations could result in seri- of the vehicle and be ready to manu- ous injury or death. ally control the proper following dis- ∙ The ICC system is primarily intended tance. The ICC system may not be able for use on straight, dry, open roads to maintain the selected distance be- with light traffic. It is not advisable to tween vehicles (following distance) or use the ICC system in city traffic or selected vehicle speed under some congested areas. circumstances.

5-56 Starting and driving ∙ The system may not detect the ve- – Interference by other radar ∙ When excessively heavy baggage is hicle in front of you in certain road or sources loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of weather conditions. To avoid acci- your vehicle. ∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are dents, never use the ICC system under towing a trailer. The system may not The ICC system is designed to automati- the following conditions: detect a vehicle ahead. cally check the sensor’s operation within – On roads where the traffic is heavy the limitations of the system. ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a or there are sharp curves vehicle or object can unexpectedly The detection zone of the ICC sensor is – On slippery road surfaces such as come into the sensor detection zone limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de- on ice or snow, etc. and cause automatic braking. Always tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis- stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys- tance detection mode to maintain the se- – During bad weather (rain, fog, tem where not recommended in this lected distance from the vehicle ahead. snow, etc.) warning section. A vehicle ahead may move outside of the – When rain, snow or dirt adhere to detection zone due to its position within The radar sensor will not detect the follow- the bumper around the distance the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may ing objects: sensor not be detected in the same lane ahead if – On steep downhill roads (the ve- ∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles they are traveling offset from the centerline hicle may go beyond the set ve- of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the ∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway hicle speed and frequent braking lane ahead may not be detected until the may result in overheating the ∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane vehicle has completely moved into the brakes) lane. ∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel – On repeated uphill and downhill lane If this occurs, the ICC system may warn roads you by blinking the system indicator and The following are some conditions in which sounding the chime. The driver may – When traffic conditions make it dif- the sensor cannot properly detect a ve- have to manually control the proper dis- ficult to keep a proper distance be- hicle ahead and the system may not oper- tance away from the vehicle traveling tween vehicles because of fre- ate properly: ahead. quent acceleration or deceleration ∙ When snow or road spray from traveling vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

Starting and driving 5-57 SSD0253 When driving on some roads, such as wind- If this occurs, the ICC system may warn ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads you by blinking the system indicator and which are under construction, the ICC sen- sounding the chime unexpectedly. You sor may detect vehicles in a different lane, will have to manually control the proper or may temporarily not detect a vehicle distance away from the vehicle traveling traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC ahead. system to decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The detection of vehicles may also be affected by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

5-58 Starting and driving SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE The following are conditions in which the ICC system may be temporarily unavailable. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be able to maintain the selected following distance from the vehicle ahead. Condition A Under the following conditions, the ICC system is automatically canceled. A chime will sound and the system will not be able to be set: ∙ When the VDC system is turned off ∙ When the VDC or ABS operates ∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected and your vehicle is traveling below the speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) ∙ When the system judges the vehicle is at a standstill ∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or L (Low) (if so equipped) position ∙ When the parking brake is applied ∙ When a wheel slips LSD2574 Starting and driving 5-59 Action to take When the conditions listed above are no longer present, turn the system off using the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system back on to use the system. Condition B When the radar sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC system will automatically be canceled. If the sensor area is covered with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC system may not cancel and may not be LSD2592 LSD2395 able to maintain the selected following dis- Action to take Action to take tance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to If the warning light (orange) comes on, park If the warning light comes on, park the ve- check and clean the sensor area. the vehicle in a safe location and turn the hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off, The system warning light (orange) will illu- engine off. Check to see if the radar sensor restart the engine, resume driving and set minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar window is blocked. If the radar sensor win- the ICC system again. dow is blocked, remove the blocking mate- Obstruction” warning message will appear If it is not possible to set the system or rial. Restart the engine. If the warning light in the vehicle information display. the indicator stays on, it may indicate continues to illuminate, have the ICC sys- that the system is malfunctioning. Al- When driving on roads with limited road tem checked. It is recommended that you though the vehicle is still drivable under structures or buildings (for example, long visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to normal conditions, have the vehicle long walls), the system may illuminate the Condition C checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. system warning light (orange) and display When the ICC system is not operating the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction” properly, a chime sounds and the system message. warning light (orange) will come on. 5-60 Starting and driving ∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans- FCC Warning parent material) or install an accessory near the sensor. This could cause failure Changes or modifications not expressly or malfunction. approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the to operate the equipment. sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digi- ∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC bumper. Before customizing or restor- Rules. These limits are designed to provide ing the front bumper, it is recom- reasonable protection against harmful in- mended that you contact a NISSAN terference when the equipment is oper- dealer. ated in a commercial environment. This Radio frequency statement equipment generates, uses, and can radi- LSD2698 ate radio frequency energy and, if not in- FCC Notice SYSTEM MAINTENANCE stalled and used in accordance with the For USA instruction manual, may cause harmful in- The sensor for the ICC system ᭺A is located terference to radio communications. Op- on the front of the vehicle. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. eration of this equipment in a residential To keep the ICC system operating properly, area is likely to cause harmful interference be sure to observe the following: Operation is subject to the following two in which case the user will be required to conditions: correct the interference at his own ex- ∙ Always keep the sensor area clean. 1. This device may not cause harmful in- pense. ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas terference, and Radio frequency radiation exposure infor- around the sensor. Do not touch or re- mation: move the screw located on the sensor. 2. This device must accept any interfer- Doing so could cause failure or mal- ence received, including interference This equipment complies with FCC radia- that may cause undesired operation. function. If the sensor is damaged due tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon- to an accident, it is recommended that trolled environment. you contact a NISSAN dealer. Starting and driving 5-61 AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped)

This equipment should be installed and WARNING operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body. Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB The transmitter must not be co-located or system could result in serious injury or operating in conjunction with any other an- death. tenna or transmitter. ∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid For Canada to the driver. It is not a replacement This device complies with Industry Canada for the driver’s attention to traffic licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation conditions or responsibility to drive is subject to the following two conditions: safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous 1. This device may not cause interference, driving techniques. 2. This device must accept any interfer- ∙ The AEB system does not function in LSD2698 ence, including interference that may all driving, traffic, weather and road A cause undesired operation of the de- conditions. The AEB system uses a radar sensor ᭺ vice. located behind the lower grille of the front The AEB system can assist the driver when bumper to measure the distance to the there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the same lane. vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

5-62 Starting and driving 1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator 2. AEB emergency warning indicator 3. AEB system warning light AEB SYSTEM OPERATION The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual (yellow) and audible alert. If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning (red) and audible warning and also applies partial braking. If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking automatically.

LSD3278 Starting and driving 5-63 NOTE: The vehicle’s brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system. Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function. The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions: ∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision. ∙ When the accelerator pedal is depressed. ∙ When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead. If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD3290 5-64 Starting and driving TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS – Interference by other radar ON/OFF sources. WARNING Perform the following steps to turn the AEB – Snow or road spray from traveling system ON or OFF. Listed below are the system limitations vehicles. for the AEB system. Failure to operate 1. Press the button until “Settings” the vehicle in accordance with these – If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g., motorcycle). displays in the vehicle information dis- system limitations could result in seri- play. Use the button to select ous injury or death. – When driving on a steep downhill “Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN- ∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve- slope or roads with sharp curves. TER button. hicles under all conditions. ∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the AEB system may unexpectedly apply 2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN- ∙ The radar sensor does not detect the partial braking. When acceleration is TER button. following objects: necessary, continue to depress the ac- 3. Select “Emergency Brake” and press – Pedestrians, animals or obstacles celerator pedal to override the system. in the roadway. the ENTER button. – Oncoming vehicles. ∙ Braking distances increase on slip- When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB pery surfaces. system warning light illuminates. – Crossing vehicles. ∙ The system is designed to automatically ∙ The radar sensor has some perfor- NOTE: check the sensor’s functionality, within mance limitations. If a stationary ve- certain limitations. The system may not The AEB system will be automatically hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the AEB detect some forms of obstructions of turned on when the engine is restarted. system will not function when the ve- the sensor area such as ice, snow, stick- hicle is driven at speeds over approxi- ers, etc. In these cases, the system may mately 50 mph (80 km/h). not be able to warn the driver properly. ∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve- Be sure that you check, clean and clear hicle ahead in the following the sensor area regularly. conditions: ∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the – Dirt, ice, snow or other material warning chime sound, and the chime covering the radar sensor. may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-65 SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra- dar Obstruction” warning message will appear in the vehicle information display. When driving on roads with limited road structures or buildings (for example, long bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to LSD2571 long walls), the system may illuminate the 5-66 Starting and driving AEB system warning light (orange) and dis- ∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the play the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruc- sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This tion” message. could cause failure or malfunction. Action to take ∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restor- If the AEB system warning light (orange) ing the front bumper, it is recom- comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar FCC Notice cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, For USA and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB sys- This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC tem checked. It is recommended that you Rules. Operation is subject to the following visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. two conditions: SYSTEM MALFUNCTION LSD2698 1. This device may not cause harmful in- SYSTEM MAINTENANCE terference, and If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will The sensor ᭺A is located on the front of the 2. This device must accept any interfer- sound, the AEB system warning light (or- vehicle. ence received, including interference ange) will illuminate and the warning mes- that may cause undesired operation. To keep the system operating properly, be sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle sure to observe the following: FCC Warning information display. ∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front Changes or modifications made to this Action to take bumper clean. equipment not expressly approved by the If the AEB system warning light (orange) party responsible for compliance could ∙ Do not strike or damage the areas comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe loca- void the user’s authority to operate the around the sensor. tion, turn the engine off and restart the equipment. engine. If the warning light continues to ∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi- illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It lar objects on the front bumper near is recommended that you visit a NISSAN the sensor area. This could cause failure dealer for this service. or malfunction. Starting and driving 5-67 BREAK-IN SCHEDULE FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

For Canada CAUTION Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most This device complies with Industry Canada During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), fuel economy from your vehicle. licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation follow these recommendations to ob- is subject to the following two conditions: tain maximum engine performance 1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application 1. This device may not cause interference, and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to ∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops 2. This device must accept any interfer- follow these recommendations may re- ence, including interference that may sult in shortened engine life and re- ∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and cause undesired operation of the de- duced engine performance. brake application whenever possible vice. ∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con- ∙ Maintain constant speed while com- Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR stant speed, either fast or slow, and do muting and coast whenever possible d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar- not run the engine over 4,000 rpm. 2. Maintain Constant Speed eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv- ∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any ∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and antes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de gear. minimize stops brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil ∙ Avoid quick starts. doit accepter tout brouillage radioélec- ∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic trique subi, même si le brouillage est sus- ∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos- lights allows you to reduce your num- ceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionne- sible. ber of stops ment. ∙ Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency

5-68 Starting and driving 3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher 5. Use Cruise Control 9. Winter Warm Up Vehicle Speeds ∙ Using cruise control during highway ∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact ∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more driving helps maintain a steady to fuel economy speed efficient to open windows to cool the ∙ Vehicles typically need no more than vehicle due to reduced engine load ∙ Cruise control is particularly effective 30 seconds of idling at start-up to ∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more in providing fuel savings when driving effectively circulate the engine oil be- efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle on flat terrains fore driving due to increased aerodynamic drag 6. Plan for the Shortest Route ∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly ∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin ∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to while driving versus idling when the A/C is on reduces cooling determine the best route to save load time 10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool 4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis- 7. Avoid Idling ∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking tances area or in the shade whenever pos- ∙ Shutting off your engine when safe sible ∙ Observing the speed limit and not for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where saves fuel and reduces emissions ∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening legally allowed) can improve fuel effi- the windows will help to reduce the 8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll ciency due to reduced aerodynamic inside temperature faster, resulting in Roads drag reduced demand on your A/C sys- ∙ Maintaining a safe following distance ∙ Automated passes permit drivers to tem use special lanes to maintain cruis- behind other vehicles reduces un- 11. ECO Mode necessary braking ing speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting ∙ The ECO mode helps to enhance the ∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate fuel economy by controlling the en- changes in speed permits reduced gine and Continuously Variable braking and smooth acceleration Transmission (if so equipped) opera- changes tion automatically to avoid rapid ac- ∙ Select a gear range suitable to road celeration. conditions Starting and driving 5-69 INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. ∙ Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance. ∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy. ∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and consumer SSD0488 information” section of this manual. WARNING ∙ Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the ∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over transmission placed in P (Park) for flammable materials such as dry Continuously Variable Transmission grass, waste paper or rags. They may (CVT) models or in an appropriate ignite and cause a fire. gear for manual transmission (M/T) models. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.

5-70 Starting and driving POWER STEERING

∙ Never leave the engine running while 3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling WARNING the vehicle is unattended. into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as ∙ If the engine is not running or is ∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death illustrated. turned off while driving, the power as- through unintended operation of the sist for the steering will not work. 1 vehicle and/or its systems, do not ∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB ᭺: Steering will be harder to operate. leave children, people who require the Turn the wheels into the curb and ∙ When the power steering warning assistance of others or pets unat- move the vehicle forward until the curb light illuminates with the engine run- tended in your vehicle. Additionally, side wheel gently touches the curb. ning, there will be no power assist for the temperature inside a closed ve- the steering. You will still have control hicle on a warm day can quickly be- ∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB ᭺2 : of the vehicle, but the steering will be come high enough to cause a signifi- Turn the wheels away from the curb harder to operate. Have the power cant risk of injury or death to people and move the vehicle back until the steering system checked. It is recom- and pets. curb side wheel gently touches the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer 1. Firmly apply the parking brake. curb. for this service. 2. M/T models ∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO The power steering system is designed to CURB ᭺3 : provide power assist while driving to oper- Place the shift lever in the R (Reverse) ate the steering wheel with light force. position. When parking on an uphill Turn the wheels toward the side of the grade, place the shift lever in 1st gear. road so the vehicle will move away When the steering wheel is operated re- from the center of the road if it moves. peatedly or continuously while parking or CVT models 4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK driving at a very low speed, the power as- Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position and remove the key. sist for the steering wheel will be reduced. position. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel op- Starting and driving 5-71 BRAKE SYSTEM

erations that could cause the power steer- The brake system has two separate hy- WARNING ing system to overheat. draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels. ∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be You may hear a noise when the steering careful when braking, accelerating or wheel is operated quickly. However, this is BRAKE PRECAUTIONS downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac- not a malfunction. celerating could cause the wheels to If the power steering warning light illumi- Vacuum assisted brakes skid and result in an accident. nates while the engine is running, it may The brake booster aids braking by using ∙ If the engine is not running or is indicate the power steering system is not engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you turned off while driving, the power as- functioning properly and may need servic- can stop the vehicle by depressing the sist for the brakes will not work. Brak- ing. Have the power steering system brake pedal. However, greater foot pres- ing will be harder. checked. It is recommended that you visit a sure on the brake pedal will be required to NISSAN dealer for this service. stop the vehicle and stopping distance will Wet brakes When the power steering warning light illu- be longer. When the vehicle is washed or driven minates with the engine running, there will Using the brakes through water, the brakes may get wet. As be no power assist for the steering, but you a result, your braking distance will be lon- will still have control of the vehicle. At this Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal ger and the vehicle may pull to one side time, greater steering effort is required to while driving. This will overheat the brakes, during braking. operate the steering wheel, especially in wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce sharp turns and at low speeds. To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe gas mileage. For additional information, refer to “Power speed while lightly pressing the brake steering warning light” in the “Instruments To help reduce brake wear and to prevent pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until and controls” section of this manual. the brakes from overheating, reduce speed the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving and downshift to a lower gear before going the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes down a slope or long grade. Overheated function correctly. brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control. Parking brake break-in Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake 5-72 Starting and driving shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in – When installing a spare tire, make WARNING order to assure the best braking performance. sure that it is the proper size and Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so type as specified on the Tire and This procedure is described in the vehicle may result in increased stopping Loading Information label. For ad- service manual. It is recommended that distances. you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ditional information, refer to “Tire and Loading Information label” in Self-test feature ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS) the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, WARNING – For additional information, refer to hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The ∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it- computer has a built-in diagnostic feature it cannot prevent accidents resulting yourself” section of this manual. that tests the system each time you start from careless or dangerous driving The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels techniques. It can help maintain ve- the engine and move the vehicle at a low hicle control during braking on slip- do not lock during hard braking or when speed in forward or reverse. When the self- pery surfaces. Remember that stop- braking on slippery surfaces. The system test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise ping distances on slippery surfaces detects the rotation speed at each wheel and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. will be longer than on normal sur- and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre- This is normal and does not indicate a mal- faces even with ABS. Stopping dis- vent each wheel from locking and sliding. function. If the computer senses a mal- tances may also be longer on rough, By preventing each wheel from locking, the function, it switches the ABS off and illumi- gravel or snow covered roads, or if you system helps the driver maintain steering nates the ABS warning light on the are using tire chains. Always maintain control and helps to minimize swerving instrument panel. The brake system then a safe distance from the vehicle in and spinning on slippery surfaces. operates normally, but without anti-lock front of you. Ultimately, the driver is assistance. responsible for safety. Using the system If the ABS warning light illuminates during ∙ Tire type and condition may also af- Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. the self-test or while driving, have the ve- fect braking effectiveness. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady hicle checked. It is recommended that you pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. – When replacing tires, install the Anti-lock Braking System will operate to specified size of tires on all four prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer wheels. the vehicle to avoid obstacles. Starting and driving 5-73 VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM

Normal operation WARNING The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper- The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist Under certain driving conditions, the VDC ates at speeds above3-6mph(5- braking operation and is not a collision system helps to perform the following 10 km/h). The speed varies according to warning or avoidance device. It is the functions: road conditions. driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at ∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce When the ABS senses that one or more all times. wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel wheels are close to locking up, the actuator so power is transferred to a non- rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres- slipping drive wheel on the same axle. sure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa- ∙ Controls brake pressure and engine tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise output to reduce drive wheel slip based from under the hood or feel a vibration on vehicle speed (traction control func- from the actuator when it is operating. This tion). is normal and indicates that the ABS is op- ∙ Controls brake pressure at individual erating properly. However, the pulsation wheels and engine output to help the may indicate that road conditions are haz- driver maintain control of the vehicle in ardous and extra care is required while the following conditions: driving. – Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol- BRAKE ASSIST low the steered path despite in- When the force applied to the brake pedal creased steering input) exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is – Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due activated generating greater braking force to certain road or driving conditions) than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force. The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.

5-74 Starting and driving When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off When the VDC system operates, the ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- indicator light in the instrument panel the system, the VDC system still operates sion. If suspension parts such as flashes to note the following: to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- transferring power to a non-slipping drive ∙ The road may be slippery or the system bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are wheel. The indicator light flashes if may determine some action is required not NISSAN recommended for your this occurs. All other VDC functions are off vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, to help keep the vehicle on the steered the VDC system may not operate path. and the indicator light will not flash. The VDC system is automatically reset to properly. This could adversely affect ∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake on when the ignition switch is placed in the vehicle handling performance, and pedal and hear a noise or vibration from OFF position then back to the ON position. the indicator light may flash or under the hood. This is normal and indi- the indicator light may cates that the VDC system is working The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea- illuminate. properly. ture that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle for- ∙ If brake related parts such as brake ∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When pads, rotors and calipers are not road conditions. the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk NISSAN recommended or are ex- For additional information, refer to “Slip in- noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake tremely deteriorated, the VDC system dicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic Control pedal. This is normal and is not an indica- may not operate properly and (VDC) OFF indicator light” in the ”Instru- tion of a malfunction. the indicator light may ments and controls” section of this manual. illuminate. WARNING ∙ If engine control related parts are not If a malfunction occurs in the system, ∙ The VDC system is designed to help NISSAN recommended or are ex- the indicator light comes on in the the driver maintain stability but does tremely deteriorated, the indi- instrument panel. The VDC system auto- not prevent accidents due to abrupt cator light may illuminate. matically turns off when the indicator light steering operation at high speeds or is off. by careless or dangerous driving The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and VDC system. The indicator light and be especially careful when driving and the AEB system warning light illuminates to cornering on slippery surfaces and al- indicate the VDC system is off. ways drive carefully. Starting and driving 5-75 ∙ When driving on extremely inclined RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP ∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen- surfaces such as higher banked cor- The system gradually adjusts braking sion. If suspension parts such as ners, the VDC system may not operate power during normal braking to help pro- shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta- properly and the indicator light vide an enhanced brake feel. bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your may flash or the indicator light BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION may illuminate. Do not drive on these vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, types of roads. During braking while driving through turns, the VDC system may not operate the system optimizes the distribution of properly. This could adversely affect ∙ When driving on an unstable surface vehicle handling performance, and such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn. the indicator light may flash or ramp, the indicator light may the indicator light may flash or the indicator light may WARNING illuminate. illuminate. This is not a malfunction. Restart the engine after driving onto ∙ The VDC system is designed to help ∙ If brake related parts such as brake a stable surface. the driver maintain stability but does pads, rotors and calipers are not not prevent accidents due to abrupt NISSAN recommended or are ex- ∙ If wheels or tires other than the steering operation at high speeds or tremely deteriorated, the VDC system NISSAN recommended ones are used, by careless or dangerous driving may not operate properly and the VDC system may not operate techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and the indicator light may properly and the indicator light be especially careful when driving and illuminate. may flash or the indicator light cornering on slippery surfaces and al- ∙ If engine control related parts are not may illuminate. ways drive carefully. NISSAN recommended or are ex- ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for tremely deteriorated, the indi- winter tires or tire chains on a snow cator light may illuminate. covered road.

5-76 Starting and driving COLD WEATHER DRIVING

∙ When driving on extremely inclined FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply surfaces such as higher banked cor- If the vehicle is to be left outside without de-icer through the key hole. If the lock ners, the VDC system may not operate antifreeze, drain the cooling system, includ- properly and the indicator light becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole, or use the re- ing the engine block. Refill before operating may flash or the indicator light the vehicle. For additional information, refer may illuminate. Do not drive on these mote keyless entry key fob or the NISSAN Intelligent Key®. to “Changing engine coolant” in the “Do-it- types of roads. yourself” section of this manual. ANTIFREEZE ∙ When driving on an unstable surface TIRE EQUIPMENT such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or In the winter when it is anticipated that the ramp, the indicator light may temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), 1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to flash or the indicator light may check the antifreeze to assure proper win- provide superior performance on dry illuminate. This is not a malfunction. ter protection. For additional information, pavement. However, the performance Restart the engine after driving onto refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do- of these tires will be substantially re- a stable surface. it-yourself” section of this manual. duced in snowy and icy conditions. If ∙ If wheels or tires other than the BATTERY you operate your vehicle on snowy or NISSAN recommended ones are used, icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use the VDC system may not operate If the battery is not fully charged during of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES properly and the indicator light extremely cold weather conditions, the on all four wheels. It is recommended battery fluid may freeze and damage the may flash or the indicator light that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, may illuminate. type, size, speed rating and availability the battery should be checked regularly. information. ∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for For additional information, refer to “Battery” winter tires or tire chains on a snow in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this 2. For additional traction on icy roads, covered road. manual. studded tires may be used. However, some U.S. states and Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state and provincial laws before installing studded tires.

Starting and driving 5-77 Skid and traction capabilities of studded DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE ∙ Do not use the cruise control (if so snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be equipped) on slippery roads. poorer than that of non-studded snow WARNING tires. ∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust ∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), gases under your vehicle. Keep snow 3. Tire chains may be used. For additional very cold snow or ice can be slick and clear of the exhaust pipe and from information, refer to “Tire chains” in the very hard to drive on. The vehicle will around your vehicle. “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. have much less traction or “grip” un- SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT der these conditions. Try to avoid driv- ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so ing on wet ice until the road is salted equipped) It is recommended that the following items or sanded. be carried in the vehicle during winter: Engine block heaters are used to assist ∙ Whatever the condition, drive with with cold temperature starting. ∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re- caution. Accelerate and slow down move ice and snow from the windows with care. If accelerating or down- The engine block heater should be used and wiper blades. shifting too fast, the drive wheels will when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) lose even more traction. or lower. ∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support. ∙ Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be WARNING ∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow- started sooner than on dry pavement. ∙ Do not use your engine block heater drifts. ∙ Allow greater following distances on with an ungrounded electrical system ∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the slippery roads. or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be windshield-washer fluid reservoir. seriously injured by an electrical ∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). shock if you use an ungrounded These may appear on an otherwise connection. clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before ∙ Disconnect and properly store the en- reaching it. Try not to brake while on gine block heater cord before starting the ice, and avoid any sudden steering the engine. Damage to the cord could maneuvers. result in an electrical shock and can cause serious injury.

5-78 Starting and driving ∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged 6. Before starting the engine, unplug and extension cord rated for at least 10 A. properly store the cord to keep it away Plug the extension cord into a Ground from moving parts. Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the proper extension cord or a grounded outlet can result in a fire or electrical shock and cause serious personal injury. To use the engine block heater: 1. Turn the engine off. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block heater cord. 3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension cord. 4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet. 5. The engine block heater must be plugged in for at least2-4hours, depending on outside temperatures, to properly warm the engine coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the engine block heater on.

Starting and driving 5-79 MEMO

5-80 Starting and driving 6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ...... 6-2 Jump starting ...... 6-9 Emergency engine shut off Push starting ...... 6-11 (push-button ignition models only) ...... 6-2 If your vehicle overheats...... 6-11 Flat tire ...... 6-3 Towing your vehicle ...... 6-12 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Towing recommended by NISSAN ...... 6-12 (TPMS)...... 6-3 Vehicle recovery Changing a flat tire ...... 6-3 (freeing a stuck vehicle)...... 6-14 HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF (push-button ignition models only)

∙ Turn signals do not work when the To shut off the engine in an emergency hazard warning flasher lights are on. situation while driving, perform the following procedure: The flashers will operate with the ignition ∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch placed in any position. switch three consecutive times in less Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use than 1.5 seconds, or of the hazard warning flasher switch ∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition while driving. switch for more than 2 seconds.

LIC0394 Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING ∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road. ∙ Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.

6-2 In case of emergency FLAT TIRE

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING WARNING ∙ When replacing a wheel without TPMS SYSTEM (TPMS) such as the spare tire, TPMS will not ∙ Radio waves could adversely affect function and the low tire pressure electric medical equipment. Those This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni- warning light will flash for approxi- who use a pacemaker should contact tors tire pressure of all tires except the mately one minute. The light will re- the electric medical equipment spare. When the low tire pressure warning main on after one minute. Have your manufacturer for the possible influ- light is lit, and the “CHECK TIRE PRES” (ve- tires replaced and/or TPMS system ences before use. hicles without a vehicle information dis- reset as soon as possible. It is recom- play) also appears in the trip computer or ∙ If the low tire pressure warning light mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer the “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” (vehicles illuminates while driving, avoid sud- for these services. with a vehicle information display) appears den steering maneuvers or abrupt ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- in the vehicle information display, one or braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off nally specified by NISSAN could affect the road to a safe location and stop more of your tires is significantly under- the proper operation of the TPMS. inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv- low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and ing with under-inflated tires may per- ∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol warn you of it by the low tire pressure warn- manently damage the tires and in- tire sealant into the tires, as this may ing light. This system will activate only crease the likelihood of tire failure. cause a malfunction of the tire pres- when the vehicle is driven at speeds above Serious vehicle damage could occur sure sensors. and may lead to an accident and could 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional informa- result in serious personal injury. CHANGING A FLAT TIRE tion, refer to “Warning lights, indicator lights Check the tire pressure for all four If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions and audible reminders” in the “Instruments tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the below: and controls” section, and “Tire Pressure recommended COLD tire pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting shown on the Tire and Loading Infor- Stopping the vehicle and driving” sections of this manual. mation label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If you have a 1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as away from traffic. soon as possible. 2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

In case of emergency 6-3 3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Shift the manual transmission into R (Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park). 4. Turn off the engine. 5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance. 6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING LCE2142 LCE2394 Getting the spare tire and tools ∙ Make sure the parking brake is se- A. Blocks curely applied and the manual trans- B. Flat tire 1. Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor car- mission is shifted into R (Reverse), or Blocking wheels peting and spare tire cover ᭺A . Remove the CVT is shifted into P (Park). the jack and the spare tire. Place suitable blocks at both the front and ∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is 2. To remove the jack, take off the strap back of the wheel diagonally opposite the on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is and lift out. If necessary, remove the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving hazardous. spare tire first to easily access the jack when it is jacked up. ∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic strap. is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro- WARNING fessional road assistance. Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.

6-4 In case of emergency Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.

LCE2395 SCE0630 3. Turn the clamp counterclockwise and Removing wheel cover (if so remove to release the spare tire. equipped)

CAUTION Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury. To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod ᭺1 as illustrated. Apply cloth ᭺2 between the wheel and jack rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.

In case of emergency 6-5 ∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support. ∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary. ∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack. ∙ Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials. ∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the CE1089 vehicle while it is on the jack. Jacking up vehicle and removing ∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s) the damaged tire off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move. WARNING ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands. ∙ Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change. 6-6 In case of emergency SCE0002 WCE0056 Always refer to the illustrations for the cor- jack-up point. Align the jack head be- Installing the spare tire rect placement and jack-up points for your tween the two notches in the front or specific vehicle model and jack type. the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of The spare tire is designed for emergency the jack head between the notches as use. For additional information, refer to Carefully read the caution label attached shown. “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” to the jack body and the following in- section of this manual. structions. The jack should be used on firm and level ground. 1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface 1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two between the wheel and hub. turns by turning counterclockwise with 3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove lever and rod with both hands. Carefully 2. Carefully put the spare tire on and the wheel nuts until the tire is off the raise the vehicle until the tire clears the tighten the wheel nuts finger tight. ground. ground. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the tire. 3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten 2. Place the jack directly under the wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the jack-up point as illustrated so the top sequence illustrated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D , ᭺E ) of the jack contacts the vehicle at the until they are tight. In case of emergency 6-7 4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres- touches the ground. Then, with the sure. wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel COLD pressure: After vehicle has been nuts securely in the sequence illus- parked for 3 hours or more or driven less trated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D , ᭺E ). Lower the than 1 mile (1.6 km). vehicle completely. COLD tire pressures are shown on the WARNING Tire and Loading Information Label. ∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly After adjusting tire pressure to the COLD tightened wheel nuts can cause the tire pressure, the display of the tire pres- wheel to become loose or come off. sure information may show higher pres- This could cause an accident. sure than the COLD tire pressure after the vehicle has been driven more than ∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel 1 mile (1.6 km). studs or nuts. This could cause the LCE2392 nuts to become loose. This is because the tire pressurizes as 6. Install the jack in its storage area and the tire temperature rises. This does not tighten the jack strap. ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the indicate a system malfunction. vehicle has been driven for 600 miles 7. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, 5. Securely store the flat tire in the vehicle. floor carpeting over the damaged tire. etc.). 8. Close the trunk. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval. 6-8 In case of emergency JUMP STARTING

To start your engine with a booster battery, WARNING ∙ Whenever working on or near a bat- the instructions and precautions below tery, always wear suitable eye protec- ∙ Always make sure that the spare tire must be followed. tors (for example, goggles or indus- and jacking equipment are properly trial safety spectacles) and remove secured after use. Such items can be- WARNING rings, metal bands, or any other jew- come dangerous projectiles in an ac- elry. Do not lean over the battery cident or sudden stop. ∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting when jump starting. ∙ The spare tire is designed for emer- in severe injury or death. It could also ∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen gency use. Refer to specific instruc- damage your vehicle. battery. It could explode and cause tions under the heading “Wheels and serious injury. tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of ∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always this manual. present in the vicinity of the battery. ∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine Keep all sparks and flames away from cooling fan. It could come on at any the battery. time. Keep hands and other objects ∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into away from it. contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the con- tacted area with water. ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of children. ∙ The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-9 CAUTION ∙ Always connect positive (ϩ) to positive (ϩ) and negative (Ϫ) to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery. ∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal. 6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle LCE2223 and let it run for a few minutes. WARNING 2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift 7. Keep the engine speed of the booster lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmis- vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the Always follow the instructions below. sion) or to P (Park) (CVT). Switch off all engine of the vehicle being jump Failure to do so could result in damage unnecessary electrical systems (lights, started. to the charging system and cause per- heater, air conditioner (if so equipped), sonal injury. etc.). CAUTION 1. If the booster battery is in another ve- 3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK Do not keep the starter motor engaged hicle, position the two vehicles to bring position. for more than 10 seconds. If the engine their batteries near each other. does not start right away, place the ig- 4. Ensure the vent caps are level and nition switch in the OFF position and Do not allow the two vehicles to tight. wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again. touch. 5. Connect the jumper cables in the se- 8. After starting the engine, carefully dis- quence illustrated (᭺A , ᭺B , ᭺C , ᭺D ). connect the negative cable and then the positive cable.

6-10 In case of emergency PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

CAUTION If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by 3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen an extremely high temperature gauge for steam or coolant escaping from the ∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The reading), or if you feel a lack of engine radiator before opening the hood. (If three-way catalyst may be damaged. power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the steam or coolant is escaping, turn off ∙ Continuously Variable Transmission following steps. the engine.) Do not open the hood fur- (CVT) models and Manual Transmis- ther until no steam or coolant can be sion (M/T) cannot be push-started or WARNING seen. tow-started. Attempting to do so may ∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle 4. Open the engine hood. cause transmission damage overheats. Doing so could cause en- ∙ For Manual Transmission (M/T) mod- gine damage or a vehicle fire. WARNING els, never try to start the vehicle by ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, If steam or water is coming from the towing it. When the engine starts, the never remove the radiator cap while forward surge could cause the vehicle engine, stand clear to prevent getting the engine is still hot. When the radia- burned. to collide with the tow vehicle. tor cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing 5. Visually check drive belts for damage serious injury. or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and ∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com- radiator should not leak water. If cooling out. ant is leaking, the water pump belt is 1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap- missing or loose, or the cooling fan ply the parking brake and move the does not run, stop the engine. shift lever to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P (Park) (CVT). WARNING Do not stop the engine. Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact 2. Turn off the air conditioner (if so with, or get caught in, engine belts or equipped). Open all the windows, move the engine cooling fan. The engine cool- the heater or air conditioner tempera- ing fan can start at any time. ture control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed. In case of emergency 6-11 TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6. After the engine cools down, check the When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin- CAUTION coolant level in the engine coolant res- cial in Canada) and local regulations for ervoir with the engine running. Add towing must be followed. Incorrect towing ∙ When towing, make sure that the coolant to the engine coolant reservoir equipment could damage your vehicle. transmission, axles, steering system if necessary. Have your vehicle re- Towing instructions are available from a and powertrain are in working condi- paired. It is recommended that you visit NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are tion. If any of these conditions apply, a NISSAN dealer for this service. generally familiar with the applicable laws dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be and procedures for towing. To assure used. proper towing and to prevent accidental ∙ Always attach safety chains before damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom- towing. mends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service For additional information, refer to “Flat operator carefully read the following pre- towing” in the “Technical and consumer in- cautions: formation” section of this manual.

WARNING TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN ∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed. NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi- ∙ Never get under your vehicle after it tional information, refer to the diagrams in has been lifted by a tow truck. this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.

6-12 In case of emergency ∙ When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies: – Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism). LCE2345 Two-Wheel Drive models with CAUTION Continuously Variable ∙ Never tow CVT models with the front Transmission (CVT) wheels on the ground or four wheels NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expen- towed with the driving (front) wheels off the sive damage to the transmission. If it ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed is necessary to tow the vehicle with truck as illustrated. the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.

In case of emergency 6-13 – Move the transmission shift lever to the N (Neutral) position – Observe the following restricted towing speeds and distances for manual transmission models only: Speed: Below 60 mph (97 km/h) Distance: Less than 500 miles (805 km) When towing long distances or speeds in excess of 60 mph (97 km/h), remove the propeller shaft before towing to prevent damage to the transmission. For additional LCE2346 information, it is recommended that you Two-Wheel Drive models with gine after every 500 miles of towing may visit a NISSAN dealer. manual transmission cause damage to the transmission’s internal parts. VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a NISSAN recommends that towing dollies stuck vehicle) be used when towing your vehicle or place CAUTION the vehicle on the flatbed truck as illus- Failure to follow these guidelines can WARNING trated. result in severe transmission damage. To avoid vehicle damage, serious per- If you must use a pull behind tow truck put ∙ If you have to tow manual transmis- sonal injury or death when recovering a the manual transmission in N (Neutral). sion models with the rear wheels on stuck vehicle: Your vehicle speed should never exceed the ground (if you do not use towing ∙ Contact a professional towing service 60 mph (97 km/h) when towing your ve- dollies) or four wheels on the ground: to recover the vehicle if you have any hicle. After towing 500 miles, start and idle – Always release the parking brake. questions regarding the recovery the engine with the transmission in N (Neu- procedure. tral) for two minutes. Failure to idle the en- 6-14 In case of emergency ∙ Tow chains or cables must be at- Rocking a stuck vehicle 4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and tached only to main structural mem- backward. bers of the vehicle. WARNING ∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re- ∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to ∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle. verse) and D (Drive) (Continuously tow or free a stuck vehicle. Variable Transmission models) or 1st ∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed. (Low) and R (Reverse) (manual trans- ∙ Only use devices specifically designed This could cause them to explode and mission models). for vehicle recovery and follow the result in serious injury. Parts of your manufacturer’s instructions. vehicle could also overheat and be ∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos- damaged. sible to maintain the rocking motion. ∙ Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the ve- If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, ∙ Release the accelerator pedal before hicle. Never pull at an angle. etc., use the following procedure: shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive) (Continuously Variable Trans- ∙ Route recovery devices so they do not 1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control mission models) or 1st (Low) and R touch any part of the vehicle except (VDC) System. (Reverse) (manual transmission the attachment point. 2. Make sure the area in front and behind models). If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, the vehicle is clear of obstructions. ∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph etc., use a tow strap or other device de- 3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to (55 km/h). signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al- clear an area around the front tires. ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc- 5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a tions for the recovery device. few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15 MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency 7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ...... 7-2 Air fresheners ...... 7-6 Washing...... 7-2 Floor mats (if so equipped) ...... 7-6 Waxing ...... 7-2 Seatbelts...... 7-7 Removing spots ...... 7-3 Corrosion protection ...... 7-8 Underbody ...... 7-3 Most common factors contributing to Glass ...... 7-3 vehicle corrosion ...... 7-8 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...... 7-3 Environmental factors influence the Chromeparts...... 7-4 rate of corrosion...... 7-8 Tire dressings ...... 7-4 Protect your vehicle from corrosion ...... 7-8 Cleaning interior...... 7-4 CLEANING EXTERIOR

In order to maintain the appearance of WASHING ∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough your vehicle, it is important to take proper cloths, such as washing mitts. Care care of it. Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us- must be taken when removing To protect the paint surfaces, wash your ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not vehicle as soon as you can: general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed scratched or damaged. ∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam- with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water. age from acid rain. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of CAUTION ∙ After driving on coastal roads. clean water. ∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in ∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird Inside edges, seams and folds on the the detergent. Some car washes, es- doors, hatches and hood are particularly droppings, tree sap, metal particles or pecially brushless ones, use some bugs get on the paint surface. vulnerable to the effects of road salt. There- acid for cleaning. The acid may react fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. ∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur- with some plastic vehicle compo- Take care that the drain holes in the lower nents, causing them to crack. This face. edge of the door are open. Spray water could affect their appearance, and under the body and in the wheel wells to Whenever possible, store or park your ve- also could cause them not to function hicle inside a garage or in a covered area. properly. Always check with your car loosen the dirt and wash away road salt. When it is necessary to park outside, park in wash to confirm that acid is not used. A damp chamois can be used to dry the a shady area or protect the vehicle with a ∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong vehicle to avoid water spots. body cover. household soap, strong chemical de- WAXING Be careful not to scratch the paint sur- tergents, gasoline or solvents. Regular waxing protects the paint surface face when putting on or removing the ∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- body cover. and helps retain new vehicle appearance. light or while the vehicle body is hot, Polishing is recommended to remove as the surface may become built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath- water-spotted. ered appearance before re-applying wax. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to assist you in choosing the proper product. 7-2 Appearance and care ∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough The high-mounted stop light must be washing. Follow the instructions sup- properly reinstalled before driving your ve- plied with the wax. hicle. ∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra- Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and sives, cutting compounds or cleaners dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor- that may damage the vehicle finish. mal for glass to become coated with a film Machine compounding or aggressive pol- after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin- Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks. remove this film.

REMOVING SPOTS CAUTION Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, When cleaning the inside of the win- insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible dows, do not use sharp-edged tools, from the surface of the paint to avoid last- WAI0005 abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based ing damage or staining. Special cleaning GLASS disinfectant cleaners. They could dam- products are available at a NISSAN dealer age the electrical conductors, radio an- or any automotive accessory store. It is When cleaning the rear window, it may be tenna elements or rear window de- recommended that you visit a NISSAN easier to clean if the inside high-mounted froster elements. dealer for these products. stop light (if so equipped) is removed first. ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so UNDERBODY Be careful when removing the high- equipped) mounted stop light to reduce the risk of In areas where road salt is used in winter, it damaging the high-mounted stop light is necessary to clean the underbody regu- Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from wires. dampened in a mild soap solution, espe- building up and causing the acceleration of To remove the high-mounted stop light: cially during winter months in areas where corrosion on the underbody and suspen- road salt is used. If not removed, road salt sion. Before the winter period and again in ᭺1 Push toward rear of vehicle. can discolor the wheels. the spring, the underseal must be checked ᭺2 Lift to remove. and, if necessary, re-treated.

Appearance and care 7-3 CLEANING INTERIOR

CAUTION If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the Occasionally remove loose dust from the following precautions: interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a Follow the directions below to avoid vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe ∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The staining or discoloring the wheels: the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur- coating on the tire dissolves more easily faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in ∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong than with an oil-based tire dressing. acid or alkali contents to clean the mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a wheels. ∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help dry, soft cloth. prevent it from entering the tire Regular care and cleaning is required in ∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the tread/grooves (where it would be diffi- order to maintain the appearance of the wheels when they are hot. The wheel cult to remove). temperature should be the same as leather (if so equipped). ∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry ambient temperature. Before using any fabric protector, read the towel. Make sure the tire dressing is manufacturer’s recommendations. Some ∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove completely removed from the tire fabric protectors contain chemicals that the cleaner within 15 minutes after tread/grooves. the cleaner is applied. may stain or bleach the seat material. ∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom- Use a cloth dampened only with water to mended by the tire dressing manufac- CHROME PARTS clean the meter and gauge lens. turer. Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain WARNING the finish. Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot TIRE DRESSINGS steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classifi- NISSAN does not recommend the use of cation sensor. This can also affect the tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a operation of the air bag system and re- coating to the tires to help reduce discolor- sult in serious personal injury. ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint. 7-4 Appearance and care CAUTION ∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive ∙ Never use fabric protectors unless and damaging to leather surfaces recommended by the manufacturer. ∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any and should be removed promptly. Do similar material. ∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol- meter or gauge lens covers. It may ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, damage the lens cover. detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather’s natural finish. For Alcantara® (if so equipped)

Water Soluble Stains Stains Not Soluble in Water Resistant Stains Stain Cleaning Method Stain Cleaning Method Repeat as Necessary Don’t Know What Caused the Stain? Repeat treatments as Use a white towel Makeup (Lipstick, Rub with ethyl alcohol Treat with lukewarm water first, then often as necessary. Fruit juice, jam, jelly, damped in lukewarm foundation, mascara, (remember not to rub rinse by dabbing with clean water. If Even stains that are syrup, ketchup, water; rinse by dab- eye shadow), perfume, too hard), wipe with the stain begins to dissolve in the not soluble in water chocolate, ice cream bing with a damped shoe polish, grease or water and rinse by water, repeat the treatment as often will often require to be and mustard white towel in clean oil (in general), grass dabbing with clean as necessary. Allow to dry and if treated with water water. stain water. necessary, treat with ethyl alcohol afterwards. Wipe with water at Put a plastic bag full of room temperature, ice on top of the gum, rinse with clean water. Blood, eggs, excre- when the gum has AVOID the use of Chewing gum ment or urine become hard remove warm water because the pieces, then treat it will make these sub- with ethyl alcohol. stances coagulate. Pre-treat with lemon Vinegar, tomato juice, then wipe with sauce, coffee or hair lukewarm water, rinse gel by dabbing with clean water.

Appearance and care 7-5 AIR FRESHENERS ∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, Most air fresheners use a solvent that or equivalent floor mats, that are spe- could affect the vehicle interior. If you use cifically designed for use in your ve- an air freshener, take the following precau- hicle model and model year. tions: ∙ Properly position the mats in the ∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause floorwell using the floor mat position- permanent discoloration when they ing hook. For additional information, contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place refer to "Floor mat installation" in this the air freshener in a location that al- section. lows it to hang free and not contact an ∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in- interior surface. terfere with pedal operation. ∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip ∙ Periodically check the floor mats to on the vents. These products can cause LPD2859 make sure they are properly installed. immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces. FLOOR MATS (if so equipped) ∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure Carefully read and follow the manufactur- WARNING they are properly installed. er’s instructions before using the air fresheners. To avoid potential pedal interference The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can that may result in a collision, injury or extend the life of your vehicle carpet and death: make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular clean- ∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an- ing and replaced if they become exces- other floor mat in the driver front po- sively worn. sition or install them upside down or backwards.

7-6 Appearance and care Floor mat installation 3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the igni- Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po- tion still in the OFF position, the shift sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of lever in the P (Park) position (Continu- the floor mat positioning hooks for each ously Variable Transmission models) or seating position varies depending on the the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position vehicle. (manual transmission models) and When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, with the parking break applied, fully ap- follow the installation instructions provided ply and release all pedals. The floor mat with the mat and the following: must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from return- 1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the ing to its normal position. shift lever in P (Park) position (Continu- ously Variable Transmission models) or It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position LAI2045 (manual transmission models) and mats in your vehicle. Positioning hooks with the parking break fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so The illustration shows the location of the that the floor mat grommet holes are floor mat positioning hooks. aligned with the hook(s). SEAT BELTS 2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping properly positioned. them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system” section of this manual.

Appearance and care 7-7 CORROSION PROTECTION

WARNING MOST COMMON FACTORS freezing and where atmospheric pollution CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE exists and road salt is used. Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or CORROSION Temperature chemical solvents to clean the seat Most vehicle corrosion is caused by: High temperatures accelerate the rate of belts, since these materials may se- corrosion to those parts which are not well verely weaken the seat belt webbing. ∙ The accumulation of moisture- retaining dirt and debris in body panel ventilated. sections, cavities, and other areas. Air pollution ∙ Damage to paint and other protective Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in coatings caused by gravel and stone the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt chips or minor traffic collisions. use accelerates the corrosion process. ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS Road salt also accelerates the disintegra- INFLUENCE THE RATE OF tion of paint surfaces. CORROSION PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION Moisture ∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on keep the vehicle clean. the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry ∙ Always check for minor damage to the completely inside the vehicle and should paint and repair it as soon as possible. be removed for drying to avoid floor panel ∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the corrosion. doors open to avoid water accumula- Relative humidity tion. Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of ∙ Check the underbody for accumulation high relative humidity, especially those ar- of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with eas where the temperatures stay above water as soon as possible. 7-8 Appearance and care CAUTION ∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom. ∙ Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders. In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically. For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Appearance and care 7-9 MEMO

7-10 Appearance and care 8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...... 8-2 In-cabin microfilter ...... 8-19 Engine compartment check locations...... 8-3 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-19 Engine cooling system ...... 8-5 Cleaning ...... 8-19 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-6 Replacing ...... 8-19 Changing engine coolant...... 8-7 Brakes...... 8-21 Engine oil...... 8-7 Fuses...... 8-22 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-7 Engine compartment ...... 8-22 Changing engine oil ...... 8-8 Passenger compartment...... 8-24 Changing engine oil filter ...... 8-10 Battery replacement ...... 8-25 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) Key fob (if so equipped) ...... 8-26 fluid (if so equipped) ...... 8-11 NISSAN Intelligent Key® (if so equipped) ...... 8-27 Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...... 8-12 Brake fluid ...... 8-12 Lights ...... 8-29 Clutch (if so equipped) fluid ...... 8-12 Headlights...... 8-29 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-13 Turn signal bulb ...... 8-30 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir...... 8-13 Fog lights (if so equipped) ...... 8-30 Battery...... 8-14 Exterior and interior lights ...... 8-32 Jump starting ...... 8-15 Wheels and tires...... 8-34 Variable voltage control system ...... 8-16 Tire pressure ...... 8-34 Drive belt ...... 8-16 Tire labeling ...... 8-38 Spark plugs ...... 8-17 Types of tires ...... 8-40 Replacing spark plugs ...... 8-17 Tire chains ...... 8-41 Air cleaner...... 8-18 Changing wheels and tires ...... 8-42 MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

When performing any inspection or main- ∙ If you must run the engine in an en- ∙ Avoid contact with used engine oil and tenance work on your vehicle, always take closed space such as a garage, be sure coolant. Improperly disposed engine care to prevent serious accidental injury to there is proper ventilation for exhaust oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol- gases to escape. fluids can damage the environment. Al- lowing are general precautions which ∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is ways conform to local regulations for should be closely observed. supported only by a jack. If it is neces- disposal of vehicle fluid. sary to work under the vehicle, sup- WARNING ∙ Never leave the engine or the transport it with safety stands. mission related component harness ∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap- ∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and connector disconnected while the ig- ply the parking brake securely and sparks away from the fuel tank and nition switch is in the ON position. block the wheels to prevent the ve- battery. hicle from moving. For manual trans- ∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat- ∙ Because the fuel lines on gasoline en- tery or any transistorized component mission models, move the shift lever gine models are under high pressure to N (Neutral). For CVT models, move while the ignition switch is in the ON even when the engine is off, it is recom- position. the shift lever to P (Park). mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer ∙ Be sure the ignition switch is in the for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines. This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc- OFF or LOCK position when perform- ∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto- tions regarding only those items which are ing any parts replacement or repairs. matic engine cooling fan. It may come relatively easy for an owner to perform. ∙ If you must work with the engine run- on at any time without warning, even A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also if the ignition key is in the OFF position ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair available. For additional information, refer and the engine is not running. To and tools away from moving fans, avoid injury, always disconnect the to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order belts and any other moving parts. negative battery cable before work- information” in the “Technical and con- ∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any ing near the fan. sumer information” section of this manual. loose clothing and remove any jew- You should be aware that incomplete or elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be- CAUTION improper servicing may result in operating fore working on your vehicle. ∙ Do not work under the hood while the difficulties or excessive emissions, and ∙ Always wear eye protection whenever engine is hot. Turn the engine off and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt you work on your vehicle. wait until it cools down. about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer. 8-2 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS

MRA8DE engine 1. Engine oil filler cap 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid reservoir 3. Air cleaner 4. Battery 5. Fuse and relay box 6. Engine coolant reservoir 7. Radiator cap 8. Engine oil dipstick 9. Drive belt location 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2931 Do-it-yourself 8-3 MR16DDT engine 1. Engine oil filler cap 2. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid reservoir 3. Air cleaner 4. Battery 5. Fuse and relay box 6. Engine coolant reservoir 7. Radiator cap 8. Engine oil dipstick 9. Drive belt location 10. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 11. Relay box (DTRL) (if so equipped)

LDI3011 8-4 Do-it-yourself ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

The engine cooling system is filled at the CAUTION ∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) ∙ Never use any cooling system addi- Genuine NISSAN Long Life or 7 years. Mixing any other type of tives such as radiator sealer. Additives Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to coolant other than Genuine NISSAN may clog the cooling system and provide year-round antifreeze and coolant Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), cause damage to the engine, trans- protection. The antifreeze solution con- including Genuine NISSAN Long Life mission and/or cooling system. tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi- Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use tional engine cooling system additives are ∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be of non-distilled water will reduce the not necessary. sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long life expectancy of the factory-fill cool- Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or ant. For additional information, refer WARNING equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life to the “Maintenance and schedules” Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre- section of this manual. ∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant diluted to provide antifreeze protec- reservoir cap when the engine is hot. tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional Wait until the engine and radiator cool freeze protection is needed due to down. Serious burns could be caused weather where you operate your ve- by high pressure fluid escaping from hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life the radiator. For additional informa- Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen- tion on precautions, refer to “If your trate following the directions on the vehicle overheats” found in the “In container. If an equivalent coolant case of emergency” section of this other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life manual. Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol- ∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres- low the coolant manufacturer’s in- sure type radiator cap. To prevent en- structions to maintain minimum anti- gine damage, use only a Genuine freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The NISSAN radiator cap. use of other types of coolant solu- tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.

Do-it-yourself 8-5 If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En- gine compartment check locations” in this section.

LDI2167 LDI3060 MRA8DE MR16DDT CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long LEVEL Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is Check the coolant level in the reservoir 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing when the engine is cold. If the coolant any other type of coolant or the use of non- level is below the MIN level ᭺B , add coolant distilled water will reduce the life expectancy to the MAX level ᭺A . If the reservoir is empty, of the factory-fill coolant. For additional infor- check the coolant level in the radiator mation, refer to the “Maintenance and when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi- schedules” section of this manual. cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level ᭺A .

8-6 Do-it-yourself ENGINE OIL

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual. Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.

WARNING ∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot. ∙ Never remove the radiator or engine LDI2168 LDI3039 coolant reservoir cap when the en- MRA8DE MR16DDT gine is hot. Serious burns could be CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. ∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner reaches operating temperature. as soon as possible. 3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than ∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil- 10 minutes for the oil to drain back dren and pets. into the oil pan. Engine coolant must be disposed of prop- 4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. erly. Check your local regulations. Reinsert it all the way.

Do-it-yourself 8-7 CAUTION ∙ Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insuffi- cient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty. ∙ It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions. Make sure to follow the engine oil changing intervals in the maintenance booklet. Op- LDI0371 erating under the following conditions may require more frequent oil change: 5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil level. It should be between the H ∙ repeated short distance driving (High) and L (Low) marks ᭺B . This is the ∙ driving in dusty conditions normal operating oil level range. If the oil level is below the L (Low) mark ᭺A , ∙ stop and go commuting. remove the oil filler cap and pour recommended oil through the opening. Do not overfill ᭺C . LDI3041 6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick. MRA8DE CHANGING ENGINE OIL It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and break-in period, depending on the sever- apply the parking brake. ity of operating conditions.

8-8 Do-it-yourself 4. Place a large drain pan under the drain 6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a plug ᭺B . new washer. Securely tighten the drain 5. Remove the drain plug ᭺B with a plug with a wrench. Do not use exces- wrench by turning it counterclockwise sive force. and completely drain the oil. Drain plug tightening torque: If the oil filter is to be changed, remove 25 ft-lb (34 N·m) and replace it at this time. For addi- 7. Refill engine with recommended oil tional information, refer to “Changing through the oil filler opening, then install engine oil filter” in this section. the oil filler cap securely. WARNING For additional information on the drain and refill capacity, refer to “Recom- ∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- cancer. ties” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual. ∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash The drain and refill capacity depends thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner on the oil temperature and drain time. as soon as possible. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to deter- ∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of mine when the proper amount of oil is children. in the engine. LDI3043 CAUTION 8. Start the engine. Check for leakage MR16DDT around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor- 2. Start the engine and let it idle until it ∙ Be careful not to burn yourself. The rect as required. reaches operating temperature, then engine oil may be hot. turn it off. ∙ Waste oil must be disposed of 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level with the 3. Remove the oil filler cap ᭺A by turning it properly. dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary. counterclockwise. ∙ Check your local regulations. Do-it-yourself 8-9 For additional information on the location of the engine oil filler cap, refer to “Engine compartment check locations” in this section.

LDI3045 LDI3044 MRA8DE MR16DDT CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER 3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter ᭺B . 1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn the engine off.

8-10 Do-it-yourself CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so equipped) ᭺B 4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter 9. Start the engine and check for leakage CAUTION wrench by turning it counterclockwise. around the oil filter. Correct as required. ∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine Then remove the oil filter by turning it 10. Turn the engine off and wait more than by hand. NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en- ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with gine oil if necessary. CAUTION other fluids. For additional information on the location ∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission Be careful not to burn yourself. The en- of the engine oil filler cap, refer to “Engine gine oil may be hot. Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission compartment check locations” in this sec- fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam- 5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface tion. age the CVT. Damage caused by the with a clean rag. use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under CAUTION NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of ∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to the engine. Failure to do so could lead to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may engine damage. also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as rec- 6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with ommended is not covered under clean engine oil. NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited 7. Screw on the oil filter. Securely tighten Warranty. oil filter with wrench. Do not use exces- When checking or replacement of CVT fluid sive force. is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. Oil filter tightening torque: 18 N·m (13 ft-lb) 8. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening ᭺A , then install oil filler cap securely.

Do-it-yourself 8-11 BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID

For additional brake and clutch fluid specification information, refer to “Recom- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING ∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake and clutch (if so equipped) systems. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake and clutch system and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability. LDI2169 LDI2169 ∙ Clean the filler cap before removing. BRAKE FLUID CLUTCH (if so equipped) FLUID ∙ Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the marked containers out of reach of level is below the MIN line ᭺1 , or the brake level is below the MIN line ᭺1 , or the brake children. warning light comes on, add Genuine warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 CAUTION fluid up to the MAX line ᭺2 . If fluid must be fluid up to the MAX line ᭺2 . If fluid must be added frequently, the system should be added frequently, the system should be Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur- checked. It is recommended that you visit a checked. It is recommended that you visit a faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN dealer for this service. is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.

8-12 Do-it-yourself WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the ∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates manufacturer’s instructions for the mix- with water to the manufacturer’s rec- ture ratio. ommended levels before pouring the Refill the reservoir more frequently when fluid into the windshield-washer fluid driving conditions require an increased reservoir. Do not use the windshield- amount of windshield-washer fluid. washer fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water. Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION ∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze LDI2170 coolant for windshield-washer fluid. This may result in damage to the WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID paint. RESERVOIR ∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir reservoir with washer fluid concen- periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid trates at full strength. Some methyl when the low windshield-washer fluid alcohol based washer fluid concen- warning light (if so equipped) comes on or trates may permanently stain the the “Low Washer Fluid” warning message grille if spilled while filling the shows on the vehicle information display. windshield-washer fluid reservoir. To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening. Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a Do-it-yourself 8-13 BATTERY

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry. WARNING ∙ Battery posts, terminals and related Clean the battery with a solution of bak- accessories contain lead and lead ∙ Do not expose the battery to flames, ing soda and water. compounds. Wash hands after an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy- handling. ∙ Make certain the terminal connections drogen gas generated by the battery are clean and securely tightened. is explosive. Explosive gases can ∙ Keep battery out of the reach of ∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for cause blindness or injury. Do not allow children. battery fluid to contact your skin, 30 days or longer, disconnect the nega- ∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul- tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent caps tight and the battery level. furic acid can cause blindness or in- discharge. jury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your NOTE: eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If Care should be taken to avoid situations the acid contacts your eyes, skin or that can lead to potential battery dis- clothing, immediately flush with wa- charge and potential no-start conditions ter for at least 15 minutes and seek such as: medical attention. 1. Installation or extended use of elec- ∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid tronic accessories that consume bat- in the battery is low. Low battery fluid tery power when the engine is not can cause a higher load on the battery running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD which can generate heat, reduce bat- players, etc). tery life, and in some cases lead to an explosion. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances. ∙ When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection In these cases, the battery may need to and remove all jewelry. be charged to maintain battery health.

8-14 Do-it-yourself Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under severe conditions require frequent checks of the battery fluid level. JUMP STARTING If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In case of emergency” section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WDI0224 1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery case.

WDI0529 2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is necessary to add fluid, add only distilled water to bring the level up to the bottom of the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Do-it-yourself 8-15 VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL DRIVE BELT SYSTEM

The current sensor ᭺A is located near the battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.

LDI2178 WDI0638 CAUTION 1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley ∙ Do not ground accessories directly to 3. Water pump pulley the battery terminal. Doing so will by- 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley pass the variable voltage control sys- (if so equipped/Idler pulley (if so tem and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. equipped) 5. Crankshaft pulley ∙ Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the WARNING vehicle battery. Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF Your vehicle is equipped with a variable or LOCK position before servicing drive voltage control system. This system mea- belt. The engine could rotate sures the amount of electrical discharge unexpectedly. from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator. 8-16 Do-it-yourself SPARK PLUGS

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un- Platinum-tipped spark plugs usual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is (except California models) in poor condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you It is not necessary to replace platinum- visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. tipped ᭺A spark plugs as frequently as con- 2. Have the belt checked regularly for ventional type spark plugs because they condition. last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual. Do not service platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping. ∙ Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones. SDI1895 If replacement is required, it is recom- REPLACING SPARK PLUGS mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING Iridium-tipped spark plugs Be sure the engine and ignition switch (MR16DDT engine or California are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely. models only) It is not necessary to replace iridium- CAUTION tipped ᭺A spark plugs as frequently as con- Be sure to use the correct socket to re- ventional type spark plugs because they move the spark plugs. An incorrect last much longer. Follow the maintenance socket can damage the spark plugs. log shown in the “Maintenance and schedules” section in the manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Do-it-yourself 8-17 AIR CLEANER

∙ Always replace spark plugs with rec- 4. Remove the air cleaner filter. Wipe the ommended or equivalent ones. inside of the air cleaner filter housing and the cover with a damp cloth, then If replacement is required, it is recom- replace air cleaner filter. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NOTE: After installing a new air cleaner, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING ∙ Operating the engine with the air cleaner removed can cause you or LDI2171 others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops the The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t and reused. Replace it according to the there, and the engine backfires, you maintenance log shown in the “Mainte- could be burned. Do not drive with the nance and schedules” section of this air cleaner removed, and be careful manual. when working on the engine with the To remove the air cleaner filter: air cleaner removed. 1. Unlatch the retaining clips ᭺A . ∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with ᭺B 2. Pull up at points and remove. the air cleaner removed. Doing so 3. Pull up and remove air cleaner housing could result in serious injury. ᭺C .

8-18 Do-it-yourself WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER CLEANING The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry If your windshield is not clear after using of airborne dust and pollen particles and the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade reduces some objectionable outside chatters when running, wax or other mate- odors. The filter is located behind the glove rial may be on the blade or windshield. box. For additional information, refer to the Clean the outside of the windshield with a “Maintenance and schedules” section of washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your wind- this manual for change intervals. shield is clean if beads do not form when If replacement is required, it is recom- rinsing with clear water. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth this service. soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after LDI2721 cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades. REPLACING Replace the wiper blades if they are worn. CAUTION To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol- Worn windshield wiper blades can low the procedure below: damage the windshield and impair driver vision. 1. When ignition switch is ON or within 60 seconds after placing the ignition switch from the ON to OFF position, place the windshield wiper and washer lever into the OFF position. 2. Rapidly lift the windshield wiper and washer lever ᭺A upwards twice within 0.5 seconds. This action will cause the wipers to automatically take the service position. Do-it-yourself 8-19 CAUTION ∙ After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened. ∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.

LDI2475 LDI2722 3. Once the wipers are in the service position, push the release tab ᭺B . 4. Move the wiper blade down ᭺C and remove. 5. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm until it clicks into place. 6. Rotate the wiper blade so the dimple is in the groove. 7. Finally, lift the windshield wiper and washer lever to the mist position ᭺D once and release. This action will cause the wipers to resume the set position.

8-20 Do-it-yourself BRAKES

If the brakes do not operate properly, have depressed. Have the brakes checked as the brakes checked. It is recommended soon as possible if the wear indicator that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser- sound is heard. vice. Under some driving or climate conditions, Self-adjusting brakes occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting noise during light to moderate stops is nor- brakes. mal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system. The front (and rear-if so equipped) disc- type brakes self-adjust every time the Proper brake inspection intervals should brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type be followed. For additional information re- brakes (if so equipped) self-adjust every garding brake inspections, refer to the ap- time the parking brake is applied. propriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" WARNING section of this manual. Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Brake pad wear indicators LDI2723 The disc brake pads on your vehicle have If you wax the surface of the hood, be care- audible wear indicators. When a brake pad ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle requires replacement, a high pitched ᭺F . This may cause clogging or improper scraping or screeching sound will be heard windshield-washer operation. If wax gets when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or be heard whether or not the brake pedal is small pin ᭺E .

Do-it-yourself 8-21 FUSES

LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI2172 Two types of fuses are used. Type ᭺A is If a type ᭺A fuse is used to replace a type ᭺B ENGINE COMPARTMENT used in the fuse boxes in the engine com- fuse, the type ᭺A fuse will not be level with partment. Type ᭺B is used in the passenger the fuse pocket as shown in the illustration. WARNING compartment fuse box. This will not affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the fuse is installed in the Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- Type ᭺A fuses can be installed in the engine fuse box securely. perage rating than that specified on the compartment and passenger compart- fuse box cover. This could damage the ment fuse boxes. Type ᭺B fuses cannot be installed in the electrical system or electronic control under hood fuse boxes. Only use type ᭺A units or cause a fire. fuses in the under hood fuse boxes. If any electrical equipment does not come NOTE: on, check for an open fuse. Your vehicle may not be equipped with 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the all fuses listed on the fuse label. headlight switch are OFF. 2. Open the engine hood. 8-22 Do-it-yourself 3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing Fusible links the tab ᭺A and lifting the cover up. If the electrical equipment does not oper- 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller, ate and fuses are in good condition, check which is located in the center of the the fusible links. If any of these fusible links fuse block in the passenger compart- are melted, replace with only Genuine ment. NISSAN parts.

LDI2746 5. If the fuse is open ᭺B , replace it with a new fuse ᭺C . 6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NOTE: Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.

Do-it-yourself 8-23 LDI2712 LDI2713 PASSENGER COMPARTMENT NOTE: 5. If the fuse is open ᭺C , replace it with an equivalent good fuse ᭺D . The fuse box is located on the driver’s WARNING side of the instrument panel. 6. Push the fuse box cover to install. Never use a fuse of higher or lower am- 1. Be sure the ignition switch and the If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical perage rating than that specified on the headlight switch are OFF. system checked and repaired. It is recom- fuse box cover. This could damage the mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for 2. Remove the fuse box cover ᭺A with a electrical system or electronic control this service. units or cause a fire. suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim. NOTE: If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse. 3. Locate the fuse that needs to be re- Your vehicle may not be equipped with placed. all fuses listed on the fuse label. 4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller ᭺B .

8-24 Do-it-yourself BATTERY REPLACEMENT

CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swal- low the battery or removed parts.

LDI2747 Extended storage switch 1. To remove the extended storage switch, be sure the ignition switch is in If any electrical equipment does not oper- the OFF or LOCK position. ate, remove the extended storage switch and check for an open fuse. 2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF position. NOTE: 3. Remove the fuse box cover. The extended storage switch is used for 4. Pinch the locking tabs ᭺A and ᭺B found long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex- on each side of the storage switch. tended storage switch is broken it is not 5. Pull the storage switch straight out necessary to replace it. Replace only the from the fuse box ᭺C . open fuse in the switch with a new fuse. How to replace the extended storage switch:

Do-it-yourself 8-25 2. Insert a small screwdriver into the slit of ∙ The key fob is water-resistant; how- the corner ᭺B and twist it to separate ever, if it does get wet, immediately the upper part from the lower part. Use wipe completely dry. a cloth to protect the casing. ∙ The operational range of the key fob 3. Replace the battery with a new one. extends to approximately 33 ft (10 m) from the vehicle. This range may vary ∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and with conditions. electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause ∙ Make sure that the + side faces the harmful interference, and (2) this device bottom of the case ᭺C . must accept any interference received, Recommended battery: CR1620 or equiva- including interference that may cause lent. undesired operation of the device. 4. Close the lid and install the screw se- FCC Notice: curely. For USA: 5. Operate the buttons to check its op- This device complies with Part 15 of the eration. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device If you need assistance with replacement, it may not cause harmful interference, and is recommended that you visit a NISSAN (2) this device must accept any interfer- dealer for this service. LDI2219 ence received, including interference KEY FOB (if so equipped) If the battery is removed for any reason that may cause undesired operation. other than replacement, perform step 5. Note: Replace the battery in the key fob as fol- ∙ An improperly disposed battery can lows: Changes or modifications not expressly hurt the environment. Always con- approved by the party responsible for 1. Remove the screw ᭺A . firm local regulations for battery dis- compliance could void the user’s author- posal. ity to operate the equipment. 8-26 Do-it-yourself For Canada: NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® (if so This devise complies with Industry equipped) Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as conditions: (1) this device may not cause follows: interference, and (2) this device must ac- 1. Remove the mechanical key from the cept any interference, including interfer- Intelligent Key. ence that may cause undesired operation of the device. 2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver ᭺A into the slit ᭺B of the corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.

LDI2001 Do-it-yourself 8-27 3. Replace the battery with a new one. FCC Notice: Recommended battery: CR2025 or For USA: equivalent. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol- ∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and lowing two conditions: (1) This device electric terminals as doing so could may not cause harmful interference, and cause a malfunction. (2) this device must accept any interfer- ∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold- ence received, including interference ing the battery across the contact that may cause undesired operation. points will seriously deplete the stor- Note: age capacity. Changes or modifications not expressly ∙ Make sure that the + side faces the approved by the party responsible for bottom of the lower part. compliance could void the user’s author- 4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with ity to operate the equipment. ᭺C and ᭺D . For Canada: 5. Operate the buttons to check the op- This device complies with Industry eration. Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two If you need assistance with replacement, it conditions: (1) this device may not cause is recommended that you visit a NISSAN interference, and (2) this device must ac- dealer for this service. cept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

LDI2637 8-28 Do-it-yourself LIGHTS

HEADLIGHTS CAUTION For additional information on headlight ∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac- bulb replacement, refer to the instructions ing the bulb. When aiming adjustment outlined in this section. is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. ∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement LDI2980 bulb is installed. Type A (if so equipped) ∙ Only touch the base when handling Replacing the halogen headlight the bulb. Never touch the glass enve- bulb (if so equipped) lope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or head- NOTE: light performance. The headlight is a semi-sealed beam ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed type which used a replaceable headlight inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced break if the glass envelope is from inside the engine compartment scratched or the bulb is dropped. without removing the headlight assem- ∙ Use the same number and wattage as bly. shown in the chart.

Do-it-yourself 8-29 4. Rotate the turn signal bulb socket ᭺F Replacing the LED headlight bulb counterclockwise and remove bulb ᭺G . (if so equipped) Reverse instructions to install bulbs and If LED headlight bulb replacement is re- replace fender protector. quired, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. WARNING TURN SIGNAL BULB Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning To replace the turn signal bulb follow the may result. instructions listed in the “Replacing the halogen headlight bulb” found in this sec- CAUTION tion. • Do not touch glass surface of the bulb FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped) LDI2981 with bare hands or allow oil or grease to get on it to prevent damage to bulb. For additional information on fog light bulb Type B (if so equipped) replacement, refer to the instructions out- 1. Rotate the (high beam) cover ᭺A coun- • Do not leave the bulb out of the lamp lined in this section. terclockwise to access the (high beam) reflector for a long time because dust, bulb socket ᭺C . Rotate the bulb socket moisture, smoke, etc. may affect the ᭺C counterclockwise and remove bulb. performance of the lamp. 2. Rotate the (low beam) cover ᭺B (if so • Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in equipped) counterclockwise to access a car wash. A temperature difference the (low beam) bulb socket ᭺D (if so between the inside and the outside of ᭺D equipped). Rotate the bulb socket (if the lens causes the fog. This is not a so equipped) counterclockwise and re- malfunction. If large drops of water col- move bulb. lect inside the lens, it is recommended 3. Rotate the side marker bulb socket ᭺E that you visit a NISSAN dealer for counterclockwise and remove bulb. servicing.

8-30 Do-it-yourself Replacing the fog light bulb CAUTION ∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped. ∙ When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope. ∙ Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart. ∙ Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light. 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Access to the fog light is in front of and behind the front tire and the fascia. 3. Remove the fasteners ᭺A ; carefully pull back the front fender protector. LDI2935 4. Rotate the bulb ᭺B counterclockwise and pull out to remove. 5. Remove by pulling straight off the fog light. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. 6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal. Do-it-yourself 8-31 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts infor- Item Wattage (W) Bulb No. mation. Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped) * It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN Low/Daytime running (Canada only) 55 H11 High 65 H9 dealer for replacement. Turn/Park 27/7 3157 AK ** Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so Side marker 5 W5W equipped) uses the projector LED and the Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped) H9 bulb for the high beam function. Low/Daytime running (Canada only) — — High** 65/— H9/— Turn/Park 27/7 3157 AK Park — — Side marker 5 W5W Daytime running lights (NISMO models only) — — Front fog light (if so equipped) 55 H11 Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — — Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — — Map lights* — — Room light* 8 — Trunk light* 3.4 158 High-mounted stop light* Inside (if so equipped) — — Spoiler (if so equipped) — — Rear combination light* Turn 21 WY21W Tail — — Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W Backup (reversing) 16 W16W Side marker — — License plate light* 5 W5W

8-32 Do-it-yourself 1. Map light 2. Room light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped) 4. Headlight assembly 5. Fog light (if so equipped)/ Daytime running light (NISMO models only) 6. High-mount stop light (inside)(if so equipped) 7. Trunk light 8. High-mount stop light (spoiler)(if so equipped) 9. License plate light 10. Rear combination light

WDI0263 Replacement procedures All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover. Indicates bulb removal LDI3137 Indicates bulb installation Do-it-yourself 8-33 WHEELS AND TIRES

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in tion display, one or more of your tires and Loading Information label is af- the “In case of emergency” section of is significantly under-inflated. fixed to the driver side center pillar. this manual. Tire pressures should be checked The TPMS will activate only when the regularly because: TIRE PRESSURE vehicle is driven at speeds above Tire Pressure Monitoring System 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system ∙ Most tires naturally lose air over (TPMS) may not detect a sudden drop in tire time. pressure (for example a flat tire while ∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when WARNING driving). driven over potholes or other ob- Radio waves could adversely af- For additional information, refer to jects or if the vehicle strikes a fect electric medical equipment. “Low tire pressure warning light” in curb while parking. Those who use a pacemaker the “Instruments and controls” sec- The tire pressures should be should contact the electric medi- tion, “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys- cal equipment manufacturer for tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv- checked when the tires are cold. The the possible influences before tires are considered COLD after the use. ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of this vehicle has been parked for 3 or This vehicle is equipped with the Tire manual. more hours, or driven less than 1 mile Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. It monitors tire pressure of all tires Tire inflation pressure except the spare. When the low tire The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert (if Check the tire pressures (including so equipped) provides visual and au- pressure warning light is lit and the the spare) often and always prior to CHECK TIRE PRES (vehicles without a dible signals outside the vehicle for long distance trips. The recom- inflating tires to the recommended vehicle information display) warning mended tire pressure specifications COLD tire pressure. For additional in- is displayed in the odometer, or the are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. formation, refer to “TPMS with Easy- “Tire Pressure Low — Add Air” (ve- certification label or the Tire and hicles with a vehicle information dis- Loading Information label under the Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting and driv- play) appears in the vehicle informa- “Cold Tire Pressure” heading. The Tire ing” section of this manual. 8-34 Do-it-yourself Incorrect tire pressure, including ∙ Before taking a long trip, or under inflation, may adversely af- whenever you heavily load your fect tire life and vehicle handling. vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire WARNING pressures are at the specified ∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail level. suddenly and cause an ∙ For additional information re- accident. garding tires, refer to “Impor- ∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating tant Tire Safety Information” (GVWR) is located on the (US) or “Tire Safety Information” F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica- (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- tion label. The vehicle weight mation Booklet. capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Load- ing beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.

Do-it-yourself 8-35 ᭺5 Tire size: Refer to “Tire labeling” in this section. ᭺6 Spare tire size.

LDI2007 Tire and Loading Information ᭺4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the label tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are consid- ᭺1 Seating capacity: The maximum ered COLD after the vehicle has number of occupants that can been parked for 3 or more hours, be seated in the vehicle. or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) ᭺2 Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve- at moderate speeds. The rec- hicle loading information” in the ommended cold tire inflation is “Technical and consumer infor- set by the manufacturer to pro- mation” section of this manual. vide the best balance of tire ᭺3 Original tire size: The size of the wear, vehicle handling, driveabil- tires originally installed on the ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi- vehicle at the factory. cle’s GVWR. 8-36 Do-it-yourself 3. Remove the gauge. Grades: NISMO 4. Read the tire pressure on the Rear Original gauge stem and compare to the Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI specification shown on the Tire 215/45ZR18 and Loading Information label. Spare Tire: 420 kPa, 60 PSI 5. Add air to the tire as needed. If T125/70D16 too much air is added, press the Grades: S, SV, SR, SL core of the valve stem briefly Size Cold Tire Infla- with the tip of the gauge stem to tion Pressure release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air Front Original Tire: LDI0393 as needed. 230 kPa, 33 PSI Checking tire pressure 205/50R17 6. Install the valve stem cap. P205/55R16 1. Remove the valve stem cap from 7. Check the pressure of all other Rear Original the tire. Tire: tires, including the spare. 230 kPa, 33 PSI 2. Press the pressure gauge 205/50R17 Grades: NISMO squarely onto the valve stem. Do P205/55R16 Size Cold Tire Infla- Spare Tire: not press too hard or force the 420 kPa, 60 PSI valve stem sideways, or air will tion Pressure T125/70D16 escape. If the hissing sound of air Front Original escaping from the tire is heard Tire: 230 kPa, 33 PSI while checking the pressure, re- 215/45ZR18 position the gauge to eliminate this leakage. Do-it-yourself 8-37 WDI0394 WDI0395 Example Example TIRE LABELING ᭺1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H) 3. Two-digit number (65): This number, known as the aspect Federal law requires tire manufac- 1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de- turers to place standardized infor- ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of signed for passenger vehicles height to width. mation on the sidewall of all tires. (not all tires have this informa- This information identifies and de- tion). 4. R: The “R” stands for radial. scribes the fundamental character- 5. Two-digit number (15): This num- istics of the tire and also provides the 2. Three-digit number (215): This ber is the wheel or rim diameter Tire Identification Number (TIN) for number gives the width in milli- in inches. safety standard certification. The TIN meters of the tire from sidewall can be used to identify the tire in edge to sidewall edge. case of a recall.

8-38 Do-it-yourself 6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire’s load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law. 7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.

LDI2786 Example ᭺2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size. for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX 4. Three-digit code: Tire type code XXX XXXX) (Optional). 1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De- 5. Four numbers represent the partment Of Transportation”. week and year the tire was built. The symbol can be placed For example, the numbers 3103 above, below or to the left or means the 31st week of 2003. If right of the Tire Identification these numbers are missing then Number. look on the other sidewall of the 2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s tire. identification mark.

Do-it-yourself 8-39 ᭺3 Tire ply composition and material ᭺6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type” TYPES OF TIRES The number of layers or plies of Indicates whether the tire requires WARNING rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire an inner tube (“tube type”) or not manufacturers also must indicate (“tubeless”). ∙ When changing or replacing tires, be the materials in the tire, which in- sure all four tires are of the same type ᭺7 The word “radial” (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth- construction. A NISSAN dealer may be ers. The word “radial” is shown if the tire able to help you with information ᭺4 Maximum permissible inflation has radial structure. about tire type, size, speed rating and availability. pressure ᭺8 Manufacturer or brand name ∙ Replacement tires may have a lower This number is the greatest amount Manufacturer or brand name is speed rating than the factory of air pressure that should be put in shown. equipped tires, and may not match the tire. Do not exceed the maximum the potential maximum vehicle Other Tire-related Terminology permissible inflation pressure. speed. Never exceed the maximum In addition to the many terms that speed rating of the tire. ᭺5 Maximum load rating are defined throughout this section, ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- This number indicates the maxi- Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the nally specified by NISSAN could affect mum load in kilograms and pounds sidewall that contains a whitewall, the proper operation of the low tire that can be carried by the tire. When bears white lettering or bears pressure warning system. replacing the tires on the vehicle, al- manufacturer, brand, and/or model ways use a tire that has the same name molding that is higher or load rating as the factory installed deeper than the same molding on tire. the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. 8-40 Do-it-yourself ∙ Always use tires of the same type, on dry roads. Summer tire performance is tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer size, brand, construction and tread substantially reduced in snow and ice. than that of non-studded snow tires. Summer tires do not have the tire traction pattern on all four wheels. Failure to TIRE CHAINS do so may result in a circumference rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall. difference between tires on the front If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy CAUTION and rear axles which can cause the or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all Tire chains/cables should not be in- to malfunction resulting in personal four wheels. stalled on 205/50R17 and 215/45ZR18 injury or death, excessive tire wear size tires. Installation of the tire and may damage the transmission Snow tires chains/cables on 205/50R17 and 215/45ZR18 size tires will cause damage and differential gears. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to to the vehicle. If you plan to use tire ∙ For additional information regarding select tires equivalent in size and load rat- chains/cables, you should install tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety ing to the original equipment tires. If you do 205/55R16 size tires on your vehicle. Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- not, it can adversely affect the safety and mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- handling of your vehicle. Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac- formation Booklet. Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat- cording to location. Check the local laws All season tires ings than factory equipped tires and may before installing tire chains. When installing not match the potential maximum vehicle tire chains, make sure they are the proper NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some speed. Never exceed the maximum speed size for the tires on your vehicle and are models to provide good performance all rating of the tire. installed according to the chain manufac- year, including snowy and icy road condi- turer’s suggestions. Use only SAE class “S” If you install snow tires, they must be the tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL chains. Class “S” chains are used on ve- same size, brand, construction and tread SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. hicles with restricted tire to vehicle clear- pattern on all four wheels. Snow tires have better snow traction than ance. Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains All Season tires and may be more appropri- For additional traction on icy roads, stud- are designed to meet the minimum clear- ate in some areas. ded tires may be used. However, some U.S. ances between the tire and the closest ve- Summer tires states and Canadian provinces prohibit hicle suspension or body component re- their use. Check local, state and provincial quired to accommodate the use of a NISSAN specifies summer tires on some laws before installing studded tires. Skid winter traction device (tire chains or models to provide superior performance and traction capabilities of studded snow cables). The minimum clearances are de- Do-it-yourself 8-41 termined using the factory equipped tires. Wheel nut tightening torque: Other types may damage your vehicle. Use 83 ft-lb (113 N·m) chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a The wheel nuts must be kept tight- tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain ened to specifications at all times. must be secured or removed to prevent It is recommended that wheel nuts the possibility of whipping action damage be tightened to specification at to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using each tire rotation interval. tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be WARNING damaged and/or vehicle handling and ∙ After rotating the tires, check performance may be adversely affected. and adjust the tire pressure. Tire chains must be installed only on the WDI0258 ∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when front wheels and not on the rear wheels. the vehicle has been driven for Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in USE ONLY spare tire. Tire rotation cases of a flat tire, etc.). Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving ∙ Do not include the spare tire in with chains in such conditions can cause NISSAN recommends rotating the the tire rotation. damage to the various mechanisms of the tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km). vehicle due to some overstress. ∙ For additional information re- For additional information on tire regarding tires, refer to “Impor- placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire” tant Tire Safety Information” in the “In case of emergency” section (US) or “Tire Safety Information” of this manual. (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- mation Booklet. As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench. 8-42 Do-it-yourself ∙ The original tires have built-in ing capacity as originally equipped. Rec- tread wear indicators. When the ommended types and sizes are shown in wear indicators are visible, the “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and con- tire(s) should be replaced. sumer information” section of this manual. ∙ Tires degrade with age and use. WARNING Have tires, including the spare, ∙ The use of tires other than those recover 6 years old checked by a ommended or the mixed use of tires qualified technician because of different brands, construction some tire damage may not be (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread obvious. Replace the tires as patterns can adversely affect the ride, necessary to prevent tire failure braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic and possible personal injury. Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire WDI0259 ∙ Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious per- chain clearance, speedometer cali- Tire wear and damage bration, headlight aim and bumper sonal injury. If it is necessary to height. Some of these effects may 1. Wear indicator repair the spare tire, it is recom- lead to accidents and could result in mended that you visit a NISSAN serious personal injury. 2. Location mark dealer for this service. ∙ If your vehicle was originally WARNING ∙ For additional information re- equipped with four tires that were the garding tires, refer to “Impor- same size and you are only replacing ∙ Tires should be periodically in- tant Tire Safety Information” two of the four tires, install the new spected for wear, cracking, (US) or “Tire Safety Information” tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires bulging or objects caught in the (Canada) in the Warranty Infor- on the front axle may cause loss of tread. If excessive wear, cracks, mation Booklet. vehicle control in some driving condi- bulging or deep cuts are found, tions and cause an accident and per- the tire(s) should be replaced. Replacing wheels and tires sonal injury. When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carry- Do-it-yourself 8-43 ∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea- ∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if Wheel balance son, always replace with wheels it is not handled correctly. Be careful Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle which have the same off-set dimen- when handling the TPMS sensor. handling and tire life. Even with regular use, sion. Wheels of a different off-set ∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, could cause premature tire wear, de- ID registration may be required. Con- they should be balanced as required. grade vehicle handling characteris- tact a NISSAN dealer for ID tics, affect the VDC system and/or in- registration. Wheel balance service should be per- terference with the brake discs. Such formed with the wheels off the vehicle. interference can lead to decreased ∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle braking efficiency and/or early brake specified by NISSAN. The valve stem could lead to mechanical damage. pad/shoe wear. For additional infor- cap may become stuck. mation on wheel-off set dimensions, ∙ For additional information regarding ∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety refer to “Wheels and tires” in the correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In- “Technical and consumer informa- may be clogged up with dirt and formation” (Canada) in the Warranty tion” section of this manual. cause a malfunction or loss of ∙ When replacing a wheel without the pressure. Information Booklet. TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS ∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed Care of wheels will not function and the low tire pres- wheel or tire even if it has been re- ∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve- sure warning light will flash for ap- paired. Such wheels or tires could hicle to maintain their appearance. proximately 1 minute. The light will re- have structural damage and could fail main on after 1 minute. Have your without warning. ∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when tires replaced and/or TPMS system the wheel is changed or the underside reset as soon as possible. It is recom- ∙ The use of retread tires is not of the vehicle is washed. mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer recommended. for this service. ∙ For additional information regarding ∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels. ∙ Replacing tires with those not origi- tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety nally specified by NISSAN could affect Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor- ∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents the proper operation of the TPMS. mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In- or corrosion. Such damage may cause formation Booklet. loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead. 8-44 Do-it-yourself ∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road ∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare ∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY wheels to protect against road salt in tire installed do not drive the vehicle spare tire is smaller than the original areas where it is used during winter. at speeds faster than 50 mph tire, ground clearance is reduced. To Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY (80 km/h). avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive ∙ When driving on roads covered with spare tire) the vehicle through an automatic car snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE wash since it may get caught. When replacing a wheel without the TPMS ONLY spare tire should be used on the such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not rear wheels and the original tire used function. on the front wheels (drive wheels). Observe the following precautions if the ∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be rate than the standard tire. Replace damaged or involved in an accident: the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear. WARNING ∙ Do not use the spare tire on other ∙ The spare tire should be used for vehicles. emergency use only. It should be re- ∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at placed with the standard tire at the the same time. first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage. ∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. ∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid CAUTION sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving. ∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO- RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains ∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation will not fit properly and may cause pressure. Always keep the pressure of damage to the vehicle. the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

Do-it-yourself 8-45 MEMO

8-46 Do-it-yourself 9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Additional Maintenance Items for Scheduled maintenance ...... 9-2 severe operating conditions ...... 9-7 Where to go for service ...... 9-2 Standard maintenance...... 9-8 General maintenance ...... 9-2 Emission control system maintenance ...... 9-8 Explanation of general maintenance Chassis & body maintenance...... 9-10 items...... 9-2 Maintenance under severe operating Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 conditions...... 9-12 Emission Control System Maintenance:...... 9-5 Severe driving conditions ...... 9-12 Chassis and Body Maintenance: ...... 9-6 Maintenance log ...... 9-13 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

Some day-to-day and regular mainte- SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE During the normal day-to-day operation of nance is essential to maintain your vehi- the vehicle, general maintenance should cle’s good mechanical condition, as well as The maintenance items listed in this sec- be performed regularly as prescribed in its emissions and engine performance. tion are required to be serviced at regular this section. If you detect any unusual intervals. However under severe driving sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure conditions, additional or more frequent check for the cause or have it checked that the scheduled maintenance, as well as maintenance will be required. general maintenance, is performed. promptly. In addition, it is recommended WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think As the vehicle owner, you are the only one that repairs are required. who can ensure that your vehicle receives If maintenance service is required or your proper maintenance. You are a vital link in vehicle appears to malfunction, have the When performing any checks or mainte- the maintenance chain. systems checked and serviced. It is recom- nance work, closely observe the “Mainte- mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself” GENERAL MAINTENANCE this service. section of this manual. General maintenance includes those items NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe- EXPLANATION OF GENERAL which should be checked during normal cialists and are kept up-to-date with the day-to-day operation. They are essential latest service information through techni- MAINTENANCE ITEMS for proper vehicle operation. It is your re- cal bulletins, service tips and training pro- Additional information on the following sponsibility to perform these procedures grams. They are completely qualified to items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it- regularly as prescribed. work on NISSAN vehicles before work be- yourself” section of this manual. gins. Performing general maintenance checks Outside the vehicle requires minimal mechanical skill and only You can be confident that a NISSAN deal- a few general automotive tools. er’s service department can perform the The maintenance items listed here should These checks or inspections can be done service needed to meet the maintenance be performed from time to time, unless by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you requirements on your vehicle. otherwise specified. prefer, a NISSAN dealer. Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the 9-2 Maintenance and schedules secondary latch keeps the hood from Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve- pedal does not catch or require uneven opening when the primary latch is re- hicle should pull to either side while driving effort. Keep the floor mat away from the leased. on a straight and level road, or if you detect pedal. uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may When driving in areas using road salt or Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer- other corrosive materials, check lubrica- operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high- tion frequently. down further than normal, the pedal feels way speeds, wheel balancing may be spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular needed. to stop, have your vehicle checked imme- basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other For additional information regarding tires, diately. It is recommended that you visit a lights are all operating properly and in- refer to “Important Tire Safety Information” NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the stalled securely. Also check headlight aim. (US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in floor mat away from the pedal. the Warranty Information Booklet. Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check- Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are Windshield: Clean the windshield on a the vehicle to one side when applied. regular basis. Check the windshield at least missing, and check for any loose wheel Continuously Variable Transmission every six months for cracks or other dam- nuts. Tighten if necessary. (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism (if so age. Have a damaged windshield repaired Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev- equipped): On a fairly steep hill check that by a qualified repair facility. ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km). the vehicle is held securely with the shift Windshield wiper blades*: Check for lever in the P (Park) position without apply- Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge ing any brakes. often and always prior to long distance cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly. trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all Inside the vehicle Parking brake: Check the parking brake tires, including the spare, to the pressure operation regularly. The vehicle should be specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts The maintenance items listed here should securely held on a fairly steep hill with only or excessive wear. be checked on a regular basis, such as the parking brake applied. If the parking when performing scheduled maintenance, brake needs adjustment, it is recom- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for transmitter components: Replace the cleaning the vehicle, etc. this service. TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for and cap when the tires are replaced due to smooth operation and make sure the Seats: Check seat position controls such wear or age. as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to Maintenance and schedules 9-3 ensure they operate smoothly and all Under the hood and vehicle fluid levels are between the MIN and MAX latches lock securely in every position. lines on the reservoir. Check that the head restraints/headrests The maintenance items listed here should Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant move up and down smoothly and the locks be checked periodically (for example, each level when the engine is cold. (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched time you check the engine oil or refuel). positions. Battery* (for serviceable batteries): Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily. Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, should be at the bottom of the filler open- Engine oil level*: Check the level after adjusters and retractors) operate properly ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera- parking the vehicle on a level surface with and smoothly, and are installed securely. tures or under severe conditions require the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, frequent checks of the battery fluid level. for the oil to drain back into the oil pan. wear or damage. NOTE: Exhaust system: Make sure there are no Steering wheel: Check for changes in the loose supports, cracks or holes. If the steering system, such as excessive free Care should be taken to avoid situations sound of the exhaust seems unusual or play, hard steering or strange noises. that can lead to potential battery dis- there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi- charge and potential no-start conditions ately have the exhaust system inspected. It Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all such as: is recommended that you visit a NISSAN warning lights and chimes are operating 1. Installation or extended use of elec- dealer for this service. For additional infor- properly. tronic accessories that consume bat- mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon- Windshield defroster: Check that the air tery power when the engine is not oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section comes out of the defroster outlets properly running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD of this manual. and in sufficient quantity when operating players, etc.). Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for the heater or air conditioner. 2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the Windshield wiper and washer*: Check only driven short distances. vehicle has been parked for a while. Water that the wipers and washer operate prop- In these cases, the battery may need to dripping from the air conditioner after use erly and that the wipers do not streak. be charged to maintain battery health. is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid and have it corrected immediately. level*: Make sure that the brake and clutch 9-4 Maintenance and schedules EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the The following descriptions are provided to NOTE: radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, give you a better understanding of the NISSAN does not advocate the use of leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. scheduled maintenance items that should non-OEM approved aftermarket flush- Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor- be regularly checked or replaced. The ing systems and strongly advises mation, rot or loose connections. maintenance schedule indicates at which against performing these services on a mileage/time intervals each item requires Underbody: The underbody is frequently NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar- service. exposed to corrosive substances such as ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap- those used on icy roads or to control dust. It In addition to scheduled maintenance, proved chemicals or solvents, the use of is very important to remove these sub- your vehicle requires that some items be which has not been validated by NISSAN. stances from the underbody, otherwise checked during normal day-to-day opera- rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, tion. For additional information, refer to lines and exhaust system. At the end of grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom- “General maintenance” in this section. winter, the underbody should be thor- mended fluids/lubricants and capaci- oughly flushed with plain water, in those Items marked with “*” are recommended ties” in the “Technical and consumer in- areas where mud and dirt may have accu- by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. formation” section of this manual. mulated. For additional information, refer You are not required to perform mainte- to the “Appearance and care” section of this nance on these items in order to maintain EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM manual. the warranties which come with your MAINTENANCE: Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in- Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for there is adequate fluid in the reservoir. tervals are required. wear, fraying or cracking and for proper When applicable, additional information tension. Replace any damaged drive belt. can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter- of this manual. vals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently. Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) Maintenance and schedules 9-5 or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every additional information on the proper mix- Install new plugs of the type as originally 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in- ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling equipped. structions under “General maintenance” in system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this section. When rotating tires, check for this manual.) CHASSIS AND BODY damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec- MAINTENANCE: essary. NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may re- Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for duce the recommended service interval proper installation. Check for chafing, signs of leakage at specified intervals. If of the coolant. cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough Replace any deteriorated or damaged or muddy roads: Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For parts immediately. ∙ Replace the manual transaxle gear oil every 20,000 miles or 24 months. recommended oil grade and viscosity refer Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings: to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and Check for wear, deterioration and fluid ∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles capacities” in the “Technical and consumer leaks. Replace any deteriorated or dam- (96,000 km) or request the dealer to in- information” section of this manual. aged parts immediately. spect the fluid deterioration data using Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex- more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid. valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear- haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, ance if necessary. cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten Evaporative emissions control vapor connections or replace parts as necessary. lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose- In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified ness. Tighten connections or replace parts intervals. When driving for prolonged peri- as necessary. ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not re- more frequently. quired. (in-tank type filter) Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus- Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check and connections for leaks, looseness, or for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil deterioration. Tighten connections or re- or grease. Under severe driving conditions, place parts as necessary. inspect more frequently. 9-6 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi- ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte- FOR SEVERE OPERATING ing for long distances, such as police, nance schedules that may be used, de- taxi or door-to-door delivery use. pending upon the conditions in which you CONDITIONS ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. usually drive. These schedules contain Additional maintenance items for severe both distance and time intervals, up to operating conditions should be per- ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For formed on vehicles that are driven under roads. most people, the odometer reading will in- especially demanding conditions. Addi- ∙ Using a car-top carrier. dicate when service is needed. However, if tional maintenance items should be per- you drive very little, your vehicle should be formed if you primarily operate your vehicle NOTE: serviced at the regular time intervals under the following conditions: shown in the schedule. For vehicles operated in Canada, both ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles standard and severe maintenance items After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/ (8 km). should be performed at every interval. 144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- and-go “rush hour” traffic.

Maintenance and schedules 9-7 STANDARD MAINTENANCE

The following tables show the standard varying road surfaces, individual driving quired. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/ maintenance schedule. Depending upon habits and vehicle usage, additional or 144 months, continue maintenance at weather and atmospheric conditions, more frequent maintenance may be re- the same mileage/time interval. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I* Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR Spark plugs (Iridium/Platinum - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (7)

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Drive belt See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I* Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R EVAP vapor lines I* I* I* Fuel lines I* I* I*

9-8 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Fuel filter See NOTE (3) Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5) Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR Spark plugs (Iridium/Platinum - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) Intake and exhaust valve clearances See NOTE (7)

NOTE: (1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belt if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Periodic maintenance is not required. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) For MRA8DE: Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even within specified periodic replacement mileage. For MR16DDT: Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.045 in (1.15 mm) even within specified periodic replacement mileage. (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance. * Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9 CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96) Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 Brakelinesandcables IIIIII Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings ૽ IIIIII Brake fluid ૽ RRR CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension III parts ૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (3) Front drive shaft boots ૽ IIIIII Exhaust system ૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R

MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Brakelinesandcables IIIIII Brake pads, rotors, drum and linings ૽ IIIIII Brake fluid ૽ RRR CVTfluid SeeNOTE(1)IIIIII Manual transmission gear oil See NOTE (2) I IIIII

9-10 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE OPERATION MAINTENANCE INTERVAL Perform at number of miles, kilometers or miles x 1,000 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 months, whichever comes first. (km x 1,000) (104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192) Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension III parts ૽ Tire rotation See NOTE (3) Front drive shaft boots ૽ IIIIII Exhaust system ૽ III In-cabin microfilter RRRR NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE: Maintenance items with “૽” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”. (1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. (2) If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months. (3) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS ∙ Operating in hot weather in stop- ∙ Driving in dusty conditions. and-go “rush hour” traffic. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles ∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread (8 km). ∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv- roads. ing for long distance, such as police, taxi ∙ Using a car-top carrier. ∙ Repeated short trips of less than or door-to-door delivery use. 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing. Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Brake pads, rotors, drum and lining Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

9-12 Maintenance and schedules MAINTENANCE LOG

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-13 50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules 95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months 120 Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp: 110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months Months Months Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Dealer Name: Date: Date: Date: Mileage: Mileage: Mileage: Dealer Dealer Dealer Stamp: Stamp: Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15 MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules 10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and Emission control information label ...... 10-12 capacities ...... 10-2 Tire and Loading Information label ...... 10-13 Fuel recommendation...... 10-4 Air conditioner specification label Engine oil and oil filter (if so equipped) ...... 10-13 recommendations ...... 10-7 Installing front license plate...... 10-13 Air conditioner system (if so equipped) Vehicle loading information ...... 10-14 refrigerant and oil recommendations...... 10-8 Terms ...... 10-14 Specifications ...... 10-9 Vehicle load capacity ...... 10-15 Engine ...... 10-9 Loading tips ...... 10-17 Wheels and tires...... 10-10 Measurement of weights ...... 10-18 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 Towing a trailer ...... 10-18 When traveling or registering in another Flat towing ...... 10-18 country...... 10-11 Uniform tire quality grading...... 10-19 Vehicle identification ...... 10-11 Emission control system warranty...... 10-20 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) Reporting safety defects ...... 10-20 plate ...... 10-11 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Vehicle identification number test...... 10-21 (chassis number) ...... 10-11 Event Data Recorders (EDR)...... 10-22 Engine serial number...... 10-12 Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 information ...... 10-22 RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in Fuel 50 L 13-1/4 gal 11 gal this section. With oil filter 4.0 L 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt Engine oil*1 change Drain and refill MRA8DE Without oil • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended. *1 For additional 3.7 L 4 qt 3-1/4 qt filter change • If the above motor oil is not available, use a synthetic 0W-20 information, refer to With oil filter GF-5 SN motor oil. For additional information, refer to “Engine “Engine oil” in the 4.4 L 4-5/8 qt 3-7/8 qt change oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section. “Do-it-yourself” sec- MR16DDT Without oil tion of this manual. 4.1 L 4-3/8 qt 3-5/8 qt filter change MRA8DE 6.6 L 1-3/4 gal 1-1/2 gal With manual transmis- 8.5 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal sion Engine coolant • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant With con- with reservoir MR16DDT (blue) or equivalent. tinuously variable 8.7 L 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal transmission • Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type 75W-80, or equivalent. • If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Manual transmission fluid — — — Type is not available, API GL-4+, Viscosity SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TL/JR Type as soon as it is available.

10-2 Technical and consumer information Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants Metric US Imperial Measure Measure Measure • Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3. • NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid — — — • Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (lithium soap base) • HFC-134a (R-134a) • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — so equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent • For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system (if Air conditioning system oil — — — so equipped) refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section. • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Windshield-washer fluid 4.8 L 1-1/4 gal 1 gal Antifreeze fluid or equivalent

Technical and consumer information 10-3 FUEL RECOMMENDATION ∙ Under no circumstances should a ∙ U.S. government regulations require MRA8DE leaded gasoline be used, because this ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- will damage the three-way catalyst. tified by a small, square, orange and Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- black label with the common abbre- ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock viation or the appropriate percentage than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your Index) number (Research octane number for that region. vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel 91). containing more than 15% ethanol. Gasoline specifications MR16DDT Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically NISSAN recommends using gasoline that NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded designed for a fuel containing more meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) premium gasoline with an octane rating of than 15% ethanol can adversely affect specifications where it is available. Many of at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number the emission control devices and sys- the automobile manufacturers developed (Research octane number 96). If unleaded tems of the vehicle. Damage caused this specification to improve emission con- premium gasoline is not available, you may by such fuel is not covered by the trol system and vehicle performance. Ask use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications. tane rating of at least 87 AKI number (re- ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- search octane number 91), but you may tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl Reformulated gasoline notice a decrease in performance. manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely Some fuel suppliers are now producing re- CAUTION affect vehicle performance and ve- formulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emis- ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards label can operate on E-85. Fuel system ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- cleaner air and suggests that you use re- or other damage can occur if E-85 is tent, so you may have to consult your formulated gasoline when available. used in vehicles that are not designed gasoline retailer for more details. to run on E-85. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified lated gasoline. could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage. 10-4 Technical and consumer information Gasoline containing oxygenates ∙ If a methanol blend is used, it should orange and black label with the common contain no more than 5% methanol abbreviation or the appropriate percent- Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain- (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It age for that region. ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl should also contain a suitable E–85 fuel Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with amount of appropriate cosolvents or without advertising their presence. and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop- E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% NISSAN does not recommend the use of erly formulated with appropriate co- fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. fuels of which the oxygenate content and solvents and corrosion inhibitors, E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can- such methanol blends may cause fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve- not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask system damage and/or vehicle per- hicle. U.S. government regulations require your service station manager. formance problems. At this time, suf- fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- ficient data is not available to ensure tified by a small, square, orange and black If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, that all methanol blends are suitable label with the common abbreviation or the please take the following precautions as for use in NISSAN vehicles. appropriate percentage for that region. the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system If any driveability problems such as engine Fuel containing MMT damage. stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe- rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga- ∙ The fuel should be unleaded and have immediately change to a non-oxygenate nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad- an octane rating no lower than that fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE. ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the recommended for unleaded gasoline. use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may Take care not to spill gasoline during re- adversely affect vehicle performance, in- ∙ If an oxygenate-blend other than fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cluding the emissions control system. Note methanol blend is used, it should can cause paint damage. that while some fuel pumps label MMT contain no more than 15% oxygenate. E–15 fuel content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more de- E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% tails. fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, Technical and consumer information 10-5 Aftermarket fuel additives Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, NISSAN does not recommend the use of which may cause excessive fuel consump- any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex- tion or engine damage. If any of the above ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane symptoms are encountered, have your ve- booster, intake valve deposit removers, hicle checked. It is recommended that you etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing. these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active sol- However, now and then you may notice vents or similar ingredients that can be light spark knock for a short time while harmful to the fuel system and engine. accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the Octane rating tips greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy Using unleaded gasoline with an octane engine load. rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.

10-6 Technical and consumer information Oil viscosity The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage. Selecting the correct oil filter Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When LTI2051 replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER International Lubricant Standardization and its equivalent for the reason described in RECOMMENDATIONS Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and “Change intervals.” SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API Selecting the correct oil certification mark on the front of the con- Change intervals tainer. Oils which do not have the specified The oil and oil filter change intervals for It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality label should not be used as they could your engine are based on the use of the quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure cause engine damage. satisfactory engine life and performance. specified quality oils and filters. Using en- For additional information, refer to “Recom- Oil additives gine oil and filters that are not of the speci- mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil and filter change intervals could reduce in this section. NISSAN recommends the additives. The use of an oil additive is not engine life. Damage to the engine caused use of an energy conserving oil in order to necessary when the proper oil type is used by improper maintenance or use of incor- improve fuel economy. and maintenance intervals are followed. rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is Select only engine oils that meet the Ameri- Oil which may contain foreign matter or has not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle can Petroleum Institute (API) certification or been previously used should not be used. Limited Warranty. Technical and consumer information 10-7 Your engine was filled with a high-quality AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM (if so It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN engine oil when it was built.You do not have equipped) REFRIGERANT AND OIL dealer when servicing your air conditioner to change the oil before the first recom- system. mended change interval. Oil and filter RECOMMENDATIONS change intervals depend upon how you The air conditioner system in your use your vehicle. NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the Operation under the following conditions refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and may require more frequent oil and filter NISSAN A/C system oil Type S (DH-PS) or changes: the exact equivalents. ∙ repeated short distance driving at cold CAUTION outside temperatures The use of any other refrigerant or oil ∙ driving in dusty conditions may cause severe damage to the air ∙ extensive idling conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner ∙ stop and go commuting system components. For additional information, refer to the The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your “Maintenance and schedules” section of NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s this manual. ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.

10-8 Technical and consumer information SPECIFICATIONS

ENGINE

Model MRA8DE MR16DDT Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder, inline 4-cylinder, inline Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.138 x 3.547 (79.7 x 90.1) 3.138 x 3.193 (79.7 x 81.1) Displacement cu in (cm3) 109.71 (1,798) 98.73 (1,618) Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–3–4–2 Idle speed M/T CVT (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary. No adjustment is necessary. Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO%atidle PLZKAR6A-11 (all except California models) Spark plug DILKAR7E9HS DILKAR6A-11 (California models) Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.035 (0.9) Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

Technical and consumer information 10-9 WHEELS AND TIRES DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Model Unit: in (mm) Overall length NISMO 183.6 (4,664) Wheel type Size Offset in (mm) Except NISMO 182.5 (4,636) Aluminum 16 x 6.5J 1.77 (45) Overall width 69.3 (1,761) 17 x 6.5J 1.77 (45) Overall height NISMO 58.9 (1,497) S and SV 58.8 (1,495) 18 x 7J 1.77 (45) SR, SR Turbo and SL 59.0 (1,499) Steel 16 x 6.5JJ 1.77 (45) Front Track 60.2 (1,530) Rear Track 60.2 (1,530) Tire size P205/55R16 Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700) 205/50R17 Gross vehicle weight rat- Refer to “F.M.V.S.S./C. ing lbs. (kg) M.V.S.S. certification 215/45ZR18 Gross axle weight rating label” on the center Spare tire T125/70D16 pillar between the Front lbs. (kg) driver’s side front Rear lbs. (kg) and rear doors.

10-10 Technical and consumer information WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine. Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available. When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws LTI2050 STI0465 and regulations. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The laws and regulations for motor vehicle (VIN) PLATE (chassis number) emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, prov- The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) The vehicle identification number is lo- ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica- plate is attached as shown. This number is cated as shown. tions may differ. the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration. When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.

Technical and consumer information 10-11 LDI2189 STI0349 WTI0189 ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION EMISSION CONTROL The number is stamped on the engine as LABEL INFORMATION LABEL shown. The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle The emission control information label is Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi- attached to the underside of the hood as cation label is affixed as shown. This label shown. contains valuable vehicle information, such as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

10-12 Technical and consumer information INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

LTI0197 LTI2048 LTI2231 TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION Type A (if so equipped) LABEL LABEL (if so equipped) Type A (if so equipped) with grommets: Use the following steps to mount the front The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire The air conditioner specification label is af- license plate: and Loading Information label. The label is fixed to the underside of the hood as 1. Hold the front license plate bracket located as shown. shown. against the front bumper fascia and mark two locations ᭺A . 2. Drill two shallow 0.39 in (10 mm) holes in the front bumper fascia at the two locations marked in the previous step.

Technical and consumer information 10-13 VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

WARNING ∙ It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. ∙ Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. ∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt LTI2232 LTI2378 properly. Type A (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped) 3. Insert two grommets ᭺B into the holes Type B (if so equipped) without grom- TERMS in the front bumper fascia. mets: Install the license plate bracket to the front bumper fascia using the two It is important to familiarize yourself 4. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver screws ᭺D provided. with the following terms before into the grommet holes to turn the threaded part of the grommet 90°. loading your vehicle: 5. Mount the front license plate bracket ∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of using two screws ᭺C . your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard parts, fluids, emergency tools and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.

10-14 Technical and consumer information ∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb ∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY limit, Total load capacity - maxi- weight plus the combined weight Do not exceed the load limit of your mum total weight limit specified of passengers and cargo. vehicle shown as “The combined of the load (passengers and weight of occupants and cargo” on ∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat- cargo) for the vehicle. This is the the Tire and Loading Information la- ing) - maximum total combined maximum combined weight of bel. Do not exceed the number of weight of the unloaded vehicle, occupants and cargo that can be occupants shown as “Seating Ca- passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer loaded into the vehicle. If the ve- pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor- tongue load and any other op- hicle is used to tow a trailer, the mation label. tional equipment. This informa- trailer tongue weight must be in- tion is located on the cluded as part of the cargo load. To get “the combined weight of oc- F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification This information is located on the cupants and cargo”, add the weight label. Tire and Loading Information la- of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are ∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - bel. shown in the following illustration. maximum weight (load) limit ∙ Cargo capacity - permissible specified for the front or rear axle. weight of cargo, the subtracted This information is located on the weight of occupants from the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification load limit. label. ∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.

Technical and consumer information 10-15 Steps for determining correct load limit 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information label. 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg. 4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = LTI2335 Example 300 kg.) 10-16 Technical and consumer information 5. Determine the combined weight ∙ Do not load the front and rear ∙ Overloading not only can of luggage and cargo being axle to the GAWR. Doing so will shorten the life of your vehicle loaded on the vehicle. That exceed the GVWR. and the tire, but can also cause weight may not safely exceed unsafe vehicle handling and the available cargo and luggage WARNING longer braking distances. This load capacity calculated in ∙ Properly secure all cargo with may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a seri- step 4. ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not ous accident and personal in- Before driving a loaded vehicle, con- place cargo higher than the jury. Failures caused by firm that you do not exceed the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or overloading are not covered by Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) collision, unsecured cargo could the vehicle’s warranty. or the Gross Axle Weight Rating cause personal injury. (GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi- ∙ Do not load your vehicle any tional information, refer to “Measure- heavier than the GVWR or the ment of weights” in this section. maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your Also check tires for proper inflation vehicle can break, tire damage pressures. For additional informa- could occur, or it can change the tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor- way your vehicle handles. This mation label” in this section. could result in loss of control and cause personal injury. LOADING TIPS ∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

Technical and consumer information 10-17 TOWING A TRAILER

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle. MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS ∙ For emergency towing procedures re- Secure loose items to prevent FLAT TOWING fer to “Towing recommended by NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency” weight shifts that could affect the Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on section of this manual. balance of your vehicle. When the ve- the ground is sometimes called flat towing. hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and This method is sometimes used when Manual Transmission (if so weigh the front and the rear wheels towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve- equipped) separately to determine axle loads. hicle, such as a motor home. ∙ Always tow with the manual transmis- Individual axle loads should not ex- sion in N (Neutral). ceed either of the gross axle weight CAUTION ∙ After towing 500 miles (805 km), start ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle ∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can and idle the engine with the transmis- loads should not exceed the gross result in severe transmission damage. sion in N (Neutral) for two minutes. Fail- vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These ∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al- ure to idle the engine after every ratings are given on the vehicle cer- ways tow forward, never backward. 500 miles (805 km) of towing may cause damage to internal transmission parts. tification label. If weight ratings are ∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve- exceeded, move or remove items to hicle with the front tires on the Continuously Variable bring all weights below the ratings. ground. Doing so may cause serious Transmission (if so equipped) and expensive damage to the powertrain. To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate ∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the transmission vehicle with all four towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Always follow wheels on the ground (flat towing). the dolly manufacturer’s recommenda- Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans- tions when using their product. mission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.

10-18 Technical and consumer information UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual- conditions on specified government test WARNING ity Grades: All passenger car tires must surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire conform to federal safety requirements in marked C may have poor traction perfor- The temperature grade for this tire is addition to these grades. mance. established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive Quality grades can be found where appli- WARNING speed, under-inflation, or excessive cable on the tire sidewall between tread loading, either separately or in combi- shoulder and maximum section width. For The traction grade assigned to this tire nation, can cause heat build-up and example: is based on straight-ahead braking possible tire failure. traction tests, and does not include ac- Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or Treadwear peak traction characteristics. The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- Temperature A, B and C ing based on the wear rate of the tire when The temperature grades are A (the high- tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For ex- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis- ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one tance to the generation of heat, and its and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the ability to dissipate heat when tested under government course as a tire graded 100. controlled conditions on a specified indoor The relative performance of tires depends laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem- upon the actual conditions of their use, perature can cause the material of the tire however, and may depart significantly from to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex- the norm due to variations in driving habits, cessive temperature can lead to sudden service practices and differences in road tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a characteristics and climate. level of performance which all passenger Traction AA, A, B and C car tires must meet under the Federal Mo- tor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades The traction grades, from highest to low- B and A represent higher levels of perfor- est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre- mance on the laboratory test wheel than sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave- the minimum required by law. ment as measured under controlled Technical and consumer information 10-19 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS WARRANTY

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol- For Canada For USA lowing emission warranties: Emission Control System Warranty If you believe that your vehicle has a For USA Details of this warranty may be found with defect which could cause a crash or 1. Emission Defects Warranty other vehicle warranties in your Warranty could cause injury or death, you Information Booklet which comes with 2. Emissions Performance Warranty should immediately inform the Na- your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Details of this warranty may be found with Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin- other vehicle warranties in your Warranty you may obtain a replacement by writing istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti- Information Booklet which comes with to: fying NISSAN. your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a ∙ Nissan Canada Inc. Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, If NHTSA receives similar complaints, 5290 Orbitor Drive you may obtain a replacement by writing it may open an investigation, and if it Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5 to: finds that a safety defect exists in a ∙ Nissan North America, Inc. group of vehicles, it may order a re- Consumer Affairs Department call and remedy campaign. However, P.O. Box 685003 NHTSA cannot become involved in Franklin, TN 37068-5003 individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. 10-20 Technical and consumer information READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

You may notify NISSAN by contact- fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speak- Due to legal requirements in some states ing our Consumer Affairs Depart- ers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ be required to be in what is called the ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1. “ready condition” for an fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers) For Canada Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the Additional information concerning emission control system. If you believe that your vehicle has a motor vehicle safety may be obtained The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” defect which could cause a crash or from Transport Canada’s Road Safety when it is driven through certain driving could cause injury or death, you Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 patterns. Usually, the ready condition can should immediately inform Trans- or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve- port Canada in addition to notifying (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/ hicle. NISSAN. securiteroutiere (French speakers). If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the If Transport Canada receives com- To notify NISSAN of any safety con- vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi- plaints, it may open an investigation, cerns please contact our Consumer tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the and if it finds that a safety defect Information Centre toll free at 1-800- vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test exists in a group of vehicles, it may 387-0122. readiness condition. Place the ignition request that NISSAN conduct a recall switch in the ON position without starting campaign. However, Transport the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds Canada cannot become involved in and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test individual problems between you, condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not your dealer, or NISSAN. blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is “ready”. It is recommended that you You may contact Transport Canada’s visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con- Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi- dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing. sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/ Saf-Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/ Technical and consumer information 10-21 EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data These data can help provide a better un- Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an derstanding of the circumstances in which model year and prior can be purchased. A EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best crash-like situations, such as an air bag are recorded by your vehicle only if a non- source of service and repair information for deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data trivial crash situation occurs; no data are your vehicle. This manual is the same one that will assist in understanding how a ve- recorded by the EDR under normal driving used by the factory-trained technicians hicle’s systems performed. The EDR is de- conditions and no personal data (e.g. working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine signed to record data related to vehicle dy- name, gender, age and crash location) are NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur- namics and safety systems for a short recorded. However, other parties, such as chased. period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. law enforcement, could combine the EDR For USA The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re- data with the type of personally identifying cord such data as: data routinely acquired during a crash in- For current pricing and availability of Genu- vestigation. ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact: ∙ How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special www.nissan-techinfo.com equipment is required and access to the ∙ Whether or not the driver and passen- vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to For current pricing and availability of Genu- ger safety belts were buckled/fastened; the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact: ∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress- dealer, other parties, such as law enforce- 1-800-247-5321 ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; ment, that have the special equipment, can and, read the information if they have access to For Canada the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be ∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling. To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN accessed with the consent of the vehicle Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this ∙ Sounds are not recorded. owner or lessee or as otherwise required or model year and prior, please visit the near- permitted by law. est NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep- resentative will assist you.

10-22 Technical and consumer information 11 Index

Alarm system A (See vehicle security system) ...... 2-35 B Anchor point locations...... 1-27 Air bag Antenna ...... 4-51 Battery...... 5-77,8-14 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-43 Antifreeze ...... 5-77 Charge warning light...... 2-15 Air bag system Anti-lock brake warning light...... 2-14 Battery replacement ...... 8-25 Front (See supplemental front Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...... 5-73 Keyfob...... 8-25,8-26 impact air bag system) ...... 1-50 Armrests...... 1-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...... 8-27 Side and curtain (See supplemental Audible reminders ...... 2-23 Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 side air bag and curtain side-impact Audiosystem...... 4-31 Belt(Seedrivebelt)...... 8-16 airbagsystem)...... 1-58 AM/FMradio...... 4-36,4-38 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ...... 5-27 Air bag warning labels ...... 1-61 AM radio operation...... 4-38 Bluetooth® audio...... 4-46 Airbagwarninglight...... 1-62, 2-19 AMradioreception...... 4-32 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system. .4-54 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . .1-62, Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-39 Bluetooth® connections ...... 4-69 2-19 Bluetooth® audio...... 4-46 Connecting procedure ...... 4-60 Air cleaner ...... 8-18 FM radio operation...... 4-39 Phone indicators ...... 4-58 Air cleaner housing filter ...... 8-18 FMradioreception...... 4-32 Text messaging...... 4-65 Air conditioner iPod®Player...... 4-43 Voice commands...... 4-61 Air conditioner operation ....4-23,4-29 iPod® player operation ...... 4-43 Booster seats ...... 1-40 Air conditioner service ...... 4-31 Radio ...... 4-31 Brake Air conditioner specification label . .10-13 Steering wheel audio control switch. .4-49 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ....5-73 Air conditioner system refrigerant USB Connections ...... 4-41 Brakefluid...... 8-12 and oil recommendations ...... 10-8 USBinterface...... 4-40 Brakelight(Seestoplight)...... 8-32 Air conditioner system refrigerant USB (Universal Serial Bus) Brakesystem...... 5-72 recommendations ...... 10-8 Connection Port ...... 4-40 Brakewarninglight...... 2-14 Heater and air conditioner Autolightswitch...... 2-41 Brakewearindicators...... 2-23,8-21 (automatic) (if so equipped) ...... 4-28 Automatic Self-adjustingbrakes...... 8-21 Heater and air conditioner Automatic power window switch. . .2-56 Brakeandclutchfluid...... 8-12 controls...... 4-21,4-29 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ....3-31 Brake Assist ...... 5-74 Heater and air conditioner Automatic door locks ...... 3-7 Brakefluid...... 8-12 (manual) ...... 4-20 Automatic Emergency Braking Brakes...... 8-21 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-31 (AEB) ...... 2-14,5-62 Brakesystem...... 5-72 Air flow charts ...... 4-18,4-24 Break-in schedule ...... 5-68 Brightness/contrast button ...... 4-7 Driving with Continuously Variable Driving Brightness control Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-9,5-17 Coldweatherdriving...... 5-77 Instrument panel ...... 2-44 Control panel buttons ...... 4-3 Driving with Continuously Variable Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-14 Brightness/contrast button ...... 4-7 Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-9,5-17 Bulb replacement ...... 8-32 Controls Driving with manual Audio controls (steering wheel) ....4-49 transmission ...... 5-10,5-23 Heater and air conditioner Precautions when starting and C controls...... 4-21,4-29 driving ...... 5-2 Coolant Driving the vehicle ...... 5-17 Capacities and recommended Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . .10-14 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-7 E Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-54 Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-6 Check tire press ...... 2-6 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7 E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH ...... 2-48 Check tire pressure ...... 2-33 Corrosionprotection...... 7-8 ECO mode switch ...... 5-26 Childrestraints...... 1-20, 1-21, 1-23, 1-25 Cruisecontrol...... 5-45 Economy - fuel ...... 5-70 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Cupholders...... 2-53,2-54 Emergency engine shutoff...... 5-13 CHildren)System...... 1-25 Curtain side-impact air bag system Emission control information label . . . .10-12 Precautions on child (See supplemental side air bag and Emission control system warranty . . . .10-20 restraints...... 1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40 curtain side-impact air bag system). . . .1-58 Engine Top tether strap anchor point Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 locations...... 1-27 Capacities and recommended D Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Chimes, audible reminders ...... 2-23 Changing engine coolant ...... 8-7 Daytime Running Light System . . .2-43, 2-44 Cleaningexteriorandinterior...... 7-2,7-4 Changing engine oil ...... 8-8 Defroster switch Clockset...... 4-5 Changing engine oil filter...... 8-10 Rear window and outside mirror Clutch Checking engine coolant level ...... 8-6 defrosterswitch...... 2-40 Clutchfluid...... 8-12 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-7 Dimensions and weights ...... 10-10 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Engine compartment check Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-44 Coldweatherdriving...... 5-77 locations...... 8-3 Display controls Console box ...... 2-52 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7 (see control panel buttons) ...... 4-3 Console light ...... 2-60 Engine cooling system ...... 8-5 Door locks ...... 3-5 Continuously Variable Transmission Engine oil ...... 8-7 Door open warning light ...... 2-15 (CVT) ...... 5-9,5-17 Engine oil and oil filter Drivebelt...... 8-16 Continuously Variable Transmission recommendation ...... 10-7 (CVT) fluid ...... 8-11 Engine oil pressure warning light....2-15 11-2 Engine oil viscosity...... 10-7 Frontseats...... 1-2 H Engine serial number ...... 10-12 Fuel Capacities and recommended Engine specifications ...... 10-9 Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-54 Starting the engine ...... 5-14 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Fuel economy ...... 5-70 Hazardwarningflasherswitch...... 6-2 Engine Block Heater ...... 5-78 Headlight and turn signal switch...... 2-40 Engine coolant temperature gauge.....2-7 Fuel-filler cap ...... 3-28 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-27 Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-40 EventDatarecorders...... 10-22 Headlights...... 8-29 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide)...... 5-2 Fuel-filler lid ...... 3-28 Fuel gauge ...... 2-8 Headrestraints...... 1-7 Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2 Fueloctanerating...... 10-6 Heatedseats...... 2-46 Explanation of scheduled maintenance Fuel recommendation ...... 10-4 Heated seat switches ...... 2-46 items...... 9-5 Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-6,2-33 Heater Extended storage switch ...... 8-25 Fuel efficient driving tips ...... 5-68 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) Eyeglasscase...... 2-53 Fuel-filler door ...... 3-27 (if so equipped) ...... 4-28 Fuel gauge ...... 2-8 Heater and air conditioner controls . .4-21, 4-29 F Fuses...... 8-22 Fusiblelinks...... 8-23 Heater and air conditioner (manual)...... 4-20 Flashers Heater operation ....4-15,4-17,4-22,4-30 (See hazard warning flasher switch) ....6-2 G Heater and air conditioner (automatic). .4-28 Flattire...... 6-3,6-3 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. .2-62, 2-63, Floormatpositioningaid...... 7-7 Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal 2-64, 2-65, 2-65, 2-66 Fluid Transceiver . .2-62, 2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-65, 2-66 Hood ...... 3-25 Brakefluid...... 8-12 Gascap...... 3-28 Horn...... 2-46 Capacities and recommended Gauge fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7 Clutchfluid...... 8-12 Fuel gauge ...... 2-8 I Continuously Variable Transmission Odometer ...... 2-5 (CVT) fluid ...... 8-11 Speedometer...... 2-4,2-5 Ignition switch ...... 5-9 Engine coolant ...... 8-5 Tachometer ...... 2-7 Push-button ignition switch ...... 5-11 Engine oil ...... 8-7 Trip computer ...... 2-9 Immobilizer system...... 2-37,5-10,5-14 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Trip odometer ...... 2-4,2-5 Important vehicle information label . . .10-12 Foglightswitch...... 2-45 General maintenance ...... 9-2 In-cabinmicrofilter...... 8-19 Front air bag system Glovebox...... 2-52 Increasing fuel economy...... 5-70 (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-50 Indicator Front-door pocket ...... 2-49 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-5 discharge indicator ...... 5-13 11-3 Indicator lights and audible reminders Keys Headlights...... 8-29 (See warning/indicator lights and NISSAN Intelligent Key®...... 3-2,3-11 Interiorlight...... 2-59,2-61 audible reminders) ...... 2-20,3-21 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System Lightbulbs...... 8-29 Inside automatic anti-glare mirror .....3-31 keys...... 3-4 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-16 Instrument brightness control ...... 2-44 Low windshield-washer fluid Instrument panel ...... 0-6,2-2 warninglight...... 2-18,2-33 Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-44 L Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53 Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) ...... 5-47 Security indicator light ...... 2-22 Intelligent Key system Labels Spotlights(Seemaplight)...... 2-60 Key operating range...... 3-13 Air conditioner specification label . . .10-13 Trunklight...... 2-62 Key operation ...... 3-14 C.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Warning/indicator lights and Mechanical key ...... 3-4 Emission control information label . .10-12 audible reminders...... 2-20,3-21 Remote keyless entry operation. .3-9, 3-18 Engine serial number ...... 10-12 Lights...... 8-29 Troubleshooting guide...... 3-23,3-24 F.M.V.S.S. certification label ...... 10-12 Maplights...... 2-60 Warning signals ...... 3-23,3-24 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Lock Interiorlight...... 2-59,2-61 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-11 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Interiortrunklidrelease...... 3-26 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Door locks ...... 3-5 iPod®Player...... 4-43 plate...... 10-11 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-27 ISOFIX child restraints ...... 1-25 Warning labels (for SRS) ...... 1-61 Power door locks ...... 3-6 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-26 CHildren)System...... 1-25 J Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-6,2-33 Launch bar menu...... 4-7 Lowfuelwarninglight...... 2-16, 2-18, 2-32 License plate Jumpstarting...... 6-9,8-15 Low tire pressure warning light ...... 2-16 Installing the license plate ...... 10-13 Low windshield-washer fluid Light warninglight...... 2-18,2-33 K Airbagwarninglight...... 1-62, 2-19 Luggage Brakelight(Seestoplight)...... 8-32 (See vehicle loading information) .....10-14 Key...... 3-2 Bulb check/instrument panel ...... 2-14 Key fob battery replacement.....8-25,8-26 Bulb replacement ...... 8-32 Keyless entry Charge warning light ...... 2-15 M With Intelligent Key system Console light ...... 2-60 (See Intelligent Key system).....3-9,3-18 ExteriorandInteriorlights...... 8-32 Maintenance Without Intelligent Key system Foglights...... 8-30 General maintenance ...... 9-2 (See remote keyless entry system) . . .3-8 Foglightswitch...... 2-45 Insidethevehicle...... 9-3 Headlight and turn signal switch....2-40 Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-40 Outsidethevehicle...... 9-2 11-4 Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-20 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-56 O Under the hood and vehicle ...... 9-4 Poweroutlet...... 2-48 Powersteering...... 5-71 Maintenance log ...... 9-13 Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . .10-6 Precautions Maintenance requirements...... 9-2 Odometer ...... 2-5 Maintenance precautions...... 8-2 Maintenance schedules ...... 9-7 Oil Precautions on booster Maintenance under severe operation Capacities and recommended seats...... 1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40 conditions...... 9-12 fuel/lubricants...... 10-2 Precautions on child Malfunctionindicatorlight...... 2-21 Changing engine oil ...... 8-8 restraints...... 1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40 Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Changing engine oil filter...... 8-10 Precautionsonseatbeltusage.....1-12 Maplights...... 2-60 Checking engine oil level ...... 8-7 Precautions on supplemental Engine oil ...... 8-7 Map pocket ...... 2-49 restraintsystem...... 1-43 Engine oil and oil filter Menu button ...... 4-5 Precautions when starting and recommendation ...... 10-7 Meters and gauges ...... 2-3 driving ...... 5-2 Engine oil viscosity...... 10-7 Instrument brightness control .....2-44 Programmable features...... 4-5 Outsidemirrorcontrol...... 3-32 Mirror Push starting ...... 6-11 Automatic anti-glare inside mirror . . .3-31 Outsidemirrors...... 3-32 Outsidemirrorcontrol...... 3-32 Overhead sunglasses holder ...... 2-53 Outsidemirrors...... 3-32 Overheat R Ifyourvehicleoverheats...... 6-11 Rearview...... 3-31 Owner's manual order form ...... 10-22 Vanitymirror...... 3-31 Radio Owner's manual/service manual order Car phone or CB radio ...... 4-54 Mirrors...... 3-31 information...... 10-22 Moonroof...... 2-58,2-58 FM/AMradio...... 4-36 Steering wheel audio control switch...... 4-49 P N Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test ...... 10-21 Parking RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA)...... 5-37 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ...... 4-2 Parking/parkingonhills...... 5-70 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-56 NISSAN Intelligent Key®...... 3-2,3-11 Parkingbrake...... 5-25 Rearseat...... 1-6 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-54 Rearviewmirror...... 3-31 Power indicator...... 5-13 RearViewMonitor...... 4-8 Power door locks ...... 3-6 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Rear window and outside mirror Poweroutlet...... 2-48 System...... 2-37,5-10,5-14 defrosterswitch...... 2-40 Powerrearwindows...... 2-56 Recommended Fluids ...... 10-2 Power steering system ...... 5-71 Powerwindows...... 2-55 11-5 Recorders Armrests...... 1-7 Precautions when starting and EventData...... 10-22 Frontseats...... 1-2 driving ...... 5-2 Refrigerant recommendation...... 10-8 Heatedseats...... 2-46 Push starting ...... 6-11 Registering a vehicle in another Manual front seat adjustment ...... 1-3 Starting the engine ...... 5-14 country ...... 10-11 Rearseat...... 1-6 Starting the engine ...... 5-14 Remote keyless entry system ...... 3-8 Security indicator light ...... 2-22 Starting the engine (models with NISSAN Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-20 Security system Intelligent Key® system) ...... 5-16 (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Steering engine start...... 2-37,5-10,5-14 Power steering system ...... 5-71 S Security systems Steering wheel ...... 3-30 Vehicle security system ...... 2-35,2-35 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-49 Safety Self-adjustingbrakes...... 8-21 Stoplight...... 8-32 Child safety rear door lock ...... 3-7 Service manual order form...... 10-22 Storage...... 2-49 Childseatbelts.....1-23, 1-29, 1-35, 1-40 Servicing air conditioner ...... 4-31 Storagetray...... 2-51 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-20 Shifting Sunglasses case...... 2-53 Seat adjustment Continuously Variable Transmission Sunglasses holder...... 2-53 Front manual seat adjustment ...... 1-3 (CVT) ...... 5-18 Sunroof ...... 2-58, 2-58 Front power seat adjustment ...... 1-5 Manual transmission ...... 5-23 Sunvisors...... 3-30 Rear seat adjustment ...... 1-6 Shiftlockrelease...... 5-21 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-61 Seatback pockets ...... 2-50 Shoulder belt height adjustment ...... 1-19 Supplemental air bag warning Seat belt Side air bag system (See supplemental light...... 1-62, 2-19 Childsafety...... 1-20 side air bag and curtain side-impact Supplemental front impact air bag Infants and small children ...... 1-21 airbagsystem)...... 1-58 system...... 1-50 InjuredPerson...... 1-15 Siri® Eyes-Free ...... 4-51 Supplemental restraint system Largerchildren...... 1-21 Spark plug replacement ...... 8-17 Information and warning labels.....1-61 Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-12 Spark plugs ...... 8-17 Precautions on supplemental Pregnant women...... 1-15 Specifications...... 10-9 restraintsystem...... 1-43 Seat belt extenders ...... 1-19 Speedometer...... 2-4,2-5 Supplemental restraint system Seat belt maintenance ...... 1-20 SPORT mode switch ...... 5-26 (Supplemental air bag system) ...... 1-43 Seatbelts...... 1-12, 7-7 Spotlights(Seemaplight)...... 2-60 Supplemental side and curtain Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19 SRS warning label ...... 1-61 side-impact air bag system ...... 1-58 Three-pointtypewithretractor.....1-15 Stability control...... 5-74 Switch Seat belt extenders ...... 1-19 Standard maintenance ...... 9-8 Autolightswitch...... 2-41 Seatbeltwarninglight...... 1-15, 2-19 Starting Automatic power window switch . . .2-56 Seats Before starting the engine ...... 5-14 Foglightswitch...... 2-45 Adjustment ...... 1-2 Jumpstarting...... 6-9,8-15 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 11-6 Headlight and turn signal switch....2-40 Towing V Headlightcontrolswitch...... 2-40 2-wheel drive models ...... 6-14 Ignition switch ...... 5-9 4-wheel drive models ...... 6-13 Vanitymirror...... 3-31 Instrument brightness control .....2-44 Flattowing...... 10-18 Variablevoltagecontrolsystem...... 8-16 Power door lock switch ...... 3-6 Trailertowing...... 10-18 Vehicle dimensions and weights .....10-10 Rear window and outside mirror Towingatrailer...... 10-18 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF defrosterswitch...... 2-40 Towingyourvehicle...... 6-12 switch...... 2-47 Turn signal switch ...... 2-44 Transceiver Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-74 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver . . .2-62, Vehicle identification ...... 10-11 T 2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-65, 2-66 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-11 Transmission Vehicle identification number (VIN) Tachometer ...... 2-7 Continuously Variable Transmission (Chassis number) ...... 10-11 Temperature gauge (CVT) fluid ...... 8-11 Vehicle identification number (VIN) Engine coolant temperature gauge. . .2-7 Driving with Continuously Variable plate...... 10-11 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Transmission (CVT) ...... 5-9,5-17 Vehicle immobilizer system . . .2-37, 5-10, 5-14 engine start...... 2-37,5-10,5-14 Driving with manual Vehicleinformationdisplay...... 2-24 Three-waycatalyst...... 5-2 transmission ...... 5-10,5-23 Vehicle loading information ...... 10-14 Tilt Travel (See registering a vehicle in Vehiclerecovery...... 6-14 Vehicle security system ...... 2-35,2-35 Telescopicsteering...... 3-30 another country) ...... 10-11 Vehicle security system Tire Trip computer ...... 2-9 (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), Flattire...... 6-3,6-3 Trip odometer ...... 2-4,2-5 Spare tire ...... 6-4,8-45 engine start...... 2-37,5-10,5-14 Trunk access through the rear seat ....3-27 Vents...... 4-15 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-13 Trunklid...... 3-26 Tire chains ...... 8-41 Visors...... 3-30 Trunk lid lock opener lever...... 3-26 Voice Prompt Interrupt ...... 4-57,4-58 Tire pressure ...... 8-34 Trunklight...... 2-62 Tirerotation...... 8-42 Turn signal switch ...... 2-44 Types of tires ...... 8-40 W Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-19 Wheels and tires ...... 8-34 U Warning Wheel/tire size...... 10-10 Airbagwarninglight...... 1-62, 2-19 Tire pressure Anti-lock brake warning light ...... 2-14 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-16 Uniform tire quality grading ...... 10-19 Battery charge warning light ...... 2-15 Tire Pressure Monitoring System USBinterface...... 4-40 Brakewarninglight...... 2-14 (TPMS)...... 2-6,5-3 Door open warning light ...... 2-15 Engine oil pressure warning light....2-15 11-7 Hazard warning flasher switch...... 6-2 Wiper Loose fuel cap warning ...... 2-6,2-33 Wiper blades ...... 8-19 Lowfuelwarninglight....2-16,2-18,2-32 Wiper and washer switch ...... 2-38 Low tire pressure warning light .....2-16 Low windshield-washer fluid warninglight...... 2-18,2-33 Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53 Seatbeltwarninglight...... 1-15, 2-19 Supplemental air bag warning light...... 1-62, 2-19 Vehicle security system ...... 2-35,2-35 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders...... 2-20,3-21 Warning labels (for SRS) ...... 1-61 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders...... 2-20,3-21 Audible reminders...... 2-20,3-21 Indicatorlights...... 2-20,3-21 Warninglights...... 2-20,3-21 Warninglights...... 2-20,3-21 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders ...... 2-13 Weights (See dimensions and weights) ...... 10-10 Wheels and tires ...... 8-34 Wheel/tire size...... 10-10 When traveling or registering in another country ...... 10-11 Windows...... 2-55 Locking passengers' windows .....2-55 Powerrearwindows...... 2-56 Powerwindows...... 2-55 Rearpowerwindows...... 2-56 Windshield-washer fluid ...... 8-13 Windshield wiper blades ...... 8-19

11-8 GAS STATION INFORMATION

FUEL RECOMMENDATION: ∙ Under no circumstances should a ∙ U.S. government regulations require MRA8DE leaded gasoline be used, because this ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden- will damage the three-way catalyst. tified by a small, square, orange and Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- black label with the common abbre- ∙ Do not use a fuel containing more tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock viation or the appropriate percentage than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your Index) number (Research octane number for that region. vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel 91). containing more than 15% ethanol. For additional information, refer to “Recom- MR16DDT Using a fuel containing more than 15% mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” ethanol in a vehicle not specifically in the “Technical and consumer informa- NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded designed for a fuel containing more tion” section of this manual. premium gasoline with an octane rating of than 15% ethanol can adversely affect at least 91 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number the emission control devices and sys- ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION: (Research octane number 96). If unleaded tems of the vehicle. Damage caused premium gasoline is not available, you may by such fuel is not covered by the • Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc- NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to “Engine tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Research oc- ∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc- oil and oil filter recommendations” in the tane rating number 91), but you may notice tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl “Technical and consumer information” sec- a decrease in performance. manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using tion of this manual. fuel containing MMT may adversely CAUTION affect vehicle performance and ve- COLD TIRE PRESSURE: ∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens- For additional information, refer to “Tire and label can operate on E-85. Fuel system ers are labeled to indicate MMT con- Loading Information label” in the “Technical or other damage can occur if E-85 is tent, so you may have to consult your and consumer information” section of this gasoline retailer for more details. used in vehicles that are not designed manual. to run on E-85. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformu- The label is typically located on the driver ∙ Using a fuel other than that specified lated gasoline. side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For could adversely affect the emission additional information, refer to “Wheels and control system, and may also affect tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this the warranty coverage. manual. RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE: During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to “Break-in schedule” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life. 2019 NISSAN SENTRA B17-D

Printing : June 2019 Publication No.: OM19EM 0B17U2 Printed in the U.S.A. ‘19 B17-D